The Project Gutenberg eBook of Elements of arithmetic This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook. Title: Elements of arithmetic Author: Augustus De Morgan Release date: August 1, 2022 [eBook #68662] Most recently updated: October 18, 2024 Language: English Original publication: United Kingdom: Walton and Maberly Credits: Richard Tonsing and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive) *** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ELEMENTS OF ARITHMETIC *** Transcriber’s Notes: Underscores “_” before and after a word or phrase indicate _italics_ in the original text. Equal signs “=” before and after a word or phrase indicate =bold= in the original text. Carat symbol “^” designates a superscript. Small capitals have been converted to SOLID capitals. Illustrations have been moved so they do not break up paragraphs. Old or antiquated spellings have been preserved. Typographical and punctuation errors have been silently corrected. ELEMENTS OF ARITHMETIC. BY AUGUSTUS DE MORGAN, OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE; FELLOW OF THE ROYAL ASTRONOMICAL SOCIETY, AND OF THE CAMBRIDGE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY; PROFESSOR OF MATHEMATICS IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, LONDON. “Hominis studiosi est intelligere, quas utilitates proprie afferat arithmetica his, qui solidam et perfectam doctrinam in cæteris philosophiæ partibus explicant. Quod enim vulgo dicunt, principium esse dimidium totius, id vel maxime in philosophiæ partibus conspicitur.”--MELANCTHON. “Ce n’est point par la routine qu’on e’instruit, c’est par sa propre réflexion; et il est essentiel de contracter l’habitude de se rendre raison de ce qu’on fait: cette habitude s’acquiert plus facilement qu’on ne pense; et une fois acquise, elle ne se perd plus.”--CONDILLAC. _SEVENTEENTH THOUSAND._ LONDON: WALTON AND MABERLY, UPPER GOWER STREET, AND IVY LANE, PATERNOSTER ROW. M.DCCC.LVIII. LONDON: PRINTED BY J. WERTHEIMER AND CO., CIRCUS-PLACE, FINSBURY-CIRCUS. PREFACE. The preceding editions of this work were published in 1830, 1832, 1835, and 1840. This fifth edition differs from the three preceding, as to the body of the work, in nothing which need prevent the four, or any two of them, from being used together in a class. But it is considerably augmented by the addition of eleven new Appendixes,[1] relating to matters on which it is most desirable that the advanced student should possess information. The first Appendix, on _Computation_, and the sixth, on _Decimal Money_, should be read and practised by every student with as much attention as any part of the work. The mastery of the rules for instantaneous conversion of the usual fractions of a pound sterling into decimal fractions, gives the possessor the greater part of the advantage which he would derive from the introduction of a decimal coinage. At the time when this work was first published, the importance of establishing arithmetic in the young mind upon reason and demonstration, was not admitted by many. The case is now altered: schools exist in which rational arithmetic is taught, and mere rules are made to do no more than their proper duty. There is no necessity to advocate a change which is actually in progress, as the works which are published every day sufficiently shew. And my principal reason for alluding to the subject here, is merely to warn those who want nothing but routine, that this is not the book for their purpose. A. DE MORGAN. _London, May 1, 1846._ [1] Some separate copies of these Appendixes are printed, for those who may desire to add them to the former editions. TABLE OF CONTENTS. BOOK I. SECTION PAGE I. Numeration 1 II. Addition and Subtraction 14 III. Multiplication 24 IV. Division 34 V. Fractions 51 VI. Decimal Fractions 65 VII. Square Root 89 VIII. Proportion 100 IX. Permutations and Combinations 118 BOOK II. I. Weights and Measures, &c. 124 II. Rule of Three 144 III. Interest, &c. 150 APPENDIX. I. On the mode of computing 161 II. On verification by casting out nines and elevens 166 III. On scales of notation 168 IV. On the definition of fractions 171 V. On characteristics 174 VI. On decimal money 176 VII. On the main principle of book-keeping 180 VIII. On the reduction of fractions to others of nearly equal value 190 IX. On some general properties of numbers 193 X. On combinations 201 XI. On Horner’s method of solving equations 210 XII. Rules for the application of arithmetic to geometry 217 ELEMENTS OF ARITHMETIC. BOOK I. PRINCIPLES OF ARITHMETIC. SECTION I. NUMERATION. 1. Imagine a multitude of objects of the same kind assembled together; for example, a company of horsemen. One of the first things that must strike a spectator, although unused to counting, is, that to each man there is a horse. Now, though men and horses are things perfectly unlike, yet, because there is one of the first kind to every one of the second, one man to every horse, a new notion will be formed in the mind of the observer, which we express in words by saying that there is the same _number_ of men as of horses. A savage, who had no other way of counting, might remember this number by taking a pebble for each man. Out of a method as rude as this has sprung our system of calculation, by the steps which are pointed out in the following articles. Suppose that there are two companies of horsemen, and a person wishes to know in which of them is the greater number, and also to be able to recollect how many there are in each. 2. Suppose that while the first company passes by, he drops a pebble into a basket for each man whom he sees. There is no connexion between the pebbles and the horsemen but this, that for every horseman there is a pebble; that is, in common language, the _number_ of pebbles and of horsemen is the same. Suppose that while the second company passes, he drops a pebble for each man into a second basket: he will then have two baskets of pebbles, by which he will be able to convey to any other person a notion of how many horsemen there were in each company. When he wishes to know which company was the larger, or contained most horsemen, he will take a pebble out of each basket, and put them aside. He will go on doing this as often as he can, that is, until one of the baskets is emptied. Then, if he also find the other basket empty, he says that both companies contained the same number of horsemen; if the second basket still contain some pebbles, he can tell by them how many more were in the second than in the first. 3. In this way a savage could keep an account of any numbers in which he was interested. He could thus register his children, his cattle, or the number of summers and winters which he had seen, by means of pebbles, or any other small objects which could be got in large numbers. Something of this sort is the practice of savage nations at this day, and it has in some places lasted even after the invention of better methods of reckoning. At Rome, in the time of the republic, the prætor, one of the magistrates, used to go every year in great pomp, and drive a nail into the door of the temple of Jupiter; a way of remembering the number of years which the city had been built, which probably took its rise before the introduction of writing. 4. In process of time, names would be given to those collections of pebbles which are met with most frequently. But as long as small numbers only were required, the most convenient way of reckoning them would be by means of the fingers. Any person could make with his two hands the little calculations which would be necessary for his purposes, and would name all the different collections of the fingers. He would thus get words in his own language answering to one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten. As his wants increased, he would find it necessary to give names to larger numbers; but here he would be stopped by the immense quantity of words which he must have, in order to express all the numbers which he would be obliged to make use of. He must, then, after giving a separate name to a few of the first numbers, manage to express all other numbers by means of those names. 5. I now shew how this has been done in our own language. The English names of numbers have been formed from the Saxon: and in the following table each number after ten is written down in one column, while another shews its connexion with those which have preceded it. One eleven ten and one[2] two twelve ten and two three thirteen ten and three four fourteen ten and four five fifteen ten and five six sixteen ten and six seven seventeen ten and seven eight eighteen ten and eight nine nineteen ten and nine ten twenty two tens twenty-one two tens and one fifty five tens twenty-two two tens and two sixty six tens &c. &c. &c. &c. seventy seven tens thirty three tens eighty eight tens &c. &c. ninety nine tens forty four tens a hundred ten tens &c. &c. a hundred and one ten tens and one &c. &c. a thousand ten hundreds ten thousand a hundred thousand a million ten hundred thousand or one thousand thousand ten millions a hundred millions &c. [2] It has been supposed that _eleven_ and _twelve_ are derived from the Saxon for _one left_ and _two left_ (meaning, after ten is removed); but there seems better reason to think that _leven_ is a word meaning ten, and connected with _decem_. 6. Words, written down in ordinary language, would very soon be too long for such continual repetition as takes place in calculation. Short signs would then be substituted for words; but it would be impossible to have a distinct sign for every number: so that when some few signs had been chosen, it would be convenient to invent others for the rest out of those already made. The signs which we use areas follow: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 nought one two three four five six seven eight nine I now proceed to explain the way in which these signs are made to represent other numbers. 7. Suppose a man first to hold up one finger, then two, and so on, until he has held up every finger, and suppose a number of men to do the same thing. It is plain that we may thus distinguish one number from another, by causing two different sets of persons to hold up each a certain number of fingers, and that we may do this in many different ways. For example, the number fifteen might be indicated either by fifteen men each holding up one finger, or by four men each holding up two fingers and a fifth holding up seven, and so on. The question is, of all these contrivances for expressing the number, which is the most convenient? In the choice which is made for this purpose consists what is called the method of _numeration_. 8. I have used the foregoing explanation because it is very probable that our system of numeration, and almost every other which is used in the world, sprung from the practice of reckoning on the fingers, which children usually follow when first they begin to count. The method which I have described is the rudest possible; but, by a little alteration, a system may be formed which will enable us to express enormous numbers with great ease. 9. Suppose that you are going to count some large number, for example, to measure a number of yards of cloth. Opposite to yourself suppose a man to be placed, who keeps his eye upon you, and holds up a finger for every yard which he sees you measure. When ten yards have been measured he will have held up ten fingers, and will not be able to count any further unless he begin again, holding up one finger at the eleventh yard, two at the twelfth, and so on. But to know how many have been counted, you must know, not only how many fingers he holds up, but also how many times he has begun again. You may keep this in view by placing another man on the right of the former, who directs his eye towards his companion, and holds up one finger the moment he perceives him ready to begin again, that is, as soon as ten yards have been measured. Each finger of the first man stands only for one yard, but each finger of the second stands for as many as all the fingers of the first together, that is, for ten. In this way a hundred may be counted, because the first may now reckon his ten fingers once for each finger of the second man, that is, ten times in all, and ten tens is one hundred (5).[3] Now place a third man at the right of the second, who shall hold up a finger whenever he perceives the second ready to begin again. One finger of the third man counts as many as all the ten fingers of the second, that is, counts one hundred. In this way we may proceed until the third has all his fingers extended, which will signify that ten hundred or one thousand have been counted (5). A fourth man would enable us to count as far as ten thousand, a fifth as far as one hundred thousand, a sixth as far as a million, and so on. [3] The references are to the preceding articles. 10. Each new person placed himself towards your left in the rank opposite to you. Now rule columns as in the next page, and to the right of them all place in words the number which you wish to represent; in the first column on the right, place the number of fingers which the first man will be holding up when that number of yards has been measured. In the next column, place the fingers which the second man will then be holding up; and so on. |7th.|6th.|5th.|4th.|3rd.|2nd.|1st.| I.| | | | | | 5 | 7 | fifty-seven. II.| | | | | 1 | 0 | 4 | one hundred and four. III.| | | | | 1 | 1 | 0 | one hundred and ten. IV.| | | | 2 | 3 | 4 | 8 | two thousand three hundred | | | | | | | | and forty-eight. V.| | | 1 | 5 | 9 | 0 | 6 | fifteen thousand nine | | | | | | | | hundred and six. VI.| | 1 | 8 | 7 | 0 | 0 | 4 | one hundred and | | | | | | | | eighty-seven thousand | | | | | | | | and four. VII.| 3 | 6 | 9 | 7 | 2 | 8 | 5 | three million, six hundred | | | | | | | | and ninety-seven | | | | | | | | thousand, two hundred and | | | | | | | | eighty-five. 11. In I. the number fifty-seven is expressed. This means (5) five tens and seven. The first has therefore counted all his fingers five times, and has counted seven fingers more. This is shewn by five fingers of the second man being held up, and seven of the first. In II. the number one hundred and four is represented. This number is (5) ten tens and four. The second person has therefore just reckoned all his fingers once, which is denoted by the third person holding up one finger; but he has not yet begun again, because he does not hold up a finger until the first has counted ten, of which ten only four are completed. When all the last-mentioned ten have been counted, he then holds up one finger, and the first being ready to begin again, has no fingers extended, and the number obtained is eleven tens, or ten tens and one ten, or one hundred and ten. This is the case in III. You will now find no difficulty with the other numbers in the table. 12. In all these numbers a figure in the first column stands for only as many yards as are written under that figure in (6). A figure in the second column stands, not for as many yards, but for as many tens of yards; a figure in the third column stands for as many hundreds of yards; in the fourth column for as many thousands of yards; and so on: that is, if we suppose a figure to move from any column to the one on its left, it stands for ten times as many yards as before. Recollect this, and you may cease to draw the lines between the columns, because each figure will be sufficiently well known by the _place_ in which it is; that is, by the number of figures which come upon the right hand of it. 13. It is important to recollect that this way of writing numbers, which has become so familiar as to seem the _natural_ method, is not more natural than any other. For example, we might agree to signify one ten by the figure of one with an accent, thus, 1′; twenty or two tens by 2′; and so on: one hundred or ten tens by 1″; two hundred by 2″; one thousand by 1‴; and so on: putting Roman figures for accents when they become too many to write with convenience. The fourth number in the table would then be written 2‴ 3′ 4′ 8, which might also be expressed by 8 4′ 3″ 2‴, 4′ 8 3″ 2‴; or the order of the figures might be changed in any way, because their meaning depends upon the accents which are attached to them, and not upon the place in which they stand. Hence, a cipher would never be necessary; for 104 would be distinguished from 14 by writing for the first 1″ 4, and for the second 1′ 4. The common method is preferred, not because it is more exact than this, but because it is more simple. 14. The distinction between our method of numeration and that of the ancients, is in the meaning of each figure depending partly upon the place in which it stands. Thus, in 44444 each four stands for four of _something_; but in the first column on the right it signifies only four of the pebbles which are counted; in the second, it means four collections of ten pebbles each; in the third, four of one hundred each; and so on. 15. The things measured in (11) were yards of cloth. In this case one yard of cloth is called the _unit_. The first figure on the right is said to be in the _units’ place_, because it only stands for so many units as are in the number that is written under it in (6). The second figure is said to be in the _tens’_ place, because it stands for a number of tens of units. The third, fourth, and fifth figures are in the places of the _hundreds_, _thousands_, and _tens of thousands_, for a similar reason. 16. If the quantity measured had been acres of land, an acre of land would have been called the _unit_, for the unit is _one_ of the things which are measured. Quantities are of two sorts; those which contain an exact number of units, as 47 yards, and those which do not, as 47 yards and a half. Of these, for the present, we only consider the first. 17. In most parts of arithmetic, all quantities must have the same unit. You cannot say that 2 yards and 3 feet make 5 _yards_ or 5 _feet_, because 2 and 3 make 5; yet you may say that 2 _yards_ and 3 _yards_ make 5 _yards_, and that 2 _feet_ and 3 _feet_ make 5 _feet_. It would be absurd to try to measure a quantity of one kind with a unit which is a quantity of another kind; for example, to attempt to tell how many yards there are in a gallon, or how many bushels of corn there are in a barrel of wine. 18. All things which are true of some numbers of one unit are true of the same numbers of any other unit. Thus, 15 pebbles and 7 pebbles together make 22 pebbles; 15 acres and 7 acres together make 22 acres, and so on. From this we come to say that 15 and 7 make 22, meaning that 15 things of the same kind, and 7 more of the same kind as the first, together make 22 of that kind, whether the kind mentioned be pebbles, horsemen, acres of land, or any other. For these it is but necessary to say, once for all, that 15 and 7 make 22. Therefore, in future, on this part of the subject I shall cease to talk of any particular units, such as pebbles or acres, and speak of numbers only. A number, considered without intending to allude to any particular things, is called an _abstract_ number: and it then merely signifies repetitions of a unit, or the _number of times_ a unit is repeated. 19. I will now repeat the principal things which have been mentioned in this chapter. I. Ten signs are used, one to stand for nothing, the rest for the first nine numbers. They are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. The first of these is called a _cipher_. II. Higher numbers have not signs for themselves, but are signified by placing the signs already mentioned by the side of each other, and agreeing that the first figure on the right hand shall keep the value which it has when it stands alone; that the second on the right hand shall mean ten times as many as it does when it stands alone; that the third figure shall mean one hundred times as many as it does when it stands alone; the fourth, one thousand times as many; and so on. III. The right hand figure is said to be in the _units’ place_, the next to that in the _tens’ place_, the third in the _hundreds’ place_, and so on. IV. When a number is itself an exact number of tens, hundreds, or thousands, &c., as many ciphers must be placed on the right of it as will bring the number into the place which is intended for it. The following are examples: Fifty, or five tens, 50: seven hundred, 700. Five hundred and twenty-eight thousand, 528000. If it were not for the ciphers, these numbers would be mistaken for 5, 7, and 528. V. A cipher in the middle of a number becomes necessary when any one of the denominations, units, tens, &c. is wanting. Thus, twenty thousand and six is 20006, two hundred and six is 206. Ciphers might be placed at the beginning of a number, but they would have no meaning. Thus 026 is the same as 26, since the cipher merely shews that there are no hundreds, which is evident from the number itself. 20. If we take out of a number, as 16785, any of those figures which come together, as 67, and ask, what does this sixty-seven mean? of what is it sixty-seven? the answer is, sixty-seven of the same collections as the 7, when it was in the number; that is, 67 hundreds. For the 6 is 6 thousands, or 6 ten hundreds, or sixty hundreds; which, with the 7, or 7 hundreds, is 67 hundreds: similarly, the 678 is 678 tens. This number may then be expressed either as 1 ten thousand 6 thousands 7 hundreds 8 tens and 5; or 16 thousands 78 tens and 5; or 1 ten thousand 678 tens and 5; or 167 hundreds 8 tens and 5; or 1678 tens and 5, and so on. 21. EXERCISES. I. Write down the signs for--four hundred and seventy-six; two thousand and ninety-seven; sixty-four thousand three hundred and fifty; two millions seven hundred and four; five hundred and seventy-eight millions of millions. II. Write at full length 53, 1805, 1830, 66707, 180917324, 66713721, 90976390, 25000000. III. What alteration takes place in a number made up entirely of nines, such as 99999, by adding one to it? IV. Shew that a number which has five figures in it must be greater than one which has four, though the first have none but small figures in it, and the second none but large ones. For example, that 10111 is greater than 9879. 22. You now see that the convenience of our method of numeration arises from a few simple signs being made to change their value as they change the column in which they are placed. The same advantage arises from counting in a similar way all the articles which are used in every-day life. For example, we count money by dividing it into pounds, shillings, and pence, of which a shilling is 12 pence, and a pound 20 shillings, or 240 pence. We write a number of pounds, shillings, and pence in three columns, generally placing points between the columns. Thus, 263 pence would not be written as 263, but as £1. 1. 11, where £ shews that the 1 in the first column is a pound. Here is a _system of numeration_ in which a number in the second column on the right means 12 times as much as the same number in the first; and one in the third column is twenty times as great as the same in the second, or 240 times as great as the same in the first. In each of the tables of measures which you will hereafter meet with, you will see a separate system of numeration, but the methods of calculation for all will be the same. 23. In order to make the language of arithmetic shorter, some other signs are used. They are as follow: I. 15 + 38 means that 38 is to be added to 15, and is the same thing as 53. This is the _sum_ of 15 and 38, and is read fifteen _plus_ thirty-eight (_plus_ is the Latin for _more_). II. 64-12 means that 12 is to be taken away from 64, and is the same thing as 52. This is the _difference_ of 64 and 12, and is read sixty-four _minus_ twelve (_minus_ is the Latin for _less_). III. 9 × 8 means that 8 is to be taken 9 times, and is the same thing as 72. This is the _product_ of 9 and 8, and is read nine _into_ eight. IV. 108/6 means that 108 is to be divided by 6, or that you must find out how many sixes there are in 108; and is the same thing as 18. This is the _quotient_ of 108 and 6; and is read a hundred and eight _by_ six. V. When two numbers, or collections of numbers, with the foregoing signs, are the same, the sign = is put between them. Thus, that 7 and 5 make 12, is written in this way, 7 + 5 = 12. This is called an _equation_, and is read, seven _plus_ five _equals_ twelve. It is plain that we may construct as many equations as we please. Thus: 12 7 + 9 - 3 = 12 + 1; --- - 1 + 3 × 2 = 11, 2 and so on. 24. It often becomes necessary to speak of something which is true not of any one number only, but of all numbers. For example, take 10 and 7; their sum[4] is 17, their difference is 3. If this sum and difference be added together, we get 20, which is twice the greater of the two numbers first chosen. If from 17 we take 3, we get 14, which is twice the less of the two numbers. The same thing will be found to hold good of any two numbers, which gives this general proposition,--If the sum and difference of two numbers be added together, the result is twice the greater of the two; if the difference be taken from the sum, the result is twice the lesser of the two. If, then, we take _any_ numbers, and call them the first number and the second number, and let the first number be the greater; we have [4] Any little computations which occur in the rest of this section may be made on the fingers, or with counters. (1st No. + 2d No.) + (1st No. - 2d No.) = twice 1st No. (1st No. + 2d No.) - (1st No. - 2d No.) = twice 2d No. The brackets here enclose the things which must be first done, before the signs which join the brackets are made use of. Thus, 8-(2 + 1) × (1 + 1) signifies that 2 + 1 must be taken 1 + 1 times, and the product must be subtracted from 8. In the same manner, any result made from two or more numbers, which is true whatever numbers are taken, may be represented by using first No., second No., &c., to stand for them, and by the signs in (23). But this may be much shortened; for as first No., second No., &c., may mean any numbers, the letters _a_ and _b_ may be used instead of these words; and it must now be recollected that _a_ and _b_ stand for two numbers, provided only that _a_ is greater than _b_. Let twice _a_ be represented by 2_a_, and twice _b_ by 2_b_. The equations then become (_a_ + _b_) + (_a_ - _b_) = 2_a_, and (_a_ + _b_) - (_a_ - _b_) = 2_b_. This may be explained still further, as follows: 25. Suppose a number of sealed packets, marked _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, &c., on the outside, each of which contains a distinct but unknown number of counters. As long as we do not know how many counters each contains, we can make the letter which belongs to each stand for its number, so as to talk of _the number a_, instead of the number in the packet marked _a_. And because we do not know the numbers, it does not therefore follow that we know nothing whatever about them; for there are some connexions which exist between all numbers, which we call _general properties_ of numbers. For example, take any number, multiply it by itself, and subtract one from the result; and then subtract one from the number itself. The first of these will always contain the second exactly as many times as the original number increased by one. Take the number 6; this multiplied by itself is 36, which diminished by one is 35; again, 6 diminished by 1 is 5; and 35 contains 5, 7 times, that is, 6 + 1 times. This will be found to be true of any number, and, when proved, may be said to be true of the number contained in the packet marked _a_, or of the number _a_. If we represent a multiplied by itself by _aa_,[5] we have, by (23) _aa_ - 1 ------------- = _a_ + 1. _a_ - 1 [5] This should be (23) _a_ × _a_, but the sign × is unnecessary here. It is used with numbers, as in 2 × 7, to prevent confounding this, which is 14, with 27. 26. When, therefore, we wish to talk of a number without specifying any one in particular, we use a letter to represent it. Thus: Suppose we wish to reason upon what will follow from dividing a number into three parts, without considering what the number is, or what are the parts into which it is divided. Let _a_ stand for the number, and _b_, _c_, and _d_, for the parts into which it is divided. Then, by our supposition, _a_ = _b_ + _c_ + _d_. On this we can reason, and produce results which do not belong to any particular number, but are true of all. Thus, if one part be taken away from the number, the other two will remain, or _a_ - _b_ = _c_ + _d_. If each part be doubled, the whole number will be doubled, or 2_a_ = 2_b_ + 2_c_ + 2_d_. If we diminish one of the parts, as _d_, by a number _x_, we diminish the whole number just as much, or _a_ - _x_ = _b_ + _c_ + (_d_ - _x_). 27. EXERCISES. What is _a_ + 2_b_ - _c_, where _a_ = 12, _b_ = 18, _c_ = 7?--_Answer_, 41. _aa_ - _bb_ What is ----------- , _a_ - _b_ where _a_ = 6 and _b_ = 2?--_Ans._ 8. What is the difference between (_a_ + _b_)(_c_ + _d_) and _a_ + _bc_ + _d_, for the following values of _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_? _a_ | _b_ | _c_ | _d_ | _Ans._ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 10 2 | 12 | 7 | 1 | 25 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 SECTION II. ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION. 28. There is no process in arithmetic which does not consist entirely in the increase or diminution of numbers. There is then nothing which might not be done with collections of pebbles. Probably, at first, either these or the fingers were used. Our word _calculation_ is derived from the Latin word _calculus_, which means a pebble. Shorter ways of counting have been invented, by which many calculations, which would require long and tedious reckoning if pebbles were used, are made at once with very little trouble. The four great methods are, Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division; of which, the last two are only ways of doing several of the first and second at once. 29. When one number is increased by others, the number which is as large as all the numbers together is called their _sum_. The process of finding the sum of two or more numbers is called ADDITION, and, as was said before, is denoted by placing a cross (+) between the numbers which are to be added together. Suppose it required to find the sum of 1834 and 2799. In order to add these numbers, take them to pieces, dividing each into its units, tens, hundreds, and thousands: 1834 is 1 thous. 8 hund. 3 tens and 4; 2799 is 2 thous. 7 hund. 9 tens and 9. Each number is thus broken up into four parts. If to each part of the first you add the part of the second which is under it, and then put together what you get from these additions, you will have added 1834 and 2799. In the first number are 4 units, and in the second 9: these will, when the numbers are added together, contribute 13 units to the sum. Again, the 3 tens in the first and the 9 tens in the second will contribute 12 tens to the sum. The 8 hundreds in the first and the 7 hundreds in the second will add 15 hundreds to the sum; and the thousand in the first with the 2 thousands in the second will contribute 3 thousands to the sum; therefore the sum required is 3 thousands, 15 hundreds, 12 tens, and 13 units. To simplify this result, you must recollect that-- 13 units are 1 ten and 3 units. 12 tens are 1 hund. and 2 tens. 15 hund. are 1 thous. and 5 hund. 3 thous. are 3 thous. Now collect the numbers on the right hand side together, as was done before, and this will give, as the sum of 1834 and 2799, 4 thousands, 6 hundreds, 3 tens, and 3 units, which (19) is written 4633. 30. The former process, written with the signs of (23) is as follows: 1834 = 1 × 1000 + 8 × 100 + 3 × 10 + 4 2799 = 2 × 1000 + 7 × 100 + 9 × 10 + 9 Therefore, 1834 + 2799 = 3 × 1000 + 15 × 100 + 12 × 10 + 13 But 13 = 1 × 10 + 3 12 × 10 = 1 × 100 + 2 × 10 15 × 100 = 1 × 1000 + 5 × 100 3 × 1000 = 3 × 1000 Therefore, 1834 + 2799 = 4 × 1000 + 6 × 100 + 3 × 10 + 3 = 4633. 31. The same process is to be followed in all cases, but not at the same length. In order to be able to go through it, you must know how to add together the simple numbers. This can only be done by memory; and to help the memory you should make the following table three or four times for yourself: +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ The use of this table is as follows: Suppose you want to find the sum of 8 and 7. Look in the left-hand column for either of them, 8, for example; and look in the top column for 7. On the same line as 8, and underneath 7, you find 15, their sum. 32. When this table has been thoroughly committed to memory, so that you can tell at once the sum of any two numbers, neither of which exceeds 9, you should exercise yourself in adding and subtracting two numbers, one of which is greater than 9 and the other less. You should write down a great number of such sentences as the following, which will exercise you at the same time in addition, and in the use of the signs mentioned in (23). 12 + 6 = 18 22 + 6 = 28 19 + 8 = 27 54 + 9 = 63 56 + 7 = 63 22 + 8 = 30 100 - 9 = 91 27 - 8 = 19 44 - 6 = 38, &c. 33. When the last two articles have been thoroughly studied, you will be able to find the sum of any numbers by the following process,[6] which is the same as that in (29). [6] In this and all other processes, the student is strongly recommended to look at and follow the first Appendix. RULE I. Place the numbers under one another, units under units, tens under tens, and so on. II. Add together the units of all, and part the _whole_ number thus obtained into units and tens. Thus, if 85 be the number, part it into 8 tens and 5 units; if 136 be the number, part it into 13 tens and 6 units (20). III. Write down the units of this number under the units of the rest, and keep in memory the number of tens. IV. Add together all the numbers in the column of tens, remembering to take in (or carry, as it is called) the tens which you were told to recollect in III., and divide this number of tens into tens and hundreds. Thus, if 335 tens be the number obtained, part this into 33 hundreds and 5 tens. V. Place the number of tens under the tens, and remember the number of hundreds. VI. Proceed in this way through every column, and at the last column, instead of separating the number you obtain into two parts, write it all down before the rest. EXAMPLE.--What is 1805 + 36 + 19727 + 3 + 1474 + 2008 1805 36 19727 3 1474 2008 ----- 25053 The addition of the units’ line, or 8 + 4 + 3 + 7 + 6 + 5, gives 33, that is, 3 tens and 3 units. Put 3 in the units’ place, and add together the line of tens, taking in at the beginning the 3 tens which were created by the addition of the units’ line. That is, find 3 + 0 + 7 + 2 + 3 + 0, which gives 15 for the number of tens; that is, 1 hundred and 5 tens. Add the line of hundreds together, taking care to add the 1 hundred which arose in the addition of the line of tens; that is, find 1 + 0 + 4 + 7 + 8, which gives exactly 20 hundreds, or 2 thousands and no hundreds. Put a cipher in the hundreds’ place (because, if you do not, the next figure will be taken for hundreds instead of thousands), and add the figures in the thousands’ line together, remembering the 2 thousands which arose from the hundreds’ line; that is, find 2 + 2 + 1 + 9 + 1, which gives 15 thousands, or 1 ten thousand and 5 thousand. Write 5 under the line of thousands, and collect the figures in the line of tens of thousands, remembering the ten thousand which arose out of the thousands’ line; that is, find 1 + 1, or 2 ten thousands. Write 2 under the ten thousands’ line, and the operation is completed. 34. As an exercise in addition, you may satisfy yourself that what I now say of the following square is correct. The numbers in every row, whether reckoned upright, or from right to left, or from corner to corner, when added together give the number 24156. +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |2016|4212|1656|3852|1296|3492| 936|3132| 576|2772| 216| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 252|2052|4248|1692|3888|1332|3528| 972|3168| 612|2412| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |2448| 288|2088|4284|1728|3924|1368|3564|1008|2808| 648| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 684|2484| 324|2124|4320|1764|3960|1404|3204|1044|2844| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |2880| 720|2520| 360|2160|4356|1800|3600|1440|3240|1080| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |1116|2916| 756|2556| 396|2196|3996|1836|3636|1476|3276| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |3312|1152|2952| 792|2592| 36|2232|4032|1872|3672|1512| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |1548|3348|1188|2988| 432|2628| 72|2268|4068|1908|3708| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |3744|1584|3384| 828|3024| 468|2664| 108|2304|4104|1944| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |1980|3780|1224|3420| 864|3060| 504|2700| 144|2340|4140| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ |4176|1620|3816|1260|3456| 900|3096| 540|2736| 180|2376| +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ 35. If two numbers must be added together, it will not alter the sum if you take away a part of one, provided you put on as much to the other. It is plain that you will not alter the whole number of a collection of pebbles in two baskets by taking any number out of one, and putting them into the other. Thus, 15 + 7 is the same as 12 + 10, since 12 is 3 less than 15, and 10 is three more than 7. This was the principle upon which the whole of the process in (29) was conducted. 36. Let _a_ and _b_ stand for two numbers, as in (24). It is impossible to tell what their sum will be until the numbers themselves are known. In the mean while _a_ + _b_ stands for this sum. To say, in algebraical language, that the sum of _a_ and _b_ is not altered by adding _c_ to _a_, provided we take away _c_ from _b_, we have the following equation: (_a_ + _c_) + (_b_ - _c_) = _a_ + _b_; which may be written without brackets, thus, _a_ + _c_ + _b_ - _c_ = _a_ + _b_. For the meaning of these two equations will appear to be the same, on consideration. 37. If _a_ be taken twice, three times, &c., the results are represented in algebra by 2_a_, 3_a_, 4_a_, &c. The sum of any two of this series may be expressed in a shorter form than by writing the sign + between them; for though we do not know what number _a_ stands for, we know that, be it what it may, 2_a_ + 2_a_ = 4_a_, 3_a_ + 2_a_ = 5_a_, 4_a_ + 9_a_ = 13_a_; and generally, if _a_ taken _m_ times be added to _a_ taken _n_ times, the result is _a_ taken _m_ + _n_ times, or _ma_ + _na_ = (_m_ + _n_)_a_. 38. The use of the brackets must here be noticed. They mean, that the expression contained inside them must be used exactly as a single letter would be used in the same place. Thus, _pa_ signifies that _a_ is taken _p_ times, and (_m_ + _n_)_a_, that _a_ is taken _m_ + _n_ times. It is, therefore, a different thing from _m_ + _na_, which means that _a_, after being taken _n_ times, is added to _m_. Thus (3 + 4) × 2 is 7 × 2 or 14; while 3 + 4 × 2 is 3 + 8, or 11. 39. When one number is taken away from another, the number which is left is called the _difference_ or _remainder_. The process of finding the difference is called SUBTRACTION. The number which is to be taken away must be of course the lesser of the two. 40. The process of subtraction depends upon these two principles. I. The difference of two numbers is not altered by adding a number to the first, if you add the same number to the second; or by subtracting a number from the first, if you subtract the same number from the second. Conceive two baskets with pebbles in them, in the first of which are 100 pebbles more than in the second. If I put 50 more pebbles into each of them, there are still only 100 more in the first than in the second, and the same if I take 50 from each. Therefore, in finding the difference of two numbers, if it should be convenient, I may add any number I please to both of them, because, though I alter the numbers themselves by so doing, I do not alter their difference. II. Since 6 exceeds 4 by 2, and 3 exceeds 2 by 1, and 12 exceeds 5 by 7, 6, 3, and 12 together, or 21, exceed 4, 2, and 5 together, or 11, by 2, 1, and 7 together, or 10: the same thing may be said of any other numbers. 41. If _a_, _b_, and _c_ be three numbers, of which _a_ is greater than _b_ (40), I. leads to the following, (_a_ + _c_) - (_b_ + _c_) = _a_ - _b_. Again, if _c_ be less than _a_ and _b_, (_a_ - _c_) - (_b_ - _c_) = _a_ - _b_. The brackets cannot be here removed as in (36). That is, _p_- (_q_-_r_) is not the same thing as _p_-_q_- _r_. For, in the first, the difference of _q_ and _r_ is subtracted from _p_; but in the second, first _q_ and then _r_ are subtracted from _p_, which is the same as subtracting as much as _q_ and _r_ together, or _q_ + _r_. Therefore _p_-_q_-_r_ is _p_-(_q_ + _r_). In order to shew how to remove the brackets from _p_ -(_q_-_r_) without altering the value of the result, let us take the simple instance 12-(8-5). If we subtract 8 from 12, or form 12-8, we subtract too much; because it is not 8 which is to be taken away, but as much of 8 as is left after diminishing it by 5. In forming 12-8 we have therefore subtracted 5 too much. This must be set right by adding 5 to the result, which gives 12-8 + 5 for the value of 12-(8-5). The same reasoning applies to every case, and we have therefore, _p_ - (_q_ + _r_) = _p_ - _q_ - _r_. _p_ - (_q_ - _r_) = _p_ - _q_ + _r_. By the same kind of reasoning, _a_ - (_b_ + _c_ - _d_ - _e_) = _a_ - _b_ - _c_ + _d_ + _e_. 2_a_ + 3_b_ - (_a_ - 2_b_) = 2_a_ + 3_b_ - _a_ + 2_b_ = _a_ + 5_b_. 4_x_ + _y_ - (17_x_ - 9_y_) = 4_x_ + _y_ - 17_x_ + 9_y_ = 10_y_ - 13_x_. 42. I want to find the difference of the numbers 57762 and 34631. Take these to pieces as in (29) and 57762 is 5 ten-th. 7 th. 7 hund. 6 tens and 2 units. 34631 is 3 ten-th. 4 th. 6 hund. 3 tens and 1 unit. Now 2 units exceed 1 unit by 1 unit. 6 tens 3 tens 3 tens. 7 hundreds 6 hundreds 1 hundred. 7 thousands 4 thousands 3 thousands. 5 ten-thousands 3 ten-thous. 2 ten-thous. Therefore, by (40, Principle II.) all the first column _together_ exceeds all the second column by all the third column, that is, by 2 ten-th. 3 th. 1 hund. 3 tens and 1 unit, which is 23131. Therefore the difference of 57762 and 34631 is 23131, or 57762-34631 = 23131. 43. Suppose I want to find the difference between 61274 and 39628. Write them at length, and 61274 is 6 ten-th. 1 th. 2 hund. 7 tens and 4 units. 39628 is 3 ten-th. 9 th. 6 hund. 2 tens and 8 units. If we attempt to do the same as in the last article, there is a difficulty immediately, since 8, being greater than 4, cannot be taken from it. But from (40) it appears that we shall not alter the difference of two numbers if we add the same number to _both_ of them. Add ten to the first number, that is, let there be 14 units instead of four, and add ten also to the second number, but instead of adding ten to the number of units, add one to the number of tens, which is the same thing. The numbers will then stand thus, 6 ten-thous. 1 thous. 2 hund. 7 tens and 14 _units_.[7] 3 ten-thous. 9 thous. 6 hund. 3 _tens_ and 8 units. [7] Those numbers which have been altered are put in italics. You now see that the units and tens in the lower can be subtracted from those in the upper line, but that the hundreds cannot. To remedy this, add one thousand or 10 hundred to both numbers, which will not alter their difference, and remember to increase the hundreds in the upper line by 10, and the thousands in the lower line by 1, which are the same things. And since the thousands in the lower cannot be subtracted from the thousands in the upper line, add 1 ten thousand or 10 thousand to both numbers, and increase the thousands in the upper line by 10, and the ten thousands in the lower line by 1, which are the same things; and at the close the numbers which we get will be, 6 ten-thous. 11 _thous._ 12 _hund._ 7 tens and 14 _units_. 4 _ten-thous._ 10 _thous._ 6 hund. 3 _tens_ and 8 units. These numbers are not, it is true, the same as those given at the beginning of this article, but their difference is the same, by (40). With the last-mentioned numbers proceed in the same way as in (42), which will give, as their difference, 2 ten-thous. 1 thous. 6 hund. 4 tens, and 6 units, which is 21646. 44. From this we deduce the following rules for subtraction: I. Write the number which is _to be subtracted_ (which is, of course, the lesser of the two, and is called the _subtrahend_) under the other, so that its units shall fall under the units of the other, and so on. II. Subtract each figure of the lower line from the one above it, if that can be done. Where that cannot be done, add ten to the upper figure, and then subtract the lower figure; but recollect in this case always to increase the next figure in the lower line by 1, before you begin to subtract it from the upper one. 45. If there should not be as many figures in the lower line as in the upper one, proceed as if there were as many ciphers at the beginning of the lower line as will make the number of figures equal. You do not alter a number by placing ciphers at the beginning of it. For example, 00818 is the same number as 818, for it means 0 ten-thous. 0 thous. 8 hunds. 1 ten and 8 units; the first two signs are nothing, and the rest is 8 hundreds, 1 ten, and 8 units, or 818. The second does not differ from the first, except in its being said that there are no thousands and no tens of thousands in the number, which may be known without their being mentioned at all. You may ask, perhaps, why this does not apply to a cipher placed in the middle of a number, or at the right of it, as, for example, in 28007 and 39700? But you must recollect, that if it were not for the two ciphers in the first, the 8 would be taken for 8 tens, instead of 8 thousands; and if it were not for the ciphers in the second, the 7 would be taken for 7 units, instead of 7 hundreds. 46. EXAMPLE. What is the difference between 3708291640030174 and 30813649276188 ---------------- Difference 3677477990753986 EXERCISES. I. What is 18337 + 149263200 - 6472902?--_Answer_ 142808635. What is 1000 - 464 + 3279 - 646?--_Ans._ 3169. II. Subtract 64 + 76 + 144 - 18 from 33 - 2 + 100037.--_Ans._ 99802. III. What shorter rule might be made for subtraction when all the figures in the upper line are ciphers except the first? for example, in finding 10000000 - 2731634. IV. Find 18362 + 2469 and 18362-2469, add the second result to the first, and then subtract 18362; subtract the second from the first, and then subtract 2469.--_Answer_ 18362 and 2469. V. There are four places on the same line in the order A, B, C, and D. From A to D it is 1463 miles; from A to C it is 728 miles; and from B to D it is 1317 miles. How far is it from A to B, from B to C, and from C to D?--_Answer._ From A to B 146, from B to C 582, and from C to D 735 miles. VI. In the following table subtract B from A, and B from the remainder, and so on until B can be no longer subtracted. Find how many times B can be subtracted from A, and what is the last remainder. No. of A B times. Remainder. 23604 9999 2 3606 209961 37173 5 24096 74712 6792 11 0 4802469 654321 7 222222 18849747 3141592 6 195 987654321 123456789 8 9 SECTION III. MULTIPLICATION. 47. I have said that all questions in arithmetic require nothing but addition and subtraction. I do not mean by this that no rule should ever be used except those given in the last section, but that all other rules only shew shorter ways of finding what might be found, if we pleased, by the methods there deduced. Even the last two rules themselves are only short and convenient ways of doing what may be done with a number of pebbles or counters. 48. I want to know the sum of five seventeens, or I ask the following question: There are five heaps of pebbles, and seventeen pebbles in each heap; how many are there in all? Write five seventeens in a column, and make the addition, which gives 85. In this case 85 is called the _product_ of 5 and 17, and the process of finding the product is called MULTIPLICATION, which gives nothing more than the addition of a number of the same quantities. Here 17 is called the _multiplicand_, and 5 is called the _multiplier_. 17 17 17 17 17 ---- 85 49. If no question harder than this were ever proposed, there would be no occasion for a shorter way than the one here followed. But if there were 1367 heaps of pebbles, and 429 in each heap, the whole number is then 1367 times 429, or 429 multiplied by 1367. I should have to write 429 1367 times, and then to make an addition of enormous length. To avoid this, a shorter rule is necessary, which I now proceed to explain. 50. The student must first make himself acquainted with the products of all numbers as far as 10 times 10 by means of the following table,[8] which must be committed to memory. +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 2 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 | 12 | 14 | 16 | 18 | 20 | 22 | 24 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 3 | 6 | 9 | 12 | 15 | 18 | 21 | 24 | 27 | 30 | 33 | 36 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 4 | 8 | 12 | 16 | 20 | 24 | 28 | 32 | 36 | 40 | 44 | 48 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 5 | 10 | 15 | 20 | 25 | 30 | 35 | 40 | 45 | 50 | 55 | 60 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 6 | 12 | 18 | 24 | 30 | 36 | 42 | 48 | 54 | 60 | 66 | 72 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 7 | 14 | 21 | 28 | 35 | 42 | 49 | 56 | 63 | 70 | 77 | 84 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 8 | 16 | 24 | 32 | 40 | 48 | 56 | 64 | 72 | 80 | 88 | 96 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 9 | 18 | 27 | 36 | 45 | 54 | 63 | 72 | 81 | 90 | 99 |108 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 |100 |110 |120 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 11 | 22 | 33 | 44 | 55 | 66 | 77 | 88 | 99 |110 |121 |132 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ | 12 | 24 | 36 | 48 | 60 | 72 | 84 | 96 |108 |120 |132 |144 | +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+ [8] As it is usual to learn the product of numbers up to 12 times 12, I have extended the table thus far. In my opinion, all pupils who shew a tolerable capacity should slowly commit the products to memory as far as 20 times 20, in the course of their progress through this work. If from this table you wish to know what is 7 times 6, look in the first upright column on the left for either of them; 6 for example. Proceed to the right until you come into the column marked 7 at the top. You there find 42, which is the product of 6 and 7. 51. You may find, in this way, either 6 times 7, or 7 times 6, and for both you find 42. That is, six sevens is the same number as seven sixes. This may be shewn as follows: Place seven counters in a line, and repeat that line in all six times. The number of counters in the whole is 6 times 7, or six sevens, if I reckon the rows from the top to the bottom; but if I count the rows that stand side by side, I find seven of them, and six in each row, the whole number of which is 7 times 6, or seven sixes. And the whole number is 42, whichever way I count. The same method may be applied to any other two numbers. If the signs of (23) were used, it would be said that 7 × 6 = 6 × 7. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 52. To take any quantity a number of times, it will be enough to take every one of its parts the same number of times. Thus, a sack of corn will be increased fifty-fold, if each bushel which it contains be replaced by 50 bushels. A country will be doubled by doubling every acre of land, or every county, which it contains. Simple as this may appear, it is necessary to state it, because it is one of the principles on which the rule of multiplication depends. 53. In order to multiply by any number, you may multiply separately by any parts into which you choose to divide that number, and add the results. For example, 4 and 2 make 6. To multiply 7 by 6 first multiply 7 by 4, and then by 2, and add the products. This will give 42, which is the product of 7 and 6. Again, since 57 is made up of 32 and 25, 57 times 50 is made up of 32 times 50 and 25 times 50, and so on. If the signs were used, these would be written thus: 7 × 6 = 7 × 4 + 7 × 2. 50 × 57 = 50 × 32 + 50 × 25. 54. The principles in the last two articles may be expressed thus: If _a_ be made up of the parts _x_, _y_, and _x_, _ma_ is made up of _mx_, _my_, and _mz_; or, if _a_ = _x_ + _y_ + _z_. _ma_ = _mx_ + _my_ + _mz_, or, _m_(_x_ + _y_ + _z_) = _mx_ + _my_ + _mz_. A similar result may be obtained if _a_, instead of being made up of _x_, _y_, and _z_, is made by combined additions and subtractions, such as _x_ + _y_-_z_, _x_- _y_ + _z_, _x_-_y_-_z_, &c. To take the first as an instance: Let _a_ = _x_ + _y_ - _z_, then _ma_ = _mx_ + _my_ - _mz_. For, if _a_ had been _x_ + _y_, _ma_ would have been _mx_ + _my_. But since _a_ is less than _x_ + _y_ by _z_, too much by _z_ has been repeated every time that _x_ + _y_ has been repeated;--that is, _mz_ too much has been taken; consequently, _ma_ is not _mx_ + _my_, but _mx_ + _my_-_mz_. Similar reasoning may be applied to other cases, and the following results may be obtained: _m_(_a_ + _b_ + _c_ - _d_) = _ma_ + _mb_ + _mc_ - _md_. _a_(_a_ - _b_) = _aa_ - _ab_. _b_(_a_ - _b_) = _ba_ - _bb_. 3(2_a_ - 4_b_) = 6_a_ - 12_b_. 7_a_(7 + 2_b_) = 49_a_ + 14_ab_. (_aa_ + _a_ + 1)_a_ = _aaa_ + _aa_ + _a_. (3_ab_ - 2_c_)4_abc_ = 12_aabbc_ - 8_abcc_. 55. There is another way in which two numbers may be multiplied together. Since 8 is 4 times 2, 7 times 8 may be made by multiplying 7 and 4, and then multiplying that _product_ by 2. To shew this, place 7 counters in a line, and repeat that line in all 8 times, as in figures I. and II. I. +---------------+ | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | A | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | +---------------+ +---------------+ | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | B | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | +---------------+ II. +---------------+ | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | +---------------+ +---------------+ | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | +---------------+ +---------------+ | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | +---------------+ +---------------+ | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | | ● ● ● ● ● ● ● | +---------------+ The number of counters in all is 8 times 7, or 56. But (as in fig. I.) enclose each four rows in oblong figures, such as A and B. The number in each oblong is 4 times 7, or 28, and there are two of those oblongs; so that in the whole the number of counters is twice 28, or 28 x 2, or 7 first multiplied by 4, and that product multiplied by 2. In figure II. it is shewn that 7 multiplied by 8 is also 7 first multiplied by 2, and that product multiplied by 4. The same method may be applied to other numbers. Thus, since 80 is 8 times 10, 256 times 80 is 256 multiplied by 8, and that product multiplied by 10. If we use the signs, the foregoing assertions are made thus: 7 × 8 = 7 × 4 × 2 = 7 × 2 × 4. 256 × 80 = 256 × 8 × 10 = 256 × 10 × 8. EXERCISES. Shew that 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 = 2 × 4 × 3 × 5 = 5 × 4 × 2 × 3, &c. Shew that 18 × 100 = 18 × 57 + 18 × 43. 56. Articles (51) and (55) may be expressed in the following way, where by _ab_ we mean _a_ taken _b_ times; by _abc_, _a_ taken _b_ times, and the result taken _c_ times. _ab_ = _ba_. _abc_ = _acb_ = _bca_ = _bac_, &c. _abc_ = _a_ × (_bc_) = _b_ × (_ca_) = _c_ × (_ab_). If we would say that the same results are produced by multiplying by _b_, _c_, and _d_, one after the other, and by the product _bcd_ at once, we write the following: _a_ × _b_ × _c_ × _d_ = _a_ × _bcd_. The fact is, that if any numbers are to be multiplied together, the product of any two or more may be formed, and substituted instead of those two or more; thus, the product _abcdef_ may be formed by multiplying _ab_ _cde_ _f_ _abf_ _de_ _c_ _abc_ _def_ &c. 57. In order to multiply by 10, annex a cipher to the right hand of the multiplicand. Thus, 10 times 2356 is 23560. To shew this, write 2356 at length which is 2 thousands, 3 hundreds, 5 tens, and 6 units. Take each of these parts ten times, which, by (52), is the same as multiplying the whole number by 10, and it will then become 2 tens of thou. 3 tens of hun. 5 tens of tens, and 6 tens, which is 2 ten-thou. 3 thous. 5 hun. and 6 tens. This must be written 23560, because 6 is not to be 6 units, but 6 tens. Therefore 2356 × 10 = 23560. In the same way you may shew, that in order to multiply by 100 you must affix two ciphers to the right; to multiply by 1000 you must affix three ciphers, and so on. The rule will be best caught from the following table: 13 × 10 = 130 13 × 100 = 1300 13 × 1000 = 13000 13 × 10000 = 130000 142 × 1000 = 142000 23700 × 10 = 237000 3040 × 1000 = 3040000 10000 × 100000 = 1000000000 58. I now shew how to multiply by one of the numbers, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9. I do not include 1, because multiplying by 1, or taking the number once, is what is meant by simply writing down the number. I want to multiply 1368 by 8. Write the first number at full length, which is 1 thousand, 3 hundreds, 6 tens, and 8 units. To multiply this by 8, multiply each of these parts by 8 (50) and (52), which will give 8 thousands, 24 hundreds, 48 tens, and 64 units. Now 64 units are written thus 64 48 tens 480 24 hundreds 2400 8 thousands 8000 Add these together, which gives 10944 as the product of 1368 and 8, or 1368 × 8 = 10944. By working a few examples in this way you will see for following rule. 59. I. Multiply the first figure of the multiplicand by the multiplier, write down the units’ figure, and reserve the tens. II. Do the same with the second figure of the multiplicand, and add to the product the number of tens from the first; put down the units’ figure of this, and reserve the tens. III. Proceed in this way till you come to the last figure, and then write down the whole number obtained from that figure. IV. If there be a cipher in the multiplicand, treat it as if it were a number, observing that 0 × 1 = 0, 0 × 2 = 0, &c. 60. In a similar way a number can be multiplied by a figure which is accompanied by ciphers, as, for example, 8000. For 8000 is 8 × 1000, and therefore (55) you must first multiply by 8 and then by 1000, which last operation (57) is done by placing 3 ciphers on the right. Hence the rule in this case is, multiply by the simple number, and place the number of ciphers which follow it at the right of the product. EXAMPLE. Multiply 1679423800872 by 60000 ------------------ 100765428052320000 61. EXERCISES. What is 1007360 × 7? _Answer_, 7051520. 123456789 × 9 + 10 and 123 × 9 + 4?--_Ans._ 1111111111 and 1111. What is 136 × 3 + 129 × 4 + 147 × 8 + 27 × 3000?--_Ans._ 83100. An army is made up of 33 regiments of infantry, each containing 800 men; 14 of cavalry, each containing 600 men; and 2 of artillery, each containing 300 men. The enemy has 6 more regiments of infantry, each containing 100 more men; 3 more regiments of cavalry, each containing 100 men less; and 4 corps of artillery of the same magnitude as those of the first: two regiments of cavalry and one of infantry desert from the former to the latter. How many men has the second army more than the first?--_Answer_, 13400. 62. Suppose it is required to multiply 23707 by 4567. Since 4567 is made up of 4000, 500, 60, and 7, by (53) we must multiply 23707 by each of these, and add the products. Now (58) 23707 × 7 is 165949 (60) 23707 × 60 is 1422420 23707 × 500 is 11853500 23707 × 4000 is 94828000 --------- The sum of these is 108269869 which is the product required. It will do as well if, instead of writing the ciphers at the end of each line, we keep the other figures in their places without them. If we take away the ciphers, the second line is one place to the left of the first, the third one place to the left of the second, and so on. Write the multiplier and the multiplicand over these lines, and the process will stand thus: 23707 4567 ------ 165949 142242 118535 94828 --------- 108269869 63. There is one more case to be noticed; that is, where there is a cipher in the middle of the multiplier. The following example will shew that in this case nothing more is necessary than to keep the first figure of each line in the column under the figure of the multiplier from which that line arises. Suppose it required to multiply 365 by 101001. The multiplier is made up of 100000, 1000 and 1. Proceed as before, and 365 × 1 is 365 (57) 365 × 1000 is 365000 365 × 100000 is 36500000 -------- The sum of which is 36865365 and the whole process with the ciphers struck off is: 365 101001 ------ 365 365 365 -------- 36865365 64. The following is the rule in all cases: I. Place the multiplier under the multiplicand, so that the units of one may be under those of the other. II. Multiply the whole multiplicand by each figure of the multiplier (59), and place the unit of each line in the column under the figure of the multiplier from which it came. III. Add together the lines obtained by II. column by column. 65. When the multiplier or multiplicand, or both, have ciphers on the right hand, multiply the two together without the ciphers, and then place on the right of the product all the ciphers that are on the right both of the multiplier and multiplicand. For example, what is 3200 × 3000? First, 3200 is 32 × 100, or one hundred times as great as 32. Again, 32 × 13000 is 32 × 13, with three ciphers affixed, that is 416, with three ciphers affixed, or 416000. But the product required must be 100 times as great as this, or must have two ciphers affixed. It is therefore 41600000, having as many ciphers as are in both multiplier and multiplicand. 66. When any number is multiplied by itself any number of times, the result is called a _power_ of that number. Thus: 6 is called the first power of 6 6 × 6 second power of 6 6 × 6 × 6 third power of 6 6 × 6 × 6 × 6 fourth power of 6 &c. &c. The second and third powers are usually called the _square_ and _cube_, which are incorrect names, derived from certain connexions of the second and third power with the square and cube in geometry. As exercises in multiplication, the following powers are to be found. Number proposed. Square. Cube. 972 944784 918330048 1008 1016064 1024192512 3142 9872164 31018339288 3163 10004569 31644451747 5555 30858025 171416328875 6789 46090521 312908547069 The fifth power of 36 is 60466176 fourth 50 6250000 fourth 108 136048896 fourth 277 5887339441 67. It is required to multiply _a_ + _b_ by _c_ + _d_, that is, to take _a_ + _b_ as many times as there are units in _c_ + _d_. By (53) _a_ + _b_ must be taken _c_ times, and _d_ times, or the product required is (_a_ + _b_)_c_ + (_a_ + _b_)_d_. But (52) (_a_ + _b_)_c_ is _ac_ + _bc_, and (_a_ + _b_)_d_ is _ad_ + _bd_; whence the product required is _ac_ + _bc_ + _ad_ + _bd_; or, (_a_ + _b_)(_c_ + _d_) = _ac_ + _bc_ + _ad_ + _bd_. By similar reasoning (_a_ - _b_)(_c_ + _d_) is (_a_ - _b_)_c_ + (_a_ - _b_)_d_; or, (_a_ - _b_)(_c_ + _d_) = _ac_ - _bc_ + _ad_ - _bd_. To multiply _a_-_b_ by _c_-_d_, first take _a_-_b_ _c_ times, which gives _ac_-_bc_. This is not correct; for in taking it _c_ times instead of _c_-_d_ times, we have taken it _d_ times too many; or have made a result which is (_a_-_b_)_d_ too great. The real result is therefore _ac_-_bc_-(_a_ -_b_)_d_. But (_a_-_b_)_d_ is _ad_- _bd_, and therefore (_a_ - _b_)(_c_ - _d_) = _ac_ - _bc_ - _ad_ - _bd_ = _ac_ - _bc_ - _ad_ + _bd_ (41) From these three examples may be collected the following rule for the multiplication of algebraic quantities: Multiply each term of the multiplicand by each term of the multiplier; when the two terms have both + or both-before them, put + before their product; when one has + and the other-, put-before their product. In using the first terms, which have no sign, apply the rule as if they had the sign +. 68. For example, (_a_ + _b_)(_a_ + _b_) gives _aa_ + _ab_ + _ab_ + _bb_. But _ab_ + _ab_ is 2_ab_; hence the _square_ of _a_ + _b_ is _aa_ + 2_ab_ + _bb_. Again (_a_- _b_)(_a_-_b_) gives _aa_-_ab_-_ab_ + _bb_. But two subtractions of _ab_ are equivalent to subtracting 2_ab_; hence the _square_ of _a_- _b_ is _aa_-2_ab_ + _bb_. Again, (_a_ + _b_)(_a_-_b_) gives _aa_ + _ab_-_ab_ -_bb_. But the addition and subtraction of _ab_ makes no change; hence the product of _a_ + _b_ and _a_- _b_ is _aa_-_bb_. Again, the square of _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_ or (_a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_)(_a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_) will be found to be _aa_ + 2_ab_ + 2_ac_ + 2_ad_ + _bb_ + 2_bc_ + 2_bd_ + _cc_ + 2_cd_ + _dd_; or the rule for squaring such a quantity is: Square the first term, and multiply all that come _after_ by twice that term; do the same with the second, and so on to the end. SECTION IV. DIVISION. 69. Suppose I ask whether 156 can be divided into a number of parts each of which is 13, or how many thirteens 156 contains; I propose a question, the solution of which is called DIVISION. In this case, 156 is called the _dividend_, 13 the _divisor_, and the number of parts required is the _quotient_; and when I find the quotient, I am said to divide 156 by 13. 70. The simplest method of doing this is to subtract 13 from 156, and then to subtract 13 from the remainder, and so on; or, in common language, to _tell off_ 156 by thirteens. A similar process has already occurred in the exercises on subtraction, Art. (46). Do this, and mark one for every subtraction that is made, to remind you that each subtraction takes 13 once from 156, which operations will stand as follows: 156 13 1 ------ 143 13 1 ------ 130 13 1 ------ 117 13 1 ------ 104 13 1 ------ 91 13 1 ------ 78 13 1 ------ 65 13 1 ------ 52 13 1 ------ 39 13 1 ------ 26 13 1 ------ 13 13 1 ------ 0 Begin by subtracting 13 from 156, which leaves 143. Subtract 13 from 143, which leaves 130; and so on. At last 13 only remains, from which when 13 is subtracted, there remains nothing. Upon counting the number of times which you have subtracted 13, you find that this number is 12; or 156 contains twelve thirteens, or contains 13 twelve times. This method is the most simple possible, and might be done with pebbles. Of these you would first count 156. You would then take 13 from the heap, and put them into one heap by themselves. You would then take another 13 from the heap, and place them in another heap by themselves; and so on until there were none left. You would then count the number of heaps, which you would find to be 12. 71. Division is the opposite of multiplication. In multiplication you have a number of heaps, with the same number of pebbles in each, and you want to know how many _pebbles_ there are in all. In division you know how many there are in all, and how many there are to be in each heap, and you want to know how many _heaps_ there are. 72. In the last example a number was taken which contains an exact number of thirteens. But this does not happen with every number. Take, for example, 159. Follow the process of (70), and it will appear that after having subtracted 13 twelve times, there remains 3, from which 13 cannot be subtracted. We may say then that 159 contains twelve thirteens and 3 _over_; or that 159, when divided by 13, gives a _quotient_ 12, and a _remainder_ 3. If we use signs, 159 = 13 × 12 + 3. EXERCISES. 146 = 24 × 6 + 2, or 146 contains six twenty-fours and 2 over. 146 = 6 × 24 + 2, or 146 contains twenty-four sixes and 2 over. 300 = 42 × 7 + 6, or 300 contains seven forty-twos and 6 over. 39624 = 7277 × 5 + 3239. 73. If _a_ contain _b_ _q_ times with a remainder _r_, _a_ must be greater than _bq_ by _r_; that is, _a_ = _bq_ + _r_. If there be no remainder, _a_ = _bq_. Here _a_ is the dividend, _b_ the divisor, _q_ the quotient, and _r_ the remainder. In order to say that _a_ contains _b_ _q_ times, we write, _a_/_b_ = _q_, or _a_ : _b_ = _q_, which in old books is often found written thus: _a_ ÷ _b_ = _q_. 74. If I divide 156 into several parts, and find how often 13 is contained in each of them, it is plain that 156 contains 13 as often as all its parts together. For example, 156 is made up of 91, 39, and 26. Of these 91 contains 13 7 times, 39 contains 13 3 times, 26 contains 13 2 times; therefore 91 + 39 + 26 contains 13 7 + 3 + 2 times, or 12 times. Again, 156 is made up of 100, 50, and 6. Now 100 contains 13 7 times and 9 over, 50 contains 13 3 times and 11 over, 6 contains 13 0 times[9] and 6 over. [9] To speak always in the same way, instead of saying that 6 does not contain 13, I say that it contains it 0 times and 6 over, which is merely saying that 6 is 6 more than nothing. Therefore 100 + 50 + 6 contains 13 7 + 3 + 0 times and 9 + 11 + 6 over; or 156 contains 13 10 times and 26 over. But 26 is itself 2 thirteens; therefore 156 contains 10 thirteens and 2 thirteens, or 12 thirteens. 75. The result of the last article is expressed by saying, that if _a_ = _b_ + _c_ + _d_, then _a_/_m_ = _b_/_m_ + _c_/_m_ + _d_/_m_ 76. In the first example I did not take away 13 more than once at a time, in order that the method might be as simple as possible. But if I know what is twice 13, 3 times 13, &c., I can take away as many thirteens at a time as I please, if I take care to mark at each step how many I take away. For example, take away 13 ten times at once from 156, that is, take away 130, and afterwards take away 13 twice, or take away 26, and the process is as follows: 156 130 10 times 13. --- 26 26 2 times 13. --- 0 Therefore 156 contains 13 10 + 2, or 12 times. Again, to divide 3096 by 18. 3096 1800 100 times 18. ---- 1296 900 50 times 18. ---- 396 360 20 times 18. ---- 36 36 2 times 18. ---- 0 Therefore 3096 contains 18 100 + 50 + 20 + 2, or 172 times. 77. You will now understand the following sentences, and be able to make similar assertions of other numbers. 450 is 75 × 6; it therefore contains any number, as 5, 6 times as often as 75 contains it. 135 contains 3 more than 26 times; therefore, Twice 135 ” 3 ” 52 or twice 26 times. 10 times 135 ” 3 ” 260 or 10 times 26 50 times 135 ” 3 ” 1300 or 50 times 26 472 contains 18 more than 21 times; therefore, 4720 contains 18 more than 210 times, 47200 contains 18 more than 2100 times, 472000 contains 18 more than 21000 times, 32 contains 12 more than 2 times, and less than 3 times. 320 ” 12 ” 20 30 3200 ” 12 ” 200 300 32000 ” 12 ” 2000 3000 &c. &c. &c. 78. The foregoing articles contain the principles of division. The question now is, to apply them in the shortest and most convenient way. Suppose it required to divide 4068 by 18, or to find 4068/18 (23). If we divide 4068 into any number of parts, we may, by the process followed in (74), find how many times 18 is contained in each of these parts, and from thence how many times it is contained in the whole. Now, what separation of 4068 into parts will be most convenient? Observe that 4, the first figure of 4068, does not contain 18; but that 40, the first and second figures together, _does contain 18 more than twice, but less than three times_.[10] But 4068 (20) is made up of 40 hundreds, and 68; of which, 40 hundreds (77) contains 18 more than 200 times, and less than 300 times. Therefore, 4068 also contains more than 200 times 18, since it must contain 18 more times than 4000 does. It also contains 18 less than 300 times, because 300 times 18 is 5400, a greater number than 4068. Subtract 18 200 times from 4068; that is, subtract 3600, and there remains 468. Therefore, 4068 contains 18 200 times, and as many more times as 468 contains 18. [10] If you have any doubt as to this expression, recollect that it means “contains more than two eighteens, but not so much as three.” It remains, then, to find how many times 468 contains 18. Proceed exactly as before. Observe that 46 contains 18 more than twice, and less than 3 times; therefore, 460 contains it more than 20, and less than 30 times (77); as does also 468. Subtract 18 20 times from 468, that is, subtract 360; the remainder is 108. Therefore, 468 contains 18 20 times, and as many more as 108 contains it. Now, 108 is found to contain 18 6 times exactly; therefore, 468 contains it 20 + 6 times, and 4068 contains it 200 + 20 + 6 times, or 226 times. If we write down the process that has been followed, without any explanation, putting the divisor, dividend, and quotient, in a line separated by parentheses it will stand, as in example(A). Let it be required to divide 36326599 by 1342 (B). A. B. 18)4068(200 + 20 + 6 1342)36326599(20000 + 7000 + 60 + 9 3600 26840000 ---- -------- 468 9486599 360 9394000 --- ------- 108 92599 108 80520 --- ----- 0 12079 12078 ----- 1 As in the previous example, 36326599 is separated into 36320000 and 6599; the first four figures 3632 being separated from the rest, because it takes four figures from the left of the dividend to make a number which is greater than the divisor. Again, 36320000 is found to contain 1342 more than 20000, and less than 30000 times; and 1342 × 20000 is subtracted from the dividend, after which the remainder is 9486599. The same operation is repeated again and again, and the result is found to be, that there is a quotient 20000 + 7000 + 60 + 9, or 27069, and a remainder 1. Before you proceed, you should now repeat the foregoing article at length in the solution of the following questions. What are 10093874 66779922 2718218 -------- , -------- , ------- ? 3207 114433 13352 the quotients of which are 3147, 583, 203; and the remainders 1445, 65483, 7762. 79. In the examples of the last article, observe, 1st, that it is useless to write down the ciphers which are on the right of each subtrahend, provided that without them you keep each of the other figures in its proper place: 2d, that it is useless to put down the right hand figures of the dividend so long as they fall over ciphers, because they do not begin to have any share in the making of the quotient until, by continuing the process, they cease to have ciphers under them: 3d, that the quotient is only a number written at length, instead of the usual way. For example, the first quotient is 200 + 20 + 6, or 226; the second is 20000 + 7000 + 60 + 9, or 27069. Strike out, therefore, all the ciphers and the numbers which come above them, except those in the first line, and put the quotient in one line; and the two examples of the last article will stand thus: 18)4068(226 1342)36326599(27069 36 2684 --- ----- 46 9486 36 9394 --- ----- 108 9259 108 8052 --- ----- 0 12079 12078 ----- 1 80. Hence the following rule is deduced: I. Write the divisor and dividend in one line, and place parentheses on each side of the dividend. II. Take off from the left-hand of the dividend the least number of figures which make a number greater than the divisor; find what number of times the divisor is contained in these, and write this number as the first figure of the quotient. III. Multiply the divisor by the last-mentioned figure, and subtract the product from the number which was taken off at the left of the dividend. IV. On the right of the remainder place the figure of the dividend which comes next after those already separated in II.: if the remainder thus increased be greater than the divisor, find how many times the divisor is contained in it; put this number at the right of the first figure of the quotient, and repeat the process: if not, on the right place the next figure of the dividend, and the next, and so on until it is greater; but remember to place a cipher in the quotient for every figure of the dividend which you are obliged to take, except the first. V. Proceed in this way until all the figures of the dividend are exhausted. In judging how often one large number is contained in another, a first and rough guess may be made by striking off the same number of figures from both, and using the results instead of the numbers themselves. Thus, 4,732 is contained in 14,379 about the same number of times that 4 is contained in 14, or about 3 times. The reason is, that 4 being contained in 14 as often as 4000 is in 14000, and these last only differing from the proposed numbers by lower denominations, viz. hundreds, &c. we may expect that there will not be much difference between the number of times which 14000 contains 4000, and that which 14379 contains 4732: and it generally happens so. But if the second figure of the divisor be 5, or greater than 5, it will be more accurate to increase the first figure of the divisor by 1, before trying the method just explained. Nothing but practice can give facility in this sort of guess-work. 81. This process may be made more simple when the divisor is not greater than 12, if you have sufficient knowledge of the multiplication table (50). For example, I want to divide 132976 by 4. At full length the process stands thus: 4)132976(33244 12 --- 12 12 --- 9 8 -- 17 16 --- 16 16 -- 0 But you will recollect, without the necessity of writing it down, that 13 contains 4 three times with a remainder 1; this 1 you will place before 2, the next figure of the dividend, and you know that 12 contains 4 3 times exactly, and so on. It will be more convenient to write down the quotient thus: 4)132976 ------- 33244 While on this part of the subject, we may mention, that the shortest way to multiply by 5 is to annex a cipher and divide by 2, which is equivalent to taking the half of 10 times, or 5 times. To divide by 5, multiply by 2 and strike off the last figure, which leaves the quotient; half the last figure is the remainder. To multiply by 25, annex two ciphers and divide by 4. To divide by 25, multiply by 4 and strike off the last two figures, which leaves the quotient; one fourth of the last two figures, taken as one number, is the remainder. To multiply a number by 9, annex a cipher, and subtract the number, which is equivalent to taking the number ten times, and then subtracting it once. To multiply by 99, annex two ciphers and subtract the number, &c. In order that a number may be divisible by 2 without remainder, its units’ figure must be an even number.[11] That it may be divisible by 4, its last two figures must be divisible by 4. Take the example 1236: this is composed of 12 hundreds and 36, the first part of which, being hundreds, is divisible by 4, and gives 12 twenty-fives; it depends then upon 36, the last two figures, whether 1236 is divisible by 4 or not. A number is divisible by 8 if the last three figures are divisible by 8; for every digit, except the last three, is a number of thousands, and 1000 is divisible by 8; whether therefore the whole shall be divisible by 8 or not depends on the last three figures: thus, 127946 is not divisible by 8, since 946 is not so. A number is divisible by 3 or 9 only when the sum of its digits is divisible by 3 or 9. Take for example 1234; this is [11] Among the even figures we include 0. 1 thousand, or 999 and 1 2 hundred, or twice 99 and 2 3 tens, or three times 9 and 3 and 4 or 4 Now 9, 99, 999, &c. are all obviously divisible by 9 and by 3, and so will be any number made by the repetition of all or any of them any number of times. It therefore depends on 1 + 2 + 3 + 4, or the sum of the digits, whether 1234 shall be divisible by 9 or 3, or not. From the above we gather, that a number is divisible by 6 when it is even, and when the sum of its digits is divisible by 3. Lastly, a number is divisible by 5 only when the last figure is 0 or 5. 82. Where the divisor is unity followed by ciphers, the rule becomes extremely simple, as you will see by the following examples: 100)33429(334 300 ---- 342 300 ---- 429 400 --- 29 This is, then, the rule: Cut off as many figures from the right hand of the dividend as there are ciphers. These figures will be the remainder, and the rest of the dividend will be the quotient. 10)2717316 -------- 271731 and rem. 6. Or we may prove these results thus: from (20), 2717316 is 271731 tens and 6; of which the first contains 10 271731 times, and the second not at all; the quotient is therefore 271731, and the remainder 6 (72). Again (20), 33429 is 334 hundreds and 29; of which the first contains 100 334 times, and the second not at all; the quotient is therefore 334, and the remainder 29. 83. The following examples will shew how the rule may be shortened when there are ciphers in the divisor. With each example is placed another containing the same process, all unnecessary figures being removed; and from the comparison of the two, the rule at the end of this article is derived. I. 1782000)6424700000(3605 1782)6424700(3605 5346000 5346 -------- ---- 10787000 10787 10692000 10692 ---------- ------- 9500000 9500 8910000 8910 ------- ------- 590000 590000 II. 12300000)42176189300(3428 123)421761(3428 36900000 369 --------- ---- 52761893 527 49200000 492 --------- ---- 35618930 356 24600000 246 --------- ---- 110189300 1101 98400000 984 -------- ---------- 11789300 11789300 The rule, then, is: Strike out as many _figures_[12] from the right of the dividend as there are _ciphers_ at the right of the divisor. Strike out all the ciphers from the divisor, and divide in the usual way; but at the end of the process place on the right of the remainder all those figures which were struck out of the dividend. [12] Including both ciphers and others. 84. EXERCISES. Dividend. | Divisor. |Quotient.|Remainder. 9694 | 47 | 206 | 12 175618 | 3136 | 56 | 2 23796484 | 130000 | 183 | 6484 14002564 | 1871 | 7484 | 0 310314420 | 7878 | 39390 | 0 3939040647 | 6889 | 571787 | 4 22876792454961 | 43046721 | 531441 | 0 Shew that 100 × 100 × 100 - 43 × 43 × 43 I. ------------------------------ = 100 × 100 + 100 × 43 + 43 × 43. 100 - 43 100 × 100 × 100 + 43 × 43 × 43 II. ------------------------------ = 100 × 100 - 100 × 43 + 43 × 43. 100 + 43 76 × 76 + 2 × 76 × 52 + 52 × 52 III. -------------------------------- = 76 + 52. 76 + 52 12 × 12 × 12 × 12 - 1 IV. 1 + 12 + 12 × 12 + 12 × 12 × 12 = ----------------------. 12 - 1 What is the nearest number to 1376429 which can be divided by 36300 without remainder?--_Answer_, 1379400. If 36 oxen can eat 216 acres of grass in one year, and if a sheep eat half as much as an ox, how long will it take 49 oxen and 136 sheep together to eat 17550 acres?--_Answer_, 25 years. 85. Take any two numbers, one of which divides the other without remainder; for example, 32 and 4. Multiply both these numbers by any other number; for example, 6. The products will be 192 and 24. Now, 192 contains 24 just as often as 32 contains 4. Suppose 6 baskets, each containing 32 pebbles, the whole number of which will be 192. Take 4 from one basket, time after time, until that basket is empty. It is plain that if, instead of taking 4 from that basket, I take 4 from each, the whole 6 will be emptied together: that is, 6 times 32 contains 6 times 4 just as often as 32 contains 4. The same reasoning applies to other numbers, and therefore _we do not alter the quotient if we multiply the dividend and divisor by the same number_. 86. Again, suppose that 200 is to be divided by 50. Divide both the dividend and divisor by the same number; for example, 5. Then, 200 is 5 times 40, and 50 is 5 times 10. But by (85), 40 divided by 10 gives the same quotient as 5 times 40 divided by 5 times 10, and therefore _the quotient of two numbers is not altered by dividing both the dividend and divisor by the same number_. 87. From (55), if a number be multiplied successively by two others, it is multiplied by their product. Thus, 27, first multiplied by 5, and the product multiplied by 3, is the same as 27 multiplied by 5 times 3, or 15. Also, if a number be divided by any number, and the quotient be divided by another, it is the same as if the first number had been divided by the product of the other two. For example, divide 60 by 4, which gives 15, and the quotient by 3, which gives 5. It is plain, that if each of the four fifteens of which 60 is composed be divided into three equal parts, there are twelve equal parts in all; or, a division by 4, and then by 3, is equivalent to a division by 4 × 3, or 12. 88. The following rules will be better understood by stating them in an example. If 32 be multiplied by 24 and divided by 6, the result is the same as if 32 had been multiplied by the quotient of 24 divided by 6, that is, by 4; for the sixth part of 24 being 4, the sixth part of any number repeated 24 times is that number repeated 4 times; or, multiplying by 24 and dividing by 6 is equivalent to multiplying by 4. 89. Again, if 48 be multiplied by 4, and that product be divided by 24, it is the same thing as if 48 were divided at once by the quotient of 24 divided by 4, that is, by 6. For, every unit which is repeated 6 times in 48 is repeated 4 times as often, or 24 times, in 4 times 48, or the quotient of 48 and 6 is the same as the quotient of 48 × 4 and 6 × 4. 90. The results of the last five articles may be algebraically expressed thus: _ma_ _a_ ---- = ---- (85) _mb_ _b_ If _n_ divide _a_ and _b_ without remainder, _a_ ---- _n_ _a_ ------ = ---- (86) _b_ _b_ ---- _n_ _a_ ---- _b_ _a_ ------ = ---- (87) _c_ _bc_ _ab_ _b_ ------ = _a_ × ---- (88) _c_ _c_ _ac_ _a_ ----- = ------ (89) _b_ _b_ ---- _c_ It must be recollected, however, that these have only been proved in the case where all the divisions are without remainder. 91. When one number divides another without leaving any remainder, or is contained an exact number of times in it, it is said to be a _measure_ of that number, or to _measure_ it. Thus, 4 is a measure of 136, or measures 136; but it does not measure 137. The reason for using the word measure is this: Suppose you have a rod 4 feet long, with nothing marked upon it, with which you want to measure some length; for example, the length of a street. If that street should happen to be 136 feet in length, you will be able to _measure_ it with the rod, because, since 136 contains 4 34 times, you will find that the street is exactly 34 times the length of the rod. But if the street should happen to be 137 feet long, you cannot measure it with the rod; for when you have measured 34 of the rods, you will find a remainder, whose length you cannot tell without some shorter measure. Hence 4 is said to measure 136, but not to measure 137. A measure, then, is a divisor which leaves no remainder. 92. When one number is a measure of two others, it is called a _common measure_ of the two. Thus, 15 is a common measure of 180 and 75. Two numbers may have several common measures. For example, 360 and 168 have the common measures 2, 3, 4, 6, 24, and several others. Now, this question maybe asked: Of all the common measures of 360 and 168, which is the greatest? The answer to this question is derived from a rule of arithmetic, called the rule for finding the GREATEST COMMON MEASURE, which we proceed to consider. 93. If one quantity measure two others, it measures their sum and difference. Thus, 7 measures 21 and 56. It therefore measures 56 + 21 and 56-21, or 77 and 35. This is only another way of saying what was said in (74). 94. If one number measure a second, it measures every number which the second measures. Thus, 5 measures 15, and 15 measures 30, 45, 60, 75, &c.; all which numbers are measured by 5. It is plain that if 15 contains 5 3 times, 30, or 15 + 15 contains 5 3 + 3 times, or 6 times, 45, or 15 + 15 + 15 contains 5 3 + 3 + 3 or 9 times; and so on. 95. Every number which measures both the dividend and divisor measures the remainder also. To shew this, divide 360 by 112. The quotient is 3, and the remainder 24, that is (72) 360 is three times 112 and 24, or 360 = 112 × 3 + 24. From this it follows, that 24 is the difference between 360 and 3 times 112, or 24 = 360-112 × 3. Take any number which measures both 360 and 112; for example, 4. Then 4 measures 360, 4 measures 112, and therefore (94) measures 112 × 3, or 112 + 112 + 112. Therefore (93) it measures 360-112 × 3, which is the remainder 24. The same reasoning may be applied to all other measures of 360 and 112; and the result is, that every quantity which measures both the dividend and divisor also measures the remainder. Hence, every _common measure_ of a dividend and divisor is also a _common measure_ of the divisor and remainder. 96. Every common measure of the divisor and remainder is also a common measure of the dividend and divisor. Take the same example, and recollect that 360 = 112 × 3 + 24. Take any common measure of the remainder 24 and the divisor 112; for example, 8. Then 8 measures 24; and 8 measures 112, and therefore (94) measures 112 × 3. Therefore (93) 8 measures 112 × 3 + 24, or measures the dividend 360. Then every common measure of the remainder and divisor is also a common measure of the divisor and dividend, or there is no common measure of the remainder and divisor which is not also a common measure of the divisor and dividend. 97. I. It is proved in (95) that the remainder and divisor have all the common measures which are in the dividend and divisor. II. It is proved in (96) that they have no others. It therefore follows, that the greatest of the common measures of the first two is the greatest of those of the second two, which shews how to find the greatest common measure of any two numbers,[13] as follows: 98. Take the preceding example, and let it be required to find the g. c. m. of 360 and 112, and observe that 360 divided by 112 gives the remainder 24, 112 divided by 24 gives the remainder 16, 24 divided by 16 gives the remainder 8, 16 divided by 8 gives no remainder. [13] For shortness, I abbreviate the words _greatest common measure_ into their initial letters, g. c. m. Now, since 8 divides 16 without remainder, and since it also divides itself without remainder, 8 is the g. c. m. of 8 and 16, because it is impossible to divide 8 by any number greater than 8; so that, even if 16 had a greater measure than 8, it could not be _common_ to 16 and 8. Therefore 8 is g. c. m. of 16 and 8, (97) g. c. m. of 16 and 8 is g. c. m. of 24 and 16, g. c. m. of 24 and 16 is g. c. m. of 112 and 24, g. c. m. of 112 and 24 is g. c. m. of 360 and 112, Therefore 8 is g. c. m. of 360 and 112. The process carried on may be written down in either of the following ways: 112)360(3 336 --- 24)112(4 112 | 360 3 96 96 | 336 4 --- ----+------- 16)24(1 16 | 24 1 16 16 | 16 2 -- ----+------- 8)16(2 0 | 8 16 -- 0 The rule for finding the greatest common measure of two numbers is, I. Divide the greater of the two by the less. II. Make the remainder a divisor, and the divisor a dividend, and find another remainder. III. Proceed in this way until there is no remainder, and the last divisor is the greatest common measure required. 99. You may perhaps ask how the rule is to shew when the two numbers have no common measure. The fact is, that there are, strictly speaking, no such numbers, because all numbers are measured by 1; that is, contain an exact number of units, and therefore 1 is a common measure of every two numbers. If they have no other common measure, the last divisor will be 1, as in the following example, where the greatest common measure of 87 and 25 is found. 25)87(3 75 -- 12)25(2 24 -- 1)12(12 12 -- 0 EXERCISES. Numbers. g. c. m. 6197 9521 1 58363 2602 1 5547 147008443 1849 6281 326041 571 28915 31495 5 1509 300309 3 What are 36 × 36 + 2 × 36 × 72 + 72 × 72 and 36 × 36 × 36 + 72 × 72 × 72; and what is their greatest common measure?--_Answer_, 11664. 100. If two numbers be divisible by a third, and if the quotients be again divisible by a fourth, that third is not the greatest common measure. For example, 360 and 504 are both divisible by 4. The quotients are 90 and 126. Now 90 and 126 are both divisible by 9, the quotients of which division are 10 and 14. By (87), dividing a number by 4, and then dividing the quotient by 9, is the same thing as dividing the number itself by 4 × 9, or by 36. Then, since 36 is a common measure of 360 and 504, and is greater than 4, 4 is not the greatest common measure. Again, since 10 and 14 are both divisible by 2, 36 is not the greatest common measure. It therefore follows, that when two numbers are divided by their greatest common measure, the quotients have no common measure except 1 (99). Otherwise, the number which was called the greatest common measure in the last sentence is not so in reality. 101. To find the greatest common measure of three numbers, find the g. c. m. of the first and second, and of this and the third. For since all common divisors of the first and second are contained in their g. c. m., and no others, whatever is common to the first, second, and third, is common also to the third and the g. c. m. of the first and second, and no others. Similarly, to find the g. c. m. of four numbers, find the g. c. m. of the first, second, and third, and of that and the fourth. 102. When a first number contains a second, or is divisible by it without remainder, the first is called a multiple of the second. The words _multiple_ and _measure_ are thus connected: Since 4 is a measure of 24, 24 is a multiple of 4. The number 96 is a multiple of 8, 12, 24, 48, and several others. It is therefore called a _common multiple_ of 8, 12, 24. 48, &c. The product of any two numbers is evidently a common multiple of both. Thus, 36 × 8, or 288, is a common multiple of 36 and 8. But there are common multiples of 36 and 8 less than 288; and because it is convenient, when a common multiple of two quantities is wanted, to use the least of them, I now shew how to find the least common multiple of two numbers. 103. Take, for example, 36 and 8. Find their greatest common measure, which is 4, and observe that 36 is 9 × 4, and 8 is 2 × 4. The quotients of 36 and 8, when divided by their greatest common measure, are therefore 9 and 2. Multiply these quotients together, and multiply the product by the greatest common measure, 4, which gives 9 × 2 × 4, or 72. This is a multiple of 8, or of 4 × 2 by (55); and also of 36 or of 4 × 9. It is also the least common multiple; but this cannot be proved to you, because the demonstration cannot be thoroughly understood without more practice in the use of letters to stand for numbers. But you may satisfy yourself that it is the least in this case, and that the same process will give the least common multiple in any other case which you may take. It is not even necessary that you should know it is the least. Whenever a common multiple is to be used, any one will do as well as the least. It is only to avoid large numbers that the least is used in preference to any other. When the greatest common measure is 1, the least common multiple of the two numbers is their product. The rule then is: To find the least common multiple of two numbers, find their greatest common measure, and multiply one of the numbers by the quotient which the other gives when divided by the greatest common measure. To find the least common multiple of three numbers, find the least common multiple of the first two, and find the least common multiple of that multiple and the third, and so on. EXERCISES. Numbers proposed. | Least common multiple. 14, 21 | 42 16, 5, 24 | 240 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 | 2520 6, 8, 11, 16, 20 | 2640 876, 864 | 63072 868, 854 | 52948 A convenient mode of finding the least common multiple of several numbers is as follows, when the common measures are easily visible: Pick out a number of common measures of two or more, which have themselves no divisors greater than unity. Write them as divisors, and divide every number which will divide by one or more of them. Bring down the quotients, and also the numbers which will not divide by any of them. Repeat the process with the results, and so on until the numbers brought down have no two of them any common measure except unity. Then, for the least common multiple, multiply all the divisors by all the numbers last brought down. For instance, let it be required to find the least common multiple of all the numbers from 11 to 21. 2, 2, 3, 5, 7)11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 --------------------------------- 11 1 13 1 1 4 17 3 19 1 1 There are now no common measures left in the row, and the least common multiple required is the product of 2, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 4, 17, 3, and 19; or 232792560. SECTION V. FRACTIONS. 104. Suppose it required to divide 49 yards into five equal parts, or, as it is called, to find the fifth part of 49 yards. If we divide 45 by 5, the quotient is 9, and the remainder is 4; that is (72), 49 is made up of 5 times 9 and 4. Let the line A B represent 49 yards: A----------------------------------------B C-------------- I -- D-------------- K -- E-------------- L -- F-------------- M -- G-------------- N -- I K L M N H +-+-+-+-+-+ | | | | | | Take 5 lines, C, D, E, F, and G, each 9 yards in length, and the line H, 4 yards in length. Then, since 49 is 5 nines and 4, C, D, E, F, G, and H, are together equal to A B. Divide H, which is 4 yards, into five equal parts, I, K, L, M, and N, and place one of these parts opposite to each of the lines, C, D, E, F, and G. It follows that the ten lines, C, D, E, F, G, I, K, L, M, N, are together equal to A B, or 49 yards. Now D and K together are of the same length as C and I together, and so are E and L, F and M, and G and N. Therefore, C and I together, repeated 5 times, will be 49 yards; that is, C and I together make up the fifth part of 49 yards. 105. C is a certain number of yards, viz. 9; but I is a new sort of quantity, to which hitherto we have never come. It is not an exact number of yards, for it arises from dividing 4 yards into 5 parts, and taking one of those parts. It is the fifth part of 4 yards, and is called a FRACTION of a yard. It is written thus, ⁴/₅(23), and is what we must add to 9 yards in order to make up the fifth part of 49 yards. The same reasoning would apply to dividing 49 bushels of corn, or 49 acres of land, into 5 equal parts. We should find for the fifth part of the first, 9 bushels and the fifth part of 4 bushels; and for the second, 9 acres and the fifth part of 4 acres. We say, then, once for all, that the fifth part of 49 is 9 and ⁴/₅, or 9 + ⁴/₅; which is usually written (9⁴/₅), or if we use signs, 49/5 = (9⁴/₅). EXERCISES. What is the seventeenth part of 1237?--_Answer_, (72-¹³/₁₇). 10032 663819 22773399 What are -----, ------, and -------- ? 1974 23710 2424 162 23649 2343 _Answer_, (5 ----), (27 -----), (9394 ----). 1974 23710 2424 106. By the term fraction is understood a part of any number, or the sum of any of the equal parts into which a number is divided. Thus, ⁴⁹/₅, ⁴/₅, ²⁰/₇, are fractions. The term fraction even includes whole numbers:[14] for example, 17 is ¹⁷/₁, ³⁴/₂, ⁵¹/₃, &c. [14] Numbers which contain an exact number of units, such as 5, 7, 100, &c., are called _whole numbers_ or _integers_, when we wish to distinguish them from fractions. The upper number is called the _numerator_, the lower number is called the _denominator_, and both of these are called _terms_ of the fraction. As long as the numerator is less than the denominator, the fraction is less than a unit: thus, ⁶/₁₇ is less than a unit; for 6 divided into 6 parts gives 1 for each part, and must give less when divided into 17 parts. Similarly, the fraction is equal to a unit when the numerator and denominator are equal, and greater than a unit when the numerator is greater than the denominator. 107. By ⅔ is meant the third part of 2. This is the same as twice the third part of 1. To prove this, let A B be two yards, and divide each of the yards A C and C B into three equal parts. |--|--|--|--|--|--| A D E C F G B Then, because A E, E F, and F B, are all equal to one another, A E is the third part of 2. It is therefore ⅔. But A E is twice A D, and A D is the third part of one yard, or ⅓; therefore ⅔ is twice ⅓; that is, in order to get the length ⅔, it makes no difference whether we divide _two_ yards at once into three parts, and take _one_ of them, or whether we divide _one_ yard into three parts, and take _two_ of them. By the same reasoning, ⅝ may be found either by dividing 5 into 8 parts, and taking one of them, or by dividing 1 into 8 parts, and taking five of them. In future, of these two meanings I shall use that which is most convenient at the time, as it is proved that they are the same thing. This principle is the same as the following: The third part of any number may be obtained by adding together the thirds of all the units of which it consists. Thus, the third part of 2, or of two units, is made by taking one-third out of each of the units, that is, ⅔ = ⅓ × 2. This meaning appears ambiguous when the numerator is greater than the denominator: thus, ¹⁵/₇ would mean that 1 is to be divided into 7 parts, and 15 of them are to be taken. We should here let as many units be each divided into 7 parts as will give more than 15 of those parts, and take 15 of them. 108. The value of a fraction is not altered by multiplying the numerator and denominator by the same quantity. Take the fraction ¾, multiply its numerator and denominator by 5, and it becomes ¹⁵/₂₀, which is the same thing as ¾; that is, one-twentieth part of 15 yards is the same thing as one-fourth of 3 yards: or, if our second meaning of the word fraction be used, you get the same length by dividing a yard into 20 parts and taking 15 of them, as you get by dividing it into 4 parts and taking 3 of them. To prove this, [Illustration] let A B represent a yard; divide it into 4 equal parts, A C, C D, D E, and E B, and divide each of these parts into 5 equal parts. Then A E is ¾. But the second division cuts the line into 20 equal parts, of which A E contains 15. It is therefore ¹⁵/₂₀. Therefore, ¹⁵/₂₀ and ¾ are the same thing. Again, since ¾ is made from ¹⁵/₂₀ by dividing both the numerator and denominator by 5, the value of a fraction is not altered by dividing both its numerator and denominator by the same quantity. This principle, which is of so much importance in every part of arithmetic, is often used in common language, as when we say that 14 out of 21 is 2 out of 3, &c. 109. Though the two fractions ¾ and ¹⁵/₂₀ are the same in value, and either of them may be used for the other without error, yet the first is more convenient than the second, not only because you have a clearer idea of the fourth of three yards than of the twentieth part of fifteen yards, but because the numbers in the first being smaller, are more convenient for multiplication and division. It is therefore useful, when a fraction is given, to find out whether its numerator and denominator have any common divisors or common measures. In (98) was given a rule for finding the greatest common measure of any two numbers; and it was shewn that when the two numbers are divided by their greatest common measure, the quotients have no common measure except 1. Find the greatest common measure of the terms of the fraction, and divide them by that number. The fraction is then said to be _reduced to its lowest terms_, and is in the state in which the best notion can be formed of its magnitude. EXERCISES. With each fraction is written the same reduced to its lowest terms. 2794 22 × 127 22 ---- = ---------- = ---- 2921 23 × 127 23 2788 17 × 164 17 ---- = ---------- = ---- 4920 30 × 164 30 93208 764 × 122 764 ----- = ---------- = --- 13786 113 × 122 113 888800 22 × 40400 22 -------- = ------------ = ----- 40359600 999 × 40400 999 95469 121 × 789 121 ------ = ----------- = --- 359784 456 × 789 456 110. When the terms of the fraction given are already in factors,[15] any one factor in the numerator may be divided by a number, provided some one factor in the denominator is divided by the same. This follows from (88) and (108). In the following examples the figures altered by division are accented. [15] A factor of a number is a number which divides it without remainder: thus, 4, 6, 8, are factors of 24, and 6 × 4, 8 × 3, 2 × 2 × 2 × 3, are several ways of decomposing 24 into factors. 12 × 11 × 10 3′ × 11 × 10 1′ × 11 × 5′ ------------ = ------------- = ------------- = 55. 2 × 3 × 4 2 × 3 × 1′ 1′ × 1′ × 1′ 18 × 15 × 13 2′ × 3′ × 1′ 1′ × 1′ × 1′ ------------ = ------------- = ------------- = ¹/₁₆. 20 × 54 × 52 4′ × 6′ × 4′ 2′ × 2′ × 4′ 27 × 28 3′ × 4′ 3′ × 2′ ------- = --------- = -------- = ⁶/₅. 9 × 70 1′ × 10′ 1′ × 5′ 111. As we can, by (108), multiply the numerator and denominator of a fraction by any number, without altering its value, we can now readily reduce two fractions to two others, which shall have the same value as the first two, and which shall have the same denominator. Take, for example, ⅔ and ⁴/₇; multiply both terms of ⅔ by 7, and both terms of ⁴/₇ by 3. It then appears that 2 × 7 ⅔ is ------- or ¹⁴/₂₁ 3 × 7 4 × 3 ⁴/₇ is ------- or ¹²/₂₁. 7 × 3 Here are then two fractions ¹⁴/₂₁ and ¹²/₂₁, equal to ⅔ and ⁴/₇, and having the same denominator, 21; in this case, ⅔ and ⁴/₇ are said to be _reduced to a common denominator_. It is required to reduce ⅒, ⅚, and ⁷/₉ to a common denominator. Multiply both terms of the first by the product of 6 and 9; of the second by the product of 10 and 9; and of the third by the product of 10 and 6. Then it appears (108) that 1 × 6 × 9 ⅒ is ----------- or ⁵⁴/₅₄₀ 10 × 6 × 9 5 × 10 × 9 ⅚ is ------------ or ⁴⁵⁰/₅₄₀ 6 × 10 × 9 7 × 10 × 6 ⁷/₉ is ------------ or ⁴²⁰/₅₄₀. 9 × 10 × 6 On looking at these last fractions, we see that all the numerators and the common denominator are divisible by 6, and (108) this division will not alter their values. On dividing the numerators and denominators of ⁵⁴/₅₄₀, ⁴⁵⁰/₅₄₀, and ⁴²⁰/₅₄₀ by 6, the resulting fractions are, ⁹/₉₀, ⁷⁵/₉₀, and ⁷⁰/₉₀. These are fractions with a common denominator, and which are the same as ⅒, ⅚, and ⁷/₉; and therefore these are a more simple answer to the question than the first fractions. Observe also that 540 is one common multiple of 10, 6, and 9, namely, 10 × 6 × 9, but that 90 is _the least_ common multiple of 10, 6, and 9 (103). The following process, therefore, is better. To reduce the fractions ⅒, ⅚, and ⁷/₉, to others having the same value and a common denominator, begin by finding the least common multiple of 10, 6, and 9, by the rule in (103), which is 90. Observe that 10, 6, and 9 are contained in 90 9, 15, and 10 times. Multiply both terms of the first by 9, of the second by 15, and of the third by 10, and the fractions thus produced are ⁹/₉₀, ⁷⁵/₉₀, and ⁷⁰/₉₀, the same as before. If one of the numbers be a whole number, it may be reduced to a fraction having the common denominator of the rest, by (106). EXERCISES. Fractions proposed reduced to a common denominator. 2 1 1 | 20 6 5 --- --- --- | ---- --- --- 3 5 6 | 30 30 30 | | 1 2 3 12 3 | 28 24 18 48 63 --- --- --- ---- --- | --- --- --- --- --- 3 7 14 21 4 | 84 84 84 84 84 | 4 5 6 | 3000 400 50 6 3 --- ---- ---- | ---- ----- ----- ---- 10 100 1000 | 1000 1000 1000 1000 | 33 281 | 22341 106499 ---- ---- | -------- ------ 379 677 | 256583 256583 112. By reducing two fractions to a common denominator, we are able to compare them; that is, to tell which is the greater and which the less of the two. For example, take ½ and ⁷/₁₅. These fractions reduced, without alteration of their value, to a common denominator, are ¹⁵/₃₀ and ¹⁴/₃₁. Of these the first must be the greater, because (107) it may be obtained by dividing 1 into 30 equal parts and taking 15 of them, but the second is made by taking 14 of those parts. It is evident that of two fractions which have the same denominator, the greater has the greater numerator; and also that of two fractions which have the same numerator, the greater has the less denominator. Thus, ⁸/₇ is greater than ⁸/⁹, since the first is a 7th, and the last only a 9th part of 8. Also, any numerator may be made to belong to as small a fraction as we please, by sufficiently increasing the denominator. Thus, ¹⁰/₁₀₀ is ¹/₁₀, ¹⁰/₁₀₀₀ is ¹/₁₀₀, and ¹⁰/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀ is ¹/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀ (108). We can now also increase and diminish the first fraction by the second. For the first fraction is made up of 15 of the 30 equal parts into which 1 is divided. The second fraction is 14 of those parts. The sum of the two, therefore, must be 15 + 14, or 29 of those parts; that is, ½ + ⁷/₁₅ is ²⁹/₃₀. The difference of the two must be 15-14, or 1 of those parts; that is, ½-⁷/₁₅ = ¹/₃₀. 113. From the last two articles the following rules are obtained: I. To compare, to add, or to subtract fractions, first reduce them to a common denominator. When this has been done, that is the greatest of the fractions which has the greatest numerator. Their sum has the sum of the numerators for its numerator, and the common denominator for its denominator. Their difference has the difference of the numerators for its numerator, and the common denominator for its denominator. EXERCISES. 1 1 1 1 53 44 153 18329 --- + --- + --- - --- = ---- ---- - ----- = ------- 2 3 4 5 60 3 427 1282 8 3 4 1834 1 12 253 1 + ---- + ---- + ---- = ---- 2 - --- + ---- = ---- 10 100 1000 1000 7 13 91 1 8 94 3 163 97 93066 --- + --- + ---- = --- --- - ---- = ------- 2 16 188 2 521 881 459001 114. Suppose it required to add a whole number to a fraction, for example, 6 to ⁴/₉. By (106) 6 is ⁵⁴/₉, and ⁵⁴/₉ + ⁴/₉ is ⁵⁸/⁹; that is, 6 + ⁴/⁹, or as it is usually written, (6⁴/₉), is ⁵⁸/₉. The rule in this case is: Multiply the whole number by the denominator of the fraction, and to the product add the numerator of the fraction; the sum will be the numerator of the result, and the denominator of the fraction will be its denominator. Thus, (3¼) = ¹³/₄, (22⁵/₉) = ²⁰³/₉, (74²/₅₅) = ⁴⁰⁷²/₅₅. This rule is the opposite of that in (105). 115. From the last rule it appears that 907 17230907 225 667225 1723 ------ is --------, 667 ----- is ------, 10000 10000 1000 1000 99 2300099 and 23 ------ is -------. 10000 10000 Hence, when a whole number is to be added to a fraction whose denominator is 1 followed by _ciphers_, the number of which is not less than the number of _figures_ in the numerator, the rule is: Write the whole number first, and then the numerator of the fraction, with as many ciphers between them as the number of _ciphers_ in the denominator exceeds the number of _figures_ in the numerator. This is the numerator of the result, and the denominator of the fraction is its denominator. If the number of ciphers in the denominator be equal to the number of figures in the numerator, write no ciphers between the whole number and the numerator. EXERCISES. Reduce the following mixed quantities to fractions: 23707 6 299 2210 1 ------, 2457 ---, 1207 --------, and 233 -----. 100000 10 10000000 10000 116. Suppose it required to multiply ⅔ by 4. This by (48) is taking ⅔ four times; that is, finding ⅔ + ⅔ + ⅔ + ⅔. This by (112) is ⁸/₃; so that to multiply a fraction by a whole number the rule is: Multiply the numerator by the whole number, and let the denominator remain. 117. If the denominator of the fraction be divisible by the whole number, the rule may be stated thus: Divide the denominator of the fraction by the whole number, and let the numerator remain. For example, multiply ⁷/₃₆ by 6. This (116) is ⁴²/₃₆, which, since the numerator and denominator are now divisible by 6, is (108) the same as ⁷/₆. It is plain that ⁷/₆ is made from ⁷/₃₆ in the manner stated in the rule. 118. Multiplication has been defined to be the taking as many of one number as there are units in another. Thus, to multiply 12 by 7 is to take as many twelves as there are units in 7, or to take 12 as many times as you must take 1 in order to make 7. Thus, what is done with 1 in order to make 7, is done with 12 to make 7 times 12. For example, 7 is 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 7 times 12 is 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12. When the same thing is done with two fractions, the result is still called their product, and the process is still called multiplication. There is this difference, that whereas a whole number is made by adding 1 to itself a number of times, a fraction is made by dividing 1 into a number of equal parts, and adding _one of these parts_ to itself a number of times. This being the meaning of the word multiplication, as applied to fractions, what is ¾ multiplied by ⅞? Whatever is done with 1 in order to make ⅞ must now be done with ¾; but to make ⅞, 1 is divided into 8 parts, and 7 of them are taken. Therefore, to make ¾ × ⅞, ¾ must be divided into 8 parts, and 7 of them must be taken. Now ¾ is, by (108), the same thing as ²⁴/₃₂. Since ²⁴/₃₂ is made by dividing 1 into 32 parts, and taking 24 of them, or, which is the same thing, taking 3 of them 8 times, if ²⁴/₃₂ be divided into 8 equal parts, each of them is ³/₃₂; and if 7 of these parts be taken, the result is ²¹/₃₂ (116): therefore ¾ multiplied by ⅞ is ²¹/₃₂; and the same reasoning may be applied to any other fractions. But ²¹/₃₂ is made from ¾ and ⅞ by multiplying the two numerators together for the numerator, and the two denominators for the denominator; which furnishes a rule for the multiplication of fractions. 119. If this product ²¹/₃₂ is to be multiplied by a third fraction, for example, by ⁵/₉, the result is, by the same rule, ¹⁰⁵/₂₈₈; and so on. The general rule for multiplying any number of fractions together is therefore: Multiply all the numerators together for the numerator of the product, and all the denominators together for its denominator. 120. Suppose it required to multiply together ¹⁵/₁₆ and ⁸/₁₀. The product may be written thus: 15 × 8 120 -------, and is ----, 16 × 10 160 which reduced to its lowest terms (109) is ¾. This result might have been obtained directly, by observing that 15 and 10 are both measured by 5, and 8 and 16 are both measured by 8, and that the fraction may be written thus: 3 × 5 × 8 -------------. 2 × 8 × 2 × 5 Divide both its numerator and denominator by 5 × 8 (108) and (87), and the result is at once ¾; therefore, before proceeding to multiply any number of fractions together, if there be any numerator and any denominator, whether belonging to the same fraction or not, which have a common measure, divide them both by that common measure, and use the quotients instead of the dividends. A whole number may be considered as a fraction whose denominator is 1; thus, 16 is ¹⁶/₁ (106); and the same rule will apply when one or more of the quantities are whole numbers. EXERCISES 136 268 36448 18224 ---- × --- = ------- = ------- 7470 919 6864930 3432465 1 2 3 4 1 2 17 2 --- × --- × --- × --- = --- ---- × ---- = ---- 2 3 4 5 5 17 45 45 2 13 241 6266 13 601 7813 --- × ---- × ---- = ------ ---- × ---- = ----- 59 7 19 7847 461 11 5071 Fraction proposed. Square. Cube. 701 491401 344472101 ----- ------- --------- 158 24964 3944312 140 19600 2744000 ----- ------ -------- 141 19881 2803221 355 126025 44738875 ----- ------- --------- 113 12769 1442897 From 100 acres of ground, two-thirds of them are taken away; 50 acres are then added to the result, and ⁵/₇ of the whole is taken; what number of acres does this produce?--_Answer_, (59¹¹/₂₁). 121. In dividing one whole number by another, for example, 108 by 9, this question is asked,--Can we, by the addition of any number of nines, produce 108? and if so, how many nines will be sufficient for that purpose? Suppose we take two fractions, for example, ⅔ and ⅘, and ask, Can we, by dividing ⅘ into some number of equal parts, and adding a number of these parts together, produce ⅔? if so, into _how many parts_ must we divide ⅘, and _how many of them_ must we add together? The solution of this question is still called the division of ⅔ by ⅘; and the fraction whose denominator is the number of parts into which ⅘ is divided, and whose numerator is the number of them which is taken, is called the quotient. The solution of this question is as follows: Reduce both these fractions to a common denominator (111), which does not alter their value (108); they then become ¹⁰/₁₅ and ¹²/₁₅. The question now is, to divide ¹²/₁₅ into a number of parts, and to produce ¹⁰/₁₅ by taking a number of these parts. Since ¹²/₁₅ is made by dividing 1 into 15 parts and taking 12 of them, if we divide ¹²/₁₅ into 12 equal parts, each of these parts is ¹/₁₅; if we take 10 of these parts, the result is ¹⁰/₁₅. Therefore, in order to produce ¹⁰/₁₅ or ⅔ (108), we must divide ¹²/₁₅ or ⅘ into 12 parts, and take 10 of them; that is, the quotient is ¹⁰/₁₂. If we call ⅔ the dividend, and ⅘ the divisor, as before, the quotient in this case is derived from the following rule, which the same reasoning will shew to apply to other cases: The numerator of the quotient is the numerator of the dividend multiplied by the denominator of the divisor. The denominator of the quotient is the denominator of the dividend multiplied by the numerator of the divisor. This rule is the reverse of multiplication, as will be seen by comparing what is required in both cases. In multiplying ⅘ by ¹⁰/₁₂, I ask, if out of ⅘ be taken 10 parts out of 12, how much _of a unit_ is taken, and the answer is ⁴⁰/⁶⁰, or ⅔. Again, in dividing ⅔ by ⅘, I ask what part of ⅘ is ⅔, the answer to which is ¹⁰/₁₂. 122. By taking the following instance, we shall see that this rule can be sometimes simplified. Divide ¹⁶/₃₃ by ²⁸/₁₅. Observe that 16 is 4 × 4, and 28 is 4 × 7; 33 is 3 × 11, and 15 is 3 × 5; therefore the two fractions are 4 × 4 4 × 7 ------ and -----, 3 × 11 3 × 5 and their quotient, according to the rule, is 4 × 4 × 3 × 5 --------------, 3 × 11 × 4 × 7 in which 4 × 3 is found both in the numerator and denominator. The fraction is therefore (108) the same as 4 × 5 20 ------, or ----. 11 × 7 77 The rule of the last article, therefore, admits of this modification: If the two numerators or the two denominators have a common measure, divide by that common measure, and use the quotients instead of the dividends. 123. In dividing a fraction by a whole number, for example, ⅔ by 15, consider 15 as the fraction ¹⁵/₁. The rule gives ²/⁴⁵ as the quotient. Therefore, to divide a fraction by a whole number, multiply the denominator by that whole number. EXERCISES. Dividend. Divisor. Quotient. 41 63 41 ---- ---- ----- 33 11 189 467 907 47167 ---- ---- ------- 151 101 136957 7813 601 13 ----- ---- ---- 5071 11 461 ¹/₅ × ¹/₅ × ¹/₅ - ²/₁₇× ²/₁₇ × ²/₁₇ What are -----------------------------------, ¹/₅ - ²/₁₇ and ⁸/₁₁ × ⁸/₁₁ - ³/₁₁ × ³/₁₁ ----------------------- ? ⁸/₁₁ - ³/₁₁ 559 _Answer_, ----, and 1. 7225 A can reap a field in 12 days, B in 6, and C in 4 days; in what time can they all do it together?[16]--_Answer_, 2 days. [16] The method of solving this and the following question may be shewn thus: If the number of days in which each could reap the field is given, the part which each could do in a day by himself can be found, and thence the part which all could do together; this being known, the number of days which it would take all to do the whole can be found. In what time would a cistern be filled by cocks which would separately fill it in 12, 11, 10, and 9 hours?--_Answer_, (2⁴⁵⁴/₇₆₃) hours. 124. The principal results of this section may be exhibited algebraically as follows; let _a_, _b_, _c_, &c. stand for any whole numbers. Then _a_ 1 _a_ _ma_ (107) ---- = ---- × _a_ (108) ---- = ---- _b_ _b_ _b_ _mb_ _a_ _c_ _ad_ _bc_ (111) --- and --- are the same as ---- and ---- _b_ _d_ _bd_ _bd_ _a_ _b_ _a_ + _b_ (112) --- + --- = --------- _c_ _c_ _c_ _a_ _b_ _a_ - _b_ --- - --- = --------- _c_ _c_ _c_ _a_ _c_ _ad_ + _bc_ (113) --- + --- = ----------- _b_ _d_ _bd_ _a_ _c_ _ad_ - _bc_ --- - --- = ----------- _b_ _d_ _bd_ _a_ _c_ _ac_ (118) --- × --- = ---- _b_ _d_ _bd_ _a_ _c_ _a_/_b_ _ad_ (121) --- divᵈ. by --- or --------- = ---- _b_ _d_ _c_/_d_ _bc_ 125. These results are true even when the letters themselves represent fractions. For example, take the fraction _a_/_b_ -------, _c_/_d_ whose numerator and denominator are fractional, and multiply its numerator and denominator by the fraction _e_ _ae_/_bf_ ---, which gives ----------, _f_ _ce_/_df_ _aedf_ which (121) is -------, _bfce_ which, dividing the numerator and denominator by _ef_ (108), is _ad_ ----. _bc_ But the original fraction itself is _ad_ _a_/_b_ (_a_/_b_) × (_e_/_f_) ----; hence ------- = --------------------- _bc_ _c_/_d_ (_c_/_d_) × (_e_/_f_) which corresponds to the second formula[17] in (124). In a similar manner it may be shewn, that the other formulæ of the same article are true when the letters there used either represent fractions, or are removed and fractions introduced in their place. All formulæ established throughout this work are equally true when fractions are substituted for whole numbers. For example (54), (_m_ + _n_)_a_ = _ma_ + _na_. Let _m_, _n_, and _a_ be respectively the fractions _p_ _r_ _b_ ---, ---, and ---. _q_ _s_ _c_ Then _m_ + _n_ is _p_ _r_ _ps_ + _qr_ --- + ---, or ----------- _q_ _s_ _qs_ and (_m_ + _n_)_a_ is _ps_ + _qr_ _b_ (_ps_ + _qr_)_b_ ----------- × ---, or ---------------- _qs_ _c_ _qsc_ _psb_ + _qrb_ or -------------. _qsc_ _psb_ _qrb_ _pb_ _rb_ But this (112) is ----- + -----, which is ---- + ----, _qsc_ _qsc_ _qc_ _sc_ _psb_ _pb_ _qrb_ _rb_ since ----- = ----, and ----- = ---- (103). _qsc_ _qc_ _qsc_ _sc_ _pb_ _p_ _b_ _rb_ _r_ _b_ But ---- = --- × ---, and ---- = --- × ---. _qc_ _q_ _c_ _sc_ _s_ _c_ Therefore (_m_ + _n_)_a_, or (_p_ _r_ )_b_ _p_ _b_ _r_ _b_ (--- + --- )--- = --- × --- + --- × ---. (_q_ _s_ )_c_ _q_ _c_ _s_ _c_ In a similar manner the same may be proved of any other formula. [17] A formula is a name given to any algebraical expression which is commonly used. The following examples may be useful: _a_ _c_ _e_ _g_ --- × --- + --- × --- _b_ _d_ _f_ _h_ _acfh_ + _bdeg_ --------------------- = --------------- _a_ _e_ _c_ _g_ _aedh_ + _bcfg_ --- × --- + --- × --- _b_ _f_ _d_ _h_ 1 _b_ ---------- = --------- 1 _ab_ + 1 _a_ + --- _b_ 1 1 _bc_ + 1 --------------- = -------------- = ----------------- 1 _c_ _abc_ + _a_ + _c_ _a_ + --------- _a_ + -------- 1 _bc_ + 1 _b_ + --- _c_ 1 1 57 Thus, ------------ = --------- = --- 1 8 350 6 + ------- 6 + --- 1 57 7 + --- 8 The rules that have been proved to hold good for all numbers may be applied when the numbers are represented by letters. SECTION VI. DECIMAL FRACTIONS. 126. We have seen (112) (121) the necessity of reducing fractions to a common denominator, in order to compare their magnitudes. We have seen also how much more readily operations are performed upon fractions which have the same, than upon those which have different, denominators. On this account it has long been customary, in all those parts of mathematics where fractions are often required, to use none but such as either have, or can be easily reduced to others having, the same denominators. Now, of all numbers, those which can be most easily managed are such as 10, 100, 1000, &c., where 1 is followed by ciphers. These are called DECIMAL NUMBERS; and a fraction whose denominator is any one of them, is called a DECIMAL FRACTION, or more commonly, a DECIMAL. 127. A whole number may be reduced to a decimal fraction, or one decimal fraction to another, with the greatest ease. For example, 940 9400 94000 94 is ---, or ----, or ----- (106); 10 100 1000 3 30 300 3000 ---- is ----, or ----, or ----- (108). 30 100 1000 10000 The placing of a cipher on the right hand of any number is the same thing as multiplying that number by 10 (57), and this may be done as often as we please in the numerator of a fraction, provided it be done as often in the denominator (108). 128. The next question is, How can we reduce a fraction which is not decimal to another which is, without altering its value? Take, for example, the fraction ⁷/₁₆, multiply both the numerator and denominator successively by 10, 100, 1000, &c., which will give a series of fractions, each of which is equal to ⁷/₁₆ (108), viz. ⁷⁰/₁₆₀, ⁷⁰⁰/₁₆₀₀, ⁷⁰⁰⁰/₁₆₀₀₀, ⁷⁰⁰⁰⁰/₁₆₀₀₀₀, &c. The denominator of each of these fractions can be divided without remainder by 16, the quotients of which divisions form the series of decimal numbers 10, 100, 1000, 10000, &c. If, therefore, one of the numerators be divisible by 16, the fraction to which that numerator belongs has a numerator and denominator both divisible by 16. When that division has been made, which (108) does not alter the value of the fraction, we shall have a fraction whose denominator is one of the series 10, 100, 1000, &c., and which is equal in value to ⁷/₁₆. The question is then reduced to finding the first of the numbers 70, 700, 7000, 70000, &c., which can be divided by 16 without remainder. Divide these numbers, one after the other, by 16, as follows: 16)70(4 16)700(43 16)7000(437 16)70000(4375 64 64 64 64 -- --- --- --- 6 60 60 60 48 48 48 -- --- --- 12 120 120 112 112 --- --- 8 80 80 -- 0 It appears, then, that 70000 is the first of the numerators which is divisible by 16. But it is not necessary to write down each of these divisions, since it is plain that the last contains all which came before. It will do, then, to proceed at once as if the number of ciphers were without end, to stop when the remainder is nothing, and then count the number of ciphers which have been used. In this case, since 70000 is 16 × 4375, 70000 16 × 4375 4375 ------, which is ----------, or -----, 160000 16 × 10000 10000 gives the fraction required. Therefore, to reduce a fraction to a decimal fraction, annex ciphers to the numerator, and divide by the denominator until there is no remainder. The quotient will be the numerator of the required fraction, and the denominator will be unity, followed by as many ciphers as were used in obtaining the quotient. EXERCISES. Reduce to decimal fractions ½, ¼, ²/₂₅, ¹/₅₀, ³⁹²⁷/₁₂₅₀, and ⁴⁵³/₆₂₅. _Answer_, ⁵/₁₀, ²⁵/₁₀₀, ⁸/₁₀₀, ²/₁₀₀, ³¹⁴¹⁶/₁₀₀₀₀, and ⁷²⁴⁸/₁₀₀₀₀. 129. It will happen in most cases that the annexing of ciphers to the numerator will never make it divisible by the denominator without remainder. For example, try to reduce ¹/₇ to a decimal fraction. 7)1000000000000000000, &c. ------------------- 142857142857142857, &c. The quotient here is a continual repetition of the figures 1, 4, 2, 8, 5, 7, in the same order; therefore ¹/₇ cannot be reduced to a decimal fraction. But, nevertheless, if we take as a numerator any number of figures from the quotient 142857142857, &c., and as a denominator 1 followed by as many ciphers as were used in making that part of the quotient, we shall get a fraction which differs very little from ¹/₇, and which will differ still less from it if we put more figures in the numerator and more ciphers in the denominator. Thus, 1 {is less} 1 3 {which is not} 1 --- { } --- by --- { } --- 10 { than } 7 70 { so much as } 10 14 1 2 1 --- --- --- --- 100 7 700 100 142 1 6 1 ---- --- ---- ---- 1000 7 7000 1000 1428 1 4 1 ----- --- ----- ----- 10000 7 70000 10000 14285 1 5 1 ------ --- ------ ------ 100000 7 700000 100000 142857 1 1 1 ------- --- ------- ------- 1000000 7 7000000 1000000 &c. &c. &c. &c. In the first column is a series of decimal fractions, which come nearer and nearer to ¹/₇, as the third column shews. Therefore, though we cannot find a decimal fraction which is exactly ¹/₇, we can find one which differs from it as little as we please. This may also be illustrated thus: It is required to reduce ¹/₇ to a decimal fraction without the error of say a millionth of a unit; multiply the numerator and denominator of ¹/₇ by a million, and then divide both by 7; we have then 1 1000000 1428571¹/₇ --- = ------- = ----------- 7 7000000 1000000 If we reject the fraction ¹/₇ in the numerator, what we reject is really the 7th part of the millionth part of a unit; or less than the millionth part of a unit. Therefore ¹⁴²⁸⁵⁷/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀ is the fraction required. EXERCISES. Make similar tables} 3 17 1 with } ---, ---, and ---. these fractions } 91 143 247 } 3 The recurring} --- is 329670,329670, &c. quotient of} 91 17 --- 118881,118881, &c. 143 1 --- 404858299595141700,4048582 &c. 247 130. The reason for the _recurrence_ of the figures of the quotient in the same order is as follows: If 1000, &c. be divided by the number 247, the remainder at each step of the division is less than 247, being either 0, or one of the first 246 numbers. If, then, the remainder never become nothing, by carrying the division far enough, one remainder will occur a second time. If possible, let the first 246 remainders be all different, that is, let them be 1, 2, 3, &c., up to 246, variously distributed. As the 247th remainder cannot be so great as 247, it must be one of these which have preceded. From the step where the remainder becomes the same as a former remainder, it is evident that former figures of the quotient must be repeated in the same order. 131. You will here naturally ask, What is the use of decimal fractions, if the greater number of fractions cannot be reduced at all to decimals? The answer is this: The addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of decimal fractions are much easier than those of common fractions; and though we cannot reduce all common fractions to decimals, yet we can find decimal fractions so near to each of them, that the error arising from using the decimal instead of the common fraction will not be perceptible. For example, if we suppose an inch to be divided into ten million of equal parts, one of those parts by itself will not be visible to the eye. Therefore, in finding a length, an error of a ten-millionth part of an inch is of no consequence, even where the finest measurement is necessary. Now, by carrying on the table in (129), we shall see that 1428571 1 1 -------- does not differ from --- by --------; 10000000 7 10000000 and if these fractions represented parts of an inch, the first might be used for the second, since the difference is not perceptible. In applying arithmetic to practice, nothing can be measured so accurately as to be represented in numbers without any error whatever, whether it be length, weight, or any other species of magnitude. It is therefore unnecessary to use any other than decimal fractions, since, by means of them, any quantity may be represented with as much correctness as by any other method. EXERCISES. Find decimal fractions which do not differ from the following fractions by ¹/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀₀. ⅓ _Answer_, ³³³³³³³³/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀₀. ⁴/₇ ⁵⁷¹⁴²⁸⁵⁷/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀₀. ¹¹³/₃₅₅ ³¹⁸³⁰⁹⁸⁵/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀₀. ³⁵⁵/₁₁₃ ³¹⁴¹⁵⁹²⁹²/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀₀. 132. Every decimal may be immediately reduced to a quantity consisting either of a whole number and more simple decimals, or of more simple decimals alone, having one figure only in each of the numerators. Take, for example, 147326 147326 326 ------. By (115) ------- is 147----; 1000 1000 1000 and since 326 is made up of 300, and 20, and 6; by (112) ³²⁶/₁₀₀₀₀ = ³⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀ + ²⁰/₁₀₀₀ + ⁶/₁₀₀₀. But (108) ³⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀ is ³/₁₀, and ²⁰/₁₀₀₀ is ²/₁₀₀. Therefore, ¹¹⁴⁷³²6/₁₀₀₀ is made up of 147 + ³/₁₀ + ²/₁₀₀ + 6/₁₀₀₀. Now, take any number, for example, 147326, and form a number of fractions having for their numerators this number, and for their denominators 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, &c., and reduce these fractions into numbers and more simple decimals, in the foregoing manner, which will give the table below. DECOMPOSITION OF A DECIMAL FRACTION. 147326 ------ = 147326 1 147326 6 ------ = 14732 + --- 10 10 147326 2 6 ------ = 1473 + --- + --- 100 10 100 147326 3 2 6 ------ = 147 + --- + --- + ---- 1000 10 100 1000 147326 7 3 2 6 ------ = 14 + --- + --- + ---- + ----- 10000 10 100 1000 10000 147326 4 7 3 2 6 ------ = 1 + --- + --- + ---- + ----- + ------ 100000 10 100 1000 10000 100000 147326 1 4 7 3 2 6 ------- = --- + --- + ---- + ----- + ------ + ------- 1000000 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 147326 1 4 7 3 2 6 -------- = --- + ---- + ----- + ------ + ------- + -------- 10000000 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 N.B. The student should write this table himself, and then proceed to make similar tables from the following exercises. EXERCISES. Reduce the following fractions into a series of numbers and more simple fractions: 31415926 31415926 --------, --------, &c. 10 100 2700031 2700031 -------, --------, &c. 10 100 2073000 2073000 -------, --------, &c. 10 100 3331303 3331303 -------, -------, &c. 1000 10000 133. If, in this table, and others made in the same manner, you look at those fractions which contain a whole number, you will see that they may be made thus: Mark off, from the right hand of the numerator, as many _figures_ as there are _ciphers_ in the denominator by a point, or any other convenient mark. This will give 14732·6 when the fraction is 147326 ------ 10 1473·26 147326 ------ 100 147·326 147326 ------ 1000 &c. &c. The figures on the left of the point by themselves make the whole number which the fraction contains. Of those on its right, the first is the numerator of the fraction whose denominator is 10, the second of that whose denominator is 100, and so on. We now come to those fractions which do not contain a whole number. 134. The first of these is ¹⁴⁷³²⁶/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀ which the number of _ciphers_ in the denominator is the same as the number of _figures_ in the numerator. If we still follow the same rule, and mark off all the figures, by placing the point before them all, thus, ·147326, the observation in (133) still holds good; for, on looking at ¹⁴⁷³²⁶/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀ in the table, we find it is 1 4 7 3 2 6 --- + --- + ---- + ----- + ------ + ------- 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 The next fraction is ¹⁴⁷³²⁶/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀, which we find by the table to be 1 4 7 3 2 6 --- + ---- + ----- + ------ + ------- + -------- 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 In this, 1 is not divided by 10, but by 100; if, therefore, we put a point before the whole, the rule is not true, for the first figure on the left of the point has the denominator which, according to the rule, the second ought to have, the second that which the third ought to have, and so on. In order to keep the same rule for this case, we must contrive to make 1 the second figure on the right of the point instead of the first. This may be done by placing a cipher between it and the point, thus, ·0147326. Here the rule holds good, for by that rule this fraction is 0 1 4 7 3 2 6 --- + --- + ---- + ----- + ------ + ------- + -------- 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 which is the same as the preceding line, since ⁰/₁₀ is 0, and need not be reckoned. Similarly, when there are two ciphers more in the denominator than there are figures in the numerator, the rule will be true if we place two ciphers between the point and the numerator. The rule, therefore, stated fully, is this: To reduce a decimal fraction to a whole number and more simple decimals, or to more simple decimals alone if it do not contain a whole number, mark off by a point as many figures from the numerator as there are ciphers in the denominator. If the numerator have not places enough for this, write as many ciphers before it as it wants places, and put the point before these ciphers. Then, if there be any figures before the point, they make the _whole number_ which the fraction contains. The first figure after the point with the denominator 10, the second with the denominator 100, and so on, are the _fractions_ of which the first fraction is composed. 135. Decimal fractions are not usually written at full length. It is more convenient to write the numerator only, and to cut off from the numerator as many figures as there are ciphers in the denominator, when that is possible, by a point. When there are more ciphers in the denominator than figures in the numerator, as many ciphers are placed before the numerator as will supply the deficiency, and the point is placed before the ciphers. Thus, ·7 will be used in future to denote ⁷/₁₀, ·07 for ⁷/₁₀₀, and so on. The following tables will give the whole of this notation at one view, and will shew its connexion with the decimal notation explained in the first section. You will observe that the numbers on the right of the units’ place stand for units _divided_ by 10, 100, 1000, &c. while those on the left are units _multiplied_ by 10, 100, 1000, &c. The student is recommended always to write the decimal point in a line with the top of the figures or in the middle, as is done here, and never at the bottom. The reason is, that it is usual in the higher branches of mathematics to use a point placed between two numbers or letters which are multiplied together; thus, 15. 16, _a_. _b_, (_a_ + _b_). (_c_ + _d_) stand for the products of those numbers or letters. 1234 4 4 I. 123·4 stands for ---- or 123--- or 123 + --- 10 10 10 1234 34 3 4 12·34 ---- or 12--- or 12 + --- + --- 100 100 10 100 1234 234 2 3 4 1·234 ---- or 1---- or 1 + --- + --- + ---- 1000 1000 10 100 1000 1234 1 2 3 4 ·1234 ----- or --- + --- + ---- + ----- 10000 10 100 1000 10000 1234 1 2 3 4 ·01234 ------ or --- + ---- + ----- + ------ 100000 100 1000 10000 100000 1234 1 2 3 4 ·001234 ------- or ---- + ----- + ------ + ------- 1000000 1000 10000 100000 1000000 II. 1003 1 3 ·01003 is ------ or --- + ------ 100000 100 100000 1003 1 3 ·1003 is ----- or --- + ----- 10000 10 10000 1003 3 10·03 is ---- or 10 + --- 100 100 1003 3 100·3 is ---- or 100 + --- 10 10 III. 1 2 8 3 ·1283 = --- + --- + ---- + ----- 10 100 1000 10000 = ·1 + ·02 + ·008 + ·0003 = ·1 + ·0283 = ·12 + ·0083 = ·128 + ·0003 = ·108 + ·0203 = ·1003 + ·028 = ·1203 + ·008 { 1 is 1000 inches { 2 is 200 { 3 is 30 { 4 is 4 IV. In 1234·56789 { 5 is ⁵/₁₀ of an inch inches the { 6 is ⁶/₁₀₀ { 7 is ⁷/₁₀₀₀ { 8 is ⁸/₁₀₀₀₀ { 9 is ⁹/₁₀₀₀₀₀ 136. The ciphers on the right hand of the decimal point serve the same purpose as the ciphers in (10). They are not counted as any thing themselves, but serve to shew the place in which the accompanying numbers stand. They might be dispensed with by writing the numbers in ruled columns, as in the first section. They are distinguished from the numbers which accompany them by calling the latter _significant figures_. Thus, ·0003747 is a decimal of seven places with four significant figures, ·346 is a decimal of three places with three significant figures, &c. 137. The value of a decimal is not altered by putting any number of ciphers on its right. Take, for example, ·3 and ·300. The first (135) is ³/₁₀, and the second ³⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀, which is made from the first by multiplying both its numerator and denominator by 100, and (108) is the same quantity. 138. To reduce two decimals to a common denominator, put as many ciphers on the right of that which has the smaller number of places as will make the number of places in both fractions the same. Take, for example, ·54 and 4·3297. The first is ⁵⁴/₁₀₀, and the second ⁴³²⁹⁷/₁₀₀₀₀. Multiply the numerator and denominator of the first by 100 (108), which reduces it to ⁵⁴⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀₀, which has the same denominator as ⁴³²⁹⁷/₁₀₀₀₀. But ⁵⁴⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀₀ is ·5400 (135). In whole numbers, the decimal point should be placed at the end: thus, 129 should be written 129·. It is, however, usual to omit the point; but you must recollect that 129 and 129·000 are of the same value, since the first is 129 and the second ¹²⁹⁰⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀. 139. The rules which were given in the last chapter for addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, apply to all fractions, and therefore to decimal fractions among the rest. But the way of writing decimal fractions, which is explained in this chapter, makes the application of these rules more simple. We proceed to the different cases. Suppose it required to add 42·634, 45·2806, 2·001, and 54. By (112) these must be reduced to a common denominator, which is done (138) by writing them as follows: 42·6340, 45·2806, 2·0010, and 54·0000. These are decimal fractions, whose numerators are 426340, 452806, 20010, and 540000, and whose common denominator is 10000. By (112) their sum is 426340 + 452806 + 20010 + 540000 1439156 --------------------------------, which is ------- 10000 10000 or 143·9156. The simplest way of doing this is as follows: write the decimals down under one another, so that the decimal points may fall under one another, thus: 42·634 45·2806 2·001 54 -------- 143·9156 Add the different columns together as in common addition, and place the decimal point under the other decimal points. EXERCISES. What are 1527 + 64·732094 + 2·0013 + ·00001974; 2276·3 + ·107 + ·9 + 26·3172 + 56732·001; and 1·11 + 7·7 + ·0039 + ·00142 + ·8838? _Answer_, 1593·73341374, 59035·6252, 9·69912. 140. Suppose it required to subtract 91·07324 from 137·321. These fractions when reduced to a common denominator are 91·07324 and 137·32100 (138). Their difference is therefore 13732100 - 9107324 4624776 ------------------, which is ------- 100000 100000 or 46·24776. This may be most simply done as follows: write the less number under the greater, so that its decimal point may fall under that of the greater, thus: 137·321 91·07324 --------- 46·24776 Subtract the lower from the upper line, and wherever there is a figure in one line and not in the other, proceed as if there were a cipher in the vacant place. EXERCISES. What is 12362 - 274·22107 + ·5; 9976·2073942 - ·00143976728; and 1·2 + ·03 + ·004 - ·0005? _Answer_, 12088·27893, 9976·20595443272; and 1·2335. 141. The multiplication of a decimal by 10, 100, 1000, &c., is performed by merely moving the decimal point to the right. Suppose, for example, 13·2079 is to be multiplied by 100. The decimal is ¹³²⁰⁷⁹/₁₀₀₀₀, which multiplied by 100 is (117) ¹³²⁰⁷⁹/₁₀₀, or 1320·79. Again, 1·309 × 100000 is ¹³⁰⁹/₁₀₀₀ × 100000, or (116) ¹³⁰⁹⁰⁰⁰⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀ or 130900. From these and other instances we get the following rule: To multiply a decimal fraction by a decimal number (126), move the decimal point as many places to the right as there are ciphers in the decimal number. When this cannot be done, annex ciphers to the right of the decimal (137) until it can. 142. Suppose it required to multiply 17·036 by 4·27. The first of these decimals is ¹⁷⁰³⁶/₁₀₀₀, and the second ⁴²⁷/₁₀₀. By (118) the product of these fractions has for its numerator the product of 17036 and 427, and for its denominator the product of 1000 and 100; therefore this product is ⁷²⁷⁴³⁷²/₁₀₀₀₀₀, or 72·74372. This may be done more shortly by multiplying the two numbers 17036 and 427, and cutting off by the decimal point as many places as there are decimal places both in 17·036 and 4·27, because the product of two decimal numbers will contain as many ciphers as there are ciphers in both. 143. This question now arises: What if there should not be as many figures in the product as there are decimal places in the multiplier and multiplicand together? To see what must be done in this case, multiply ·172 by ·101, or ¹⁷²/₁₀₀₀ by ¹⁰¹/₁₀₀₀. The product of these two is ¹⁷³⁷²/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀, or ·017372 (135). Therefore, when the number of places in the product is not sufficient to allow the rule of the last article to be followed, as many ciphers must be placed at the beginning as will make up the deficiency. ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES. ·001 × ·01 is ·00001 56 × ·0001 is ·0056. EXERCISES. Shew that 3·002 × 3·002 = 3 × 3 + 2 × 3 × ·002 + ·002 × ·002 11·5609 × 5·3191 = 8·44 × 8·44 - 3·1209 × 3·1209 8·217 × 10·001 = 8 × 10 + 8 × ·001 + 10 × ·217 + ·001 × ·217. Fraction. Square. Cube. 82·92 6875·7264 570135·233088 ·0173 ·00029929 ·000005177717 1·43 2·0449 2·924207 ·009 ·000081 ·000000729 15·625 × 64 = 1000 1·5625 × ·64 = 1 ·015625 × ·0064 = ·0001 ·15625 × ·64 = ·1 1562·5 × ·064 = 100 15625000 × ·064 = 1000000 144. The division of a decimal by a decimal number, such as 10, 100, 1000, &c., is performed by moving the decimal point as many places to the left as there are ciphers in the decimal number. If there are not places enough in the dividend to allow of this, annex ciphers to the beginning of it until there are. For example, divide 1734·229 by 1000: the decimal fraction is ¹⁷³⁴²²⁹/₁₀₀₀, which divided by 1000 (123) is ¹⁷³⁴²²⁹/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀, or 1·734229. If, in the same way, 1·2106 be divided by 10000, the result is ·00012106. 145. Before proceeding to shorten the rule for the division of one decimal fraction by another, it will be necessary to resume what was said in (128) upon the reduction of any fraction to a decimal fraction. It was there shewn that ⁷/₁₆ is the same fraction as ⁴³⁷⁵/₁₀₀₀₀ or ·4375. As another example, convert ³/₁₂₈ into a decimal fraction. Follow the same process as in (128), thus: 128)300000000000(234375 256 ---- 440 384 ---- 560 512 ---- 480 384 ---- 960 896 ---- 640 640 --- 0 Since 7 ciphers are used, it appears that 30000000 is the first of the series 30, 300, &c., which is divisible by 128; and therefore ³/₁₂₈ or, which is the same thing (108), ³⁰⁰⁰⁰⁰⁰⁰/₁₂₈₀₀₀₀₀₀₀ is equal to ²³⁴³⁷⁵/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀ or ·0234375 (135). From these examples the rule for reducing a fraction to a decimal is: Annex ciphers to the numerator; divide by the denominator, and annex a cipher to each remainder after the figures of the numerator are all used, proceeding exactly as if the numerator had an unlimited number of ciphers annexed to it, and was to be divided by the denominator. Continue this process until there is no remainder, and observe how many ciphers have been used. Place the decimal point in the quotient so as to cut off as many figures as you have used ciphers; and if there be not figures enough for this, annex ciphers to the beginning until there are places enough. 146. From what was shewn in (129), it appears that it is not every fraction which can be reduced to a decimal fraction. It was there shewn, however, that there is no fraction to which we may not find a decimal fraction as near as we please. Thus, ¹/₁₀, ¹⁴/₁₀₀, ¹⁴²/₁₀₀₀, ¹⁴²⁸/₁₀₀₀₀, ¹⁴²⁸⁵/₁₀₀₀₀₀, &c., or ·1, ·14, ·142, ·1428, ·14285, were shewn to be fractions which approach nearer and nearer to ¹/₇. To find either of these fractions, the rule is the same as that in the last article, with this exception, that, I. instead of stopping when there is no remainder, which never happens, stop at any part of the process, and make as many decimal places in the quotient as are equal in number to the number of ciphers which have been used, annexing ciphers to the beginning when this cannot be done, as before. II. Instead of obtaining a fraction which is exactly equal to the fraction from which we set out, we get a fraction which is very near to it, and may get one still nearer, by using more of the quotient. Thus, ·1428 is very near to ¹/₇, but not so near as ·142857; nor is this last, in its turn, so near as ·142857142857, &c. 147. If there should be ciphers in the numerator of a fraction, these must not be reckoned with the number of ciphers which are necessary in order to follow the rule for changing it into a decimal fraction. Take, for example, ¹⁰⁰/₁₂₅; annex ciphers to the numerator, and divide by the denominator. It appears that 1000 is divisible by 125, and that the quotient is 8. One cipher only has been annexed to the numerator, and therefore 100 divided by 125 is ·8. Had the fraction been ¹/₁₂₅, since 1000 divided by 125 gives 8, and three ciphers would have been annexed to the numerator, the fraction would have been ·008. 148. Suppose that the given fraction has ciphers at the right of its denominator; for example, ³¹/₂₅₀₀. Then annexing a cipher to the numerator is the same thing as taking one away from the denominator; for, (108) ³¹⁰/₂₅₀₀ is the same thing as ³¹/₂₅₀, and ³¹⁰/₂₅₀ as ³¹/₂₅. The rule, therefore, is in this case: Take away the ciphers from the denominator. EXERCISES. Reduce the following fractions to decimal fractions: 1 36 297 1 ---, ----, ----, and ---. 800 1250 64 128 _Answer_, ·00125, ·0288, 4·640625, and ·0078125. Find decimals of 6 places very near to the following fractions: 27 156 22 194 2637 1 1 3 --, ---, -----, ---, ----, ----, ---, and ---. 49 33 37000 13 9907 2908 466 277 _Answer_, ·551020, 4·727272, ·000594, 14·923076, ·266175, ·000343, ·002145, and ·010830. 149. From (121) it appears, that if two fractions have the same denominator, the first may be divided by the second by dividing the numerator of the first by the numerator of the second. Suppose it required to divide 17·762 by 6·25. These fractions (138), when reduced to a common denominator, are 17·762 and 6·250, or ¹⁷⁷⁶²/₁₀₀₀ and ⁶²⁵⁰/₁₀₀₀. Their quotient is therefore ¹⁷⁷⁶²/₆₂₅₀, which must now be reduced to a decimal fraction by the last rule. The process at full length is as follows: Leave out the cipher in the denominator, and annex ciphers to the numerator, or, which will do as well, to the remainders, when it becomes necessary, and divide as in (145). 625)17762(284192 1250 ----- 5262 5000 ----- 2620 2500 ----- 1200 625 ----- 5750 5625 ----- 1250 1250 ---- 0 Here four ciphers have been annexed to the numerator, and one has been taken from the denominator. Make five decimal places in the quotient, which then becomes 2·84192, and this is the quotient of 17·762 divided by 6·25. 150. The rule for division of one decimal by another is as follows: Equalise the number of decimal places in the dividend and divisor, by annexing ciphers to that which has fewest places. Then, further, annex as many ciphers to the dividend[18] as it is required to have decimal places, throw away the decimal point, and operate as in common division. Make the required number of decimal places in the quotient. [18] Or remove ciphers from the divisor; or make up the number of ciphers partly by removing from the divisor and annexing to the dividend, if there be not a sufficient number in the divisor. Thus, to divide 6·7173 by ·014 to three decimal places, I first write 6·7173 and ·0140, with four places in each. Having to provide for three decimal places, I should annex three ciphers to 6·7173; but, observing that the divisor ·0140 has one cipher, I strike that one out and annex two ciphers to 6·7173. Throwing away the decimal points, then divide 6717300 by 014 or 14 in the usual way, which gives the quotient 479807 and the remainder 2. Hence 479·807 is the answer. The common rule is: Let the quotient contain as many decimal places as there are decimal places in the dividend more than in the divisor. But this rule becomes inoperative except when there are more decimals in the dividend than in the divisor, and a number of ciphers must be annexed to the former. The rule in the text amounts to the same thing, and provides for an assigned number of decimal places. But the student is recommended to make himself familiar with the rule of the _characteristic_ given in the Appendix, and also to accustom himself to _reason out_ the place of the decimal point. Thus, it should be visible, that 26·119 ÷ 7·2436 has one figure before the decimal point, and that 26·119 ÷ 724·36 has one cipher after it, preceding all significant figures. Or the following rule may be used: Expunge the decimal point of the divisor, and move that of the dividend as many places to the right as there were places in the divisor, using ciphers if necessary. Then proceed as in common division, making one decimal place in the quotient for every decimal place of the final dividend which is used. Thus 17·314 divided by 61·2 is 173·14 divided by 612, and the decimal point must precede the first figure of the quotient. But 17·314 divided by 6617·5 is 173·14 by 66175; and since three decimal places of 173·14000 ... must be used before a quotient figure can be found, that quotient figure is the third decimal place, or the quotient is ·002..... EXAMPLES. 3·1 ·00062 ----- = 1240, ------ = ·00096875 ·0025 ·64 EXERCISES. 15·006 × 15·006 - ·004 × ·004 Shew that ----------------------------- = 15·002, 15·01 and that ·01 × ·01 × ·01 + 2·9 × 2·9 × 2·9 --------------------------------- = 2·9 × 2·9 - 2·9 × ·01 + ·01 × ·01 2·91 1 1 365 What are -------, ---------, and ------, as far as 6 places 3·14159 2·7182818 ·18349 of decimals?--_Answer_, ·318310, ·367879, and 1989·209221. Calculate 10 terms of each of the following series, as far as 5 places of decimals. 1 1 1 1 1 + --- + ----- + --------- + ------------- + &c. = 1·71824. 2 2 × 3 2 × 3 × 4 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 1 1 1 1 1 + --- + --- + --- + --- + &c. = 2·92895. 2 3 4 5 80 81 82 83 84 ---- + ---- + ---- + ---- + ---- + &c. = 9·88286. 81 82 83 84 85 151. We now enter upon methods by which unnecessary trouble is saved in the computation of decimal quantities. And first, suppose a number of miles has been measured, and found to be 17·846217 miles. If you were asked how many miles there are in this distance, and a rough answer were required which should give miles only, and not parts of miles, you would probably say 17. But this, though the number of whole miles contained in the distance, is not the nearest number of miles; for, since the distance is more than 17 miles and 8 tenths, and therefore more than 17 miles and a half, it is nearer the truth to say, it is 18 miles. This, though too great, is not so much too great as the other was too little, and the error is not so great as half a mile. Again, if the same were required within a tenth of a mile, the correct answer is 17·8; for though this is too little by ·046217, yet it is not so much too little as 17·9 is too great; and the error is less than half a tenth, or ¹/₂₀. Again, the same distance, within a hundredth of a mile, is more correctly 17·85 than 17·84, since the last is too little by ·006217, which is greater than the half of ·01; and therefore 17·84 + ·01 is nearer the truth than 17·84. Hence this general rule: When a certain number of the decimals given is sufficiently accurate for the purpose, strike off the rest from the right hand, observing, if the first figure struck off be equal to or greater than 5, to increase the last remaining figure by 1. The following are examples of a decimal abbreviated by one place at a time. 3·14159, 3·1416, 3·142, 3·14, 3·1, 3·0 2·7182818, 2·718282, 2·71828, 2·7183, 2·718, 2·72, 2·7, 3·0 1·9919, 1·992, 1·99, 2·00, 2·0 152. In multiplication and division it is useless to retain more places of decimals in the result than were certainly correct in the multiplier, &c., which gave that result. Suppose, for example, that 9·98 and 8·96 are distances in inches which have been measured correctly to two places of decimals, that is, within half a hundredth of an inch each way. The real value of that which we call 9·98 may be any where between 9·975 and 9·985, and that of 8·96 may be any where between 8·955 and 8·965. The product, therefore, of the numbers which represent the correct distances will lie between 9·975 × 8·955 and 9·985 × 8·965, that is, taking three decimal places in the products, between 89·326 and 89·516. The product of the actual numbers given is 89·4208. It appears, then, that in this case no more than the whole number 89 can be depended upon in the product, or, at most, the first place of decimals. The reason is, that the error made in measuring 8·96, though only in the third place of decimals, is in the multiplication increased at least 9·975, or nearly 10 times; and therefore affects the second place. The following simple rule will enable us to judge how far a product is to be depended upon. Let _a_ be the multiplier, and _b_ the multiplicand; if these be true only to the first decimal place, the product is within (_a_ + _b_)/20[19] of the truth; if to two decimal places, within (_a_ + _b_)/200; if to three, within (_a_ + _b_)/2000; and so on. Thus, in the above example, we have 9·98 and 8·96, which are true to two decimal places: their sum divided by 200 is ·0947, and their product is 89·4208, which is therefore within ·0947 of the truth. If, in fact, we increase and diminish 89·4208 by ·0947, we get 89·5155 and 89·3261, which are very nearly the limits found within which the product must lie. We see, then, that we cannot in this case depend upon the first place of decimals, as (151) an error of ·05 cannot exist if this place be correct; and here is a possible error of ·09 and upwards. It is hardly necessary to say, that if the numbers given be exact, their product is exact also, and that this article applies where the numbers given are correct only to a certain number of decimal places. The rule is: Take half the sum of the multiplier and multiplicand, remove the decimal point as many places to the left as there are correct places of decimals in either the multiplier or multiplicand; the result is the quantity within which the product can be depended upon. In division, the rule is: Proceed as in the last rule, putting the dividend and divisor in place of the multiplier and multiplicand, and divide by the _square_ of the divisor; the quotient will be the quantity within which the division of the first dividend and divisor may be depended upon. Thus, if 17·324 be divided by 53·809, both being correct to the third place, their half sum will be 35·566, which, by the last rule, is made ·035566, and is to be divided by the square of 53·809, or, which will do as well for our purpose, the square of 50, or 2500. The result is something less than ·00002, so that the quotient of 17·324 and 53·809 can be depended on to four places of decimals. [19] These are not quite correct, but sufficiently so for every practical purpose. 153. It is required to multiply two decimal fractions together, so as to retain in the product only a given number of decimal places, and dispense with the trouble of finding the rest. First, it is evident that we may write the figures of any multiplier in a contrary order (for example, 4321 instead of 1234), provided that in the operation we move each line one place to the right instead of to the left, as in the following example: 2221 2221 1234 4321 ---- ---- 8884 2221 6663 4442 4442 6663 2221 8884 ------- ------- 2740714 2740714 Suppose now we wish to multiply 348·8414 by 51·30742, reserving only four decimal places in the product. If we reverse the multiplier, and proceed in the manner just pointed out, we have the following: 3488414 2470315 | ---------+ 17442070 | 3488414| 1046524|2 24418|898 1395|3656 69|76828 ----------+------ 17898·1522|23188 Cut off, by a vertical line, the first four places of decimals, and the columns which produced them. It is plain that in forming our abbreviated rule, we have to consider only, I. all that is on the left of the vertical line; II. all that is carried from the first column on the right of the line. On looking at the first column to the left of the line, we see 4, 4, 8, 5, 9, of which the first 4 comes from 4 × 1′,[20] the second 4 from 1 × 3′, the 8 from 8 × 7′, the 5 from 8 × 4′, and the 9 from 4 × 2′. If, then, we arrange the multiplicand and the reversed multiplier thus, 3488414 2470315 each figure of the multiplier is placed under the first figure of the multiplicand which is used with it in forming the first _four_ places of decimals. And here observe, that the units’ figure in the multiplier 51·30742, viz. 1, comes under 4, the _fourth_ decimal place in the multiplicand. If there had been no carrying from the right of the vertical line, the rule would have been: Reverse the multiplier, and place it under the multiplicand, so that the figure which was the units’ figure in the multiplier may stand under the last place of decimals in the multiplicand which is to be preserved; place ciphers over those figures of the multiplier which have none of the multiplicand above them, if there be any: proceed to multiply in the usual way, but begin each figure of the multiplier with the figure of the multiplicand which comes above it, taking no account of those on the right: place the first figures of all the lines under one another. To correct this rule, so as to allow for what is carried from the right of the vertical line, observe that this consists of two parts, 1st, what is carried directly in the formation of the different lines, and 2dly, what is carried from the addition of the first column on the right. The first of these may be taken into account by beginning each figure of the multiplier with the one which comes on its right in the multiplicand, and carrying the tens to the next figure as usual, but without writing down the units. But both may be allowed for at once, with sufficient correctness, on the principle of (151), by carrying 1 from 5 up to 15, 2 from 15 up to 25, &c.; that is, by carrying the nearest ten. Thus, for 37, 4 would be carried, 37 being nearer to 40 than to 30. This will not always give the last place quite correctly, but the error may be avoided by setting out so as to keep one more place of decimals in the product than is absolutely required to be correct. The rule, then, is as follows: [20] The 1′ here means that the 1 is in the multiplier. 154. To multiply two decimals together, retaining only _n_ decimal places. I. Reverse the multiplier, strike out the decimal points, and place the multiplier under the multiplicand, so that what was its units’ figure shall fall under the _n_ᵗʰ decimal place of the multiplicand, placing ciphers, if necessary, so that every place of the multiplier shall have a figure or cipher above it. II. Proceed to multiply as usual, beginning each figure of the multiplier with the one which is in the place to its right in the multiplicand: do not set down this first figure, but carry its _nearest_ ten to the next, and proceed. III. Place the first figures of all the lines under one another; add as usual; and mark off _n_ places from the right for decimals. It is required to multiply 136·4072 by 1·30609, retaining 7 decimal places. 1364072000 906031 ---------- 1364072000 409221600 8184432 122766 ----------- 178·1600798 In the following examples the first two lines are the multiplicand and multiplier; and the number of decimals to be retained will be seen from the results. ·4471618 33·166248 3·4641016 3·7719214 1·4142136 1732·508 ========= ========== ============ 37719214 033166248 346410160 8161744 63124141 8052371 -------- ---------- ------------ 15087686 3316625 346410160 1508768 1326650 242487112 264034 33166 10392305 3772 13266 692820 2263 663 173205 38 33 2771 30 10 ------------ --------- 2 6001·58373 1·6866591 -------- 46·90415 Exercises may be got from article (143). 155. With regard to division, take any two numbers, for example, 16·80437921 and 3·142, and divide the first by the second, as far as any required number of decimal places, for example, five. This gives the following: 3·142)16·80437921(5·34830 15·710 ------- 1·0943 | 9426 | -----| 15177| (A) 12568| ---- -----|- 2609 2609|9 2514 2513|6 ---- ----|-- 95 96|32 94 94|26 -- --|--- 1 2|061 Now cut off by a vertical line, as in (153), all the figures which come on the right of the first figure 2, in the last remainder 2061. As in multiplication, we may obtain all that is on the left of the vertical line by an abbreviated method, as represented at (A). After what has been said on multiplication, it is useless to go further into the detail; the following rule will be sufficient: To divide one decimal by another, retaining only _n_ places: Proceed one step in the ordinary division, and determine, by (150), in what place is the quotient so obtained; proceed in the ordinary way, until the number of figures remaining to be found in the quotient is less than the number of figures in the divisor: if this should be already the case, proceed no further in the ordinary way. Instead of annexing a figure or cipher to the remainder, cut off a figure from the divisor, and proceed one step with this curtailed divisor as usual, remembering, however, in multiplying this divisor, to carry the _nearest ten_, as in (154), from the figure which was struck off; repeat this, striking off another figure of the divisor, and so on, until no figures are left. Since we know from the beginning in what place the first figure of the quotient is, and also how many decimals are required, we can tell from the beginning how many figures there will be in the whole quotient. If the divisor contain more figures than the quotient, it will be unnecessary to use them: and they may be rejected, the rest being corrected as in (151): if there be ciphers at the beginning of the divisor, if it be, for example, ·3178 ·003178, since this is -----, 100 divide by ·3178 in the usual way, and afterwards multiply the quotient by 100, or remove the decimal point two places to the right. If, therefore, six decimals be required, eight places must be taken in dividing by ·3178, for an obvious reason. In finding the last figure of the quotient, the nearest should be taken, as in the second of the subjoined examples. Places required, 2 8 Divisor, ·41432 3·1415927 Dividend, 673·1489 2·71828180 41432 2·51327416 -------- ---------- 258828 20500764 248592 18849556 ------- -------- 10237[21] 1651208 8286 1570796 ----- ------- 1951 80412 1657 62832 ----- ----- 294 17580 290 15708 --- ----- 4 1872 4 1571 - ---- 0 301 283 --- 18 19 -- Quotient, 1624·71 ·86525596 [21] This is written 7 instead of 6, because the figure which is abandoned in the dividend is 9 (151). Examples may be obtained from (143) and (150). SECTION VII. ON THE EXTRACTION OF THE SQUARE ROOT. 156. We have already remarked (66), that a number multiplied by itself produces what is called the _square_ of that number. Thus, 169, or 13 × 13, is the square of 13. Conversely, 13 is called the _square root_ of 169, and 5 is the square root of 25; and any number is the square root of another, which when multiplied by itself will produce that other. The square root is signified by the sign _ √ or √ ; _______ thus, √25 means the square root of 25, or 5; √(16 + 9) means the square root of 16 + 9, and is 5, and must not be confounded with √16 + √9, which is 4 + 3, or 7. 157. The following equations are evident from the definition: ___ ___ √_a_ × √_a_ = _a_ ____ √_aa_ = _a_ ___ ___ ___ √_ab_ × √_ab_ = _ab_ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ (√_a_ × √_b_) × (√_a_ × √_b_) = √_a_ × √_a_ × √_b_ × √_b_ = _ab_ ___ ___ ____ whence √_a_ × √_b_ = √_ab_ 158. It does not follow that a number has a square root because it has a square; thus, though 5 can be multiplied by itself, there is no number which multiplied by itself will produce 5. It is proved in algebra, that no fraction[22] multiplied by itself can produce a whole number, which may be found true in any number of instances; therefore 5 has neither a whole nor a fractional square root; that is, it has no square root at all. Nevertheless, there are methods of finding fractions whose squares shall be as _near_ to 5 as we please, though not exactly equal to it. One of these methods gives ¹⁵¹²⁷/₆₇₆₅, whose square, viz. 15127 15127 228826129 ----- × ----- or ---------, 6765 6765 45765225 differs from 5 by only ⁴/₄₅₇₆₅₂₂₅, which is less than ·0000001: hence we are enabled to use √5 in arithmetical and algebraical reasoning: but when we come to the practice of any problem, we must substitute for √5 one of the fractions whose square is nearly 5, and on the degree of accuracy we want, depends what fraction is to be used. For some purposes, ¹²³/₅₅ may be sufficient, as its square only differs from 5 by ⁴/₃₀₂₅; for others, the fraction first given might be necessary, or one whose square is even nearer to 5. We proceed to shew how to find the square root of a number, when it has one, and from thence how to find fractions whose squares shall be as near as we please to the number, when it has not. We premise, what is sufficiently evident, that of two numbers, the greater has the greater square; and that if one number lie between two others, its square lies between the squares of those others. [22] Meaning, of course, a really fractional number, such as ⅞ or ¹⁵/₁₁, not one which, though fractional in form, is whole in reality, such as ¹⁰/₅ or ²⁷/₃. 159. Let _x_ be a number consisting of any number of parts, for example, four, viz. _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_; that is, let _x_ = _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_ The square of this number, found as in (68), will be _aa_ + 2_a_(_b_ + _c_ + _d_) + _bb_ + 2_b_(_c_ + _d_) + _cc_ + 2_cd_ + _dd_ The rule there found for squaring a number consisting of parts was: Square each part, and multiply all that come after by twice that part, the sum of all the results so obtained will be the square of the whole number. In the expression above obtained, instead of multiplying 2_a_ by _each_ of the succeeding parts, _b_, _c_, and _d_, and adding the results, we multiplied 2_a_ by the _sum of all_ the succeeding parts, which (52) is the same thing; and as the parts, however disposed, make up the number, we may reverse their order, putting the last first, &c.; and the rule for squaring will be: Square each part, and multiply all that come before by twice that part. Hence a reverse rule for extracting the square root presents itself with more than usual simplicity. It is: To extract the square root of a number N, choose a number A, and see if N will bear the subtraction of the square of A; if so, take the remainder, choose a second number B, and see if the remainder will bear the subtraction of the square of B, and twice B multiplied by the preceding part A: if it will, there is a second remainder. Choose a third number C, and see if the second remainder will bear the subtraction of the square of C, and twice C multiplied by A + B: go on in this way either until there is no remainder, or else until the remainder will not bear the subtraction arising from any new part, even though that part were the least number, which is 1. In the first case, the square root is the sum of A, B, C, &c.; in the second, there is no square root. 160. For example, I wish to know if 2025 has a square root. I choose 20 as the first part, and find that 400, the square of 20, subtracted from 2025, gives 1625, the first remainder. I again choose 20, whose square, together with twice itself, multiplied by the preceding part, is 20 × 20 + 2 × 20 × 20, or 1200; which subtracted from 1625, the first remainder, gives 425, the second remainder. I choose 7 for the third part, which appears to be too great, since 7 × 7, increased by 2 × 7 multiplied by the sum of the preceding parts 20 + 20, gives 609, which is more than 425. I therefore choose 5, which closes the process, since 5 × 5, together with 2 × 5 multiplied by 20 + 20, gives exactly 425. The square root of 2025 is therefore 20 + 20 + 5, or 45, which will be found, by trial, to be correct; since 45 × 45 = 2025. Again, I ask if 13340 has, or has not, a square root. Let 100 be the first part, whose square is 10000, and the first remainder is 3340. Let 10 be the second part. Here 10 × 10 + 2 × 10 × 100 is 2100, and the second remainder, or 3340-2100, is 1240. Let 5 be the third part; then 5 × 5 + 2 × 5 × (100 + 10) is 1125, which, subtracted from 1240, leaves 115. There is, then, no square root; for a single additional unit will give a subtraction of 1 × 1 + 2 × 1 × (100 + 10 + 5), or 231, which is greater than 115. But if the number proposed had been less by 115, each of the remainders would have been 115 less, and the last remainder would have been nothing. Therefore 13340-115, or 13225, has the square root 100 + 10 + 5, or 115; and the answer is, that 13340 has no square root, and that 13225 is the next number below it which has one, namely, 115. 161. It only remains to put the rule in such a shape as will guide us to those parts which it is most convenient to choose. It is evident (57) that any number which terminates with ciphers, as 4000, has double the number of ciphers in its square. Thus, 4000 × 4000 = 16000000; therefore, any square number,[23] as 49, with an even number of ciphers annexed, as 490000, is a square number. The root[24] of 490000 is 700. This being premised, take any number, for example, 76176; setting out from the right hand towards the left, cut off two figures; then two more, and so on, until one or two figures only are left: thus, 7,61,76. This number is greater than 7,00,00, of which the first figure is not a square number, the nearest square below it being 4. Hence, 4,00,00 is the nearest square number below 7,00,00, which has four ciphers, and its square root is 200. Let this be the first part chosen: its square subtracted from 76176 leaves 36176, the first remainder; and it is evident that we have obtained the highest number of the highest denomination which is to be found in the square root of 76176; for 300 is too great, its square, 9,00,00, being greater than 76176: and any denomination higher than hundreds has a square still greater. It remains, then, to choose a second part, as in the examples of (160), with the remainder 36176. This part cannot be as great as 100, by what has just been said; its highest denomination is therefore a number of tens. Let N stand for a number of tens, which is one of the simple numbers 1, 2, 3, &c.; that is, let the new part be 10N, whose square is 10N × 10N, or 100NN, and whose double multiplied by the former part is 20N × 200, or 4000N; the two together are 4000N + 100NN. Now, N must be so taken that this may not be greater than 36176: still more 4000N must not be greater than 36176. We may therefore try, for N, the number of times which 36176 contains 4000, or that which 36 contains 4. The remark in (80) applies here. Let us try 9 tens or 90. Then, 2 × 90 × 200 + 90 × 90, or 44100, is to be subtracted, which is too great, since the whole remainder is 36176. We then try 8 tens or 80, which gives 2 × 80 × 200 + 80 × 80, or 38400, which is likewise too great. On trying 7 tens, or 70, we find 2 × 70 × 200 + 70 × 70, or 32900, which subtracted from 36176 gives 3276, the second remainder. The rest of the square root can only be units. As before, let N be this number of units. Then, the sum of the preceding parts being 200 + 70, or 270, the number to be subtracted is 270 × 2N + NN, or 540N + NN. Hence, as before, 540N must be less than 3276, or N must not be greater than the number of times which 3276 contains 540, or (80) which 327 contains 54. We therefore try if 6 will do, which gives 2 × 6 × 270 + 6 × 6, or 3276, to be subtracted. This being exactly the second remainder, the third remainder is nothing, and the process is finished. The square root required is therefore 200 + 70 + 6, or 276. [23] By square number I mean, a number which has a square root. Thus, 25 is a square number, but 26 is not. [24] The term ‘root’ is frequently used as an abbreviation of square root. The process of forming the numbers to be subtracted may be shortened thus. Let A be the sum of the parts already found, and N a new part: there must then be subtracted 2AN + NN, or (54) 2A + N multiplied by N. The rule, therefore, for forming it is: Double the sum of all the preceding parts, add the new part, and multiply the result by the new part. 162. The process of the last article is as follows: 7,61,76(200 7,61,76(276 4 00 00 70 4 ------- 6 --- 400)3,61,76 47)361 70)3 29 00 329 ------- ----- 400) 32 76 546)3276 140) 32 76 3276 6) ----- ---- 0 0 In the first of these, the numbers are written at length, as we found them; in the second, as in (79), unnecessary ciphers are struck off, and the periods 61, 76, are not brought down, until, by the continuance of the process, they cease to have ciphers under them. The following is another example, to which the reasoning of the last article may be applied. 34,86,78,44,01(50000 34,86,78,44,01(59049 25 00 00 00 00 9000 25 -------------- 40 ---- 100000) 9 86 78 44 01 9 109) 986 9000) 9 81 00 00 00 981 ------------- ------- 100000) 5 78 44 01 11804) 57844 18000) 4 72 16 00 47216 40) ----------- -------- 100000) 1 06 28 01 118089)1062801 18000) 1 06 28 01 1062801 80) ---------- ------- 9) 0 0 163. The rule is as follows: To extract the square root of a number;-- I. Beginning from the right hand, cut off periods of two figures each, until not more than two are left. II. Find the root of the nearest square number next below the number in the first period. This root is the first figure of the required root; subtract its square from the first period, which gives the first remainder. III. Annex the second period to the right of the remainder, which gives the first dividend. IV. Double the first figure of the root; see how often this is contained in the number made by cutting one figure from the right of the first dividend, attending to IX., if necessary; use the quotient as the second figure of the root; annex it to the right of the double of the first figure, and call this the first divisor. V. Multiply the first divisor by the second figure of the root; if the product be greater than the first dividend, use a lower number for the second figure of the root, and for the last figure of the divisor, until the multiplication just mentioned gives the product less than the first dividend; subtract this from the first dividend, which gives the second remainder. VI. Annex the third period to the second remainder, which gives the second dividend. VII. Double the first two figures of the root;[25] see how often the result is contained in the number made by cutting one figure from the right of the second dividend; use the quotient as the third figure of the root; annex it to the right of the double of the first two figures, and call this the second divisor. [25] Or, more simply, add the second figure of the root to the first divisor. VIII. Get a new remainder, as in V., and repeat the process until all the periods are exhausted; if there be then no remainder, the square root is found; if there be a remainder, the proposed number has no square root, and the number found as its square root is the square root of the proposed number diminished by the remainder. IX. When it happens that the double of the figures of the root is not contained at all in all the dividend except the last figure, or when, being contained once, 1 is found to give more than the dividend, put a cipher in the square root and in the divisor, and bring down the next period; should the same thing still happen, put another cipher in the root and divisor, and bring down another period; and so on. EXERCISES. Numbers proposed. | Square roots. 73441 | 271 2992900 | 1730 6414247921 | 80089 903687890625 | 950625 42420747482776576 | 205962976 13422659310152401 | 115856201 164. Since the square of a fraction is obtained by squaring the numerator and the denominator, the square root of a fraction is found by taking the square root of both. Thus, the square root of ²⁵/₆₄ is ⅝, since 5 × 5 is 25, and 8 × 8 is 64. If the numerator or denominator, or both, be not square numbers, it does not therefore follow that the fraction has no square root; for it may happen that multiplication or division by the same number may convert both the numerator and denominator into square numbers (108). Thus, ²⁷/₄₈, which appears at first to have no square root, has one in reality, since it is the same as ⁹/₁₆, whose square root is ¾. 165. We now proceed from (158), where it was stated that any number or fraction being given, a second may be found, whose square is as near to the first as we please. Thus, though we cannot solve the problem, “Find a fraction whose square is 2,” we can solve the following, “Find a fraction whose square shall not differ from 2 by so much as ·00000001.” Instead of this last, a still smaller fraction may be substituted; in fact, any one however small: and in this process we are said to approximate to the square root of 2. This can be done to any extent, as follows: Suppose we wish to find the square root of 2 within ¹/₅₇ of the truth; by which I mean, to find a fraction _a_/_b_ whose square is less than 2, but such that the square of _a_/_b_ + ¹/₅₇ is greater than 2. Multiply the numerator and denominator of ²/₁ by the square of 57, or 3249, which gives ⁶⁴⁹⁸/₃₂₄₉. On attempting to extract the square root of the numerator, I find (163) that there is a remainder 98, and that the square number next below 6498 is 6400, whose root is 80. Hence, the square of 80 is less than 6498, while that of 81 is greater. The square root of the denominator is of course 57. Hence, the square of ⁸⁰/⁵⁷ is less than ⁶⁴⁹⁸/₃₂₄₉, or 2, while that of ⁸¹/₅₇ is greater, and these two fractions only differ by ¹/₅₇; which was required to be done. 166. In practice, it is usual to find the square root true to a certain number of places of decimals. Thus, 1·4142 is the square root of 2 true to four places of decimals, since the square of 1·4142, or 1·99996164, is less than 2, while an increase of only 1 in the fourth decimal place, giving 1·4143, gives the square 2·00024449, which is greater than 2. To take a more general case: Suppose it required to find the square root of 1·637 true to four places of decimals. The fraction is ¹⁶³⁷/₁₀₀₀, whose square root is to be found within ·0001, or ¹/₁₀₀₀₀. Annex ciphers to the numerator and denominator, until the denominator becomes the square of ¹/₁₀₀₀₀, which gives ¹⁶³⁷⁰⁰⁰⁰⁰/₁₀₀₀₀₀₀₀₀, extract the square root of the numerator, as in (163), which shews that the square number nearest to it is 163700000-13564, whose root is 12794. Hence, ¹²⁷⁹⁴/₁₀₀₀₀, or 1·2794, gives a square less than 1·637, while 1·2795 gives a square greater. In fact, these two squares are 1·63686436 and 1·63712025. 167. The rule, then, for extracting the square root of a number or decimal to any number of places is: Annex ciphers until there are twice as many places following the units’ place as there are to be decimal places in the root; extract the nearest square root of this number, and mark off the given number of decimals. Or, more simply: Divide the number into periods, so that the units’ figure shall be the last of a period; proceed in the usual way; and if, when decimals follow the units’ place, there is one figure on the right, in a period by itself, annex a cipher in bringing down that period, and afterwards let each new period consist of two ciphers. Place the decimal point after that figure in forming which the period containing the units was used. 168. For example, what is the square root of (1⅜) to five places of decimals? This is (145) 1·375, and the process is the first example over leaf. The second example is the extraction of the root of ·081 to seven places, the first period being 08, from which the cipher is omitted as useless. 1,37,5(1·17260 1 --- 21) 37 21 ---- 227)1650 1589 ------ 2342) 6100 4684 ------ 23446)141600 140676 -------- 23452) 92400 8,1(·2846049 4 --- 48)410 384 ------ 564) 2600 2256 ------ 5686) 34400 34116 --------- 569204) 2840000 2276816 --------- 569208) 56318400 ·000002413672221(·001553599 1 --- 25) 141 125 ----- 305) 1636 1525 ------ 3103) 11172 9309 ------ 31065) 186322 155325 -------- 310709) 3099710 2796381 --------- 30332900 169. When more than half the decimals required have been found, the others may be simply found by dividing the dividend by the divisor, as in (155). The extraction of the square root of 12 to ten places, which will be found in the next page, is an example. It must, however, be observed in this process, as in all others where decimals are obtained by approximation, that the last place cannot always be depended upon: on which account it is advisable to carry the process so far, that one or even two more decimals shall be obtained than are absolutely required to be correct. A 12(3·46410161513 9 --- 64) 300 256 ----- 686) 4400 4116 ------ 6924) 28400 27696 ------ 69281) 70400 69281 ---------- 6928201) 11190000 6928201 -------+-- 69282026) 4261799|00 4156921|56 -------+---- 692820321) 104877|4400 69282|0321 -----+------ 6928203225) 35595|407900 34641|016125 -----+-------- 69282032301) 954|39177500 692|82032301 ---+---------- 692820323023) 261|5714519900 207|8460969069 ---+---------- 53|7253550831 B 692820323026) 537253550831(77545870549 484974226118 ------------ 52279324713 48497422611 ----------- 3781902102 3464101615 ---------- 317800487 277128129 --------- 40672358 34641016 -------- 6031342 5542562 ------- 488780 484974 ------ 3806 3464 ---- 342 277 --- 65 62 -- 3 If from any remainder we cut off the ciphers, and all figures which would come under or on the right of these ciphers, by a vertical line, we find on the left of that line a contracted division, such as those in (155). Thus, after having found the root as far as 3·464101, we have the remainder 4261799, and the divisor 6928202. The figures on the left of the line are nothing more than the contracted division of this remainder by the divisor, with this difference, however, that we have to begin by striking a figure off the divisor, instead of using the whole divisor once, and then striking off the first figure. By this alone we might have doubled our number of decimal places, and got the additional figures 615137, the last 7 being obtained by carrying the contracted division one step further with the remainder 53. We have, then, this rule: When half the number of decimal places have been obtained, instead of annexing two ciphers to the remainder, strike off a figure from what would be the divisor if the process were continued at length, and divide the remainder by this contracted divisor, as in (155). As an example, let us double the number of decimal places already obtained, which are contained in 3·46410161513. The remainder is 537253550831, the divisor 692820323026, and the process is as in (B). Hence the square root of 12 is, 3·4641016151377545870549; which is true to the last figure, and a little too great; but the substitution of 8 instead of 9 on the right hand would make it too small. EXERCISES. Numbers. | Square roots. ·001728 | ·0415692194 64·34 | 8·02122185 8074 | 89·8554394 10 | 3·16227766 1·57 | 1·2529964086141667788495 SECTION VIII. ON THE PROPORTION OF NUMBERS. 170. When two numbers are named in any problem, it is usually necessary, in some way or other, to compare the two; that is, by considering the two together, to establish some connexion between them, which may be useful in future operations. The first method which suggests itself, and the most simple, is to observe which is the greater, and by how much it differs from the other. The connexion thus established between two numbers may also hold good of two other numbers; for example, 8 differs from 19 by 11, and 100 differs from 111 by the same number. In this point of view, 8 stands to 19 in the same situation in which 100 stands to 111, the first of both couples differing in the same degree from the second. The four numbers thus noticed, viz.: 8, 19, 100, 111, are said to be in _arithmetical[26] proportion_. When four numbers are thus placed, the first and last are called the _extremes_, and the second and third the _means_. It is obvious that 111 + 8 = 100 + 19, that is, the sum of the extremes is equal to the sum of the means. And this is not accidental, arising from the particular numbers we have taken, but must be the case in every arithmetical proportion; for in 111 + 8, by (35), any diminution of 111 will not affect the sum, provided a corresponding increase be given to 8; and, by the definition just given, one mean is as much less than 111 as the other is greater than 8. [26] This is a very incorrect name, since the term ‘arithmetical’ applies equally to every notion in this book. It is necessary, however, that the pupil should use words in the sense in which they will be used in his succeeding studies. 171. A set or series of numbers is said to be in _continued_ arithmetical proportion, or in arithmetical _progression_, when the difference between every two succeeding terms of the series is the same. This is the case in the following series: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, &c. (1½), 2, (2½), 3, (3½), &c. The difference between two succeeding terms is called the common difference. In the three series just given, the common differences are, 1, 3, and ½. 172. If a certain number of terms of any arithmetical series be taken, the sum of the first and last terms is the same as that of any other two terms, provided one is as distant from the beginning of the series as the other is from the end. For example, let there be 7 terms, and let them be, _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ _e_ _f_ _g_. Then, since, by the nature of the series, _b_ is as much above _a_ as _f_ is below _g_ (170), _a_ + _g_ = _b_ + _f_. Again, since _c_ is as much above _b_ as _e_ is below _f_ (170), _b_ + _f_ = _c_ + _e_. But _a_ + _g_ = _b_ + _f_; therefore _a_ + _g_ = _c_ + _e_, and so on. Again, twice the middle term, or the term equally distant from the beginning and the end (which exists only when the number of terms is odd), is equal to the sum of the first and last terms; for since _c_ is as much below _d_ as _e_ is above it, we have _c_ + _e_ = _d_ + _d_ = 2_d_. But _c_ + _e_ = _a_ + _g_; therefore, _a_ + _g_ = 2_d_. This will give a short rule for finding the sum of any number of terms of an arithmetical series. Let there be 7, viz. those just given. Since _a_ + _g_, _b_ + _f_, and _c_ + _e_, are the same, their sum is three times (_a_ + _g_), which with _d_, the middle term, or half _a_ + _g_, is three times and a half (_a_ + _g_), or the sum of the first and last terms multiplied by (3½), or ⁷/₂, or half the number of terms. If there had been an even number of terms, for example, six, viz. _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, _e_, and _f_, we know now that _a_ + _f_, _b_ + _e_, and _c_ + _d_, are the same, whence the sum is three times (_a_ + _f_), or the sum of the first and last terms multiplied by half the number of terms, as before. The rule, then, is: To sum any number of terms of an arithmetical progression, multiply the sum of the first and last terms by half the number of terms. For example, what are 99 terms of the series 1, 2, 3, &c.? The 99th term is 99, and the sum is 99 100 × 99 (99 + 1)---, or --------, or 4950. 2 2 The sum of 50 terms of the series 1 2 4 5 ( 1 50 ) 50 ---, ---, 1, ---, ---, 2, &c. is (--- + ---)---, 3 3 3 3 ( 3 3 ) 2 or 17 × 25, or 425. 173. The first term being given, and also the common difference and number of terms, the last term may be found by adding to the first term the common difference multiplied by one less than the number of terms. For it is evident that the second term differs from the first by the common difference, the _third_ term by _twice_, the _fourth_ term by _three_ times the common difference; and so on. Or, the passage from the first to the _n_th term is made by _n_-1 steps, at each of which the common difference is added. EXERCISES. _Given._ | _To find._ Series. |No. of terms.| Last term. | Sum. 4, (6½), 9, &c. | 33 | 84 | 1452 1, 3, 5, &c. | 28 | 55 | 784 2, 20, 38, &c. | 100,000 | 1799984 | 89999300000 174. The sum being given, the number of terms, and the first term, we can thence find the common difference. Suppose, for example, the first term of a series to be one, the number of terms 100, and the sum 10,000. Since 10,000 was made by multiplying the sum of the first and last terms by ¹⁰⁰/₂, if we divide by this, we shall recover the sum of the first and last terms. Now, ¹⁰,⁰⁰⁰/₁ divided by ¹⁰⁰/₂ is (122) 200, and the first term being 1, the last term is 199. We have then to pass from 1 to 199, or through 198, by 99 equal steps. Each step is, therefore, ¹⁹⁸/⁹⁹, or 2, which is the common difference; or the series is 1, 3, 5, &c., up to 199. _Given._ | _To find._ Sum. |No. of terms.|First term.|Last term.|Common diff. 1809025 | 1345 | 1 | 2689 | 2 44 | 10 | 3 | ²⁹/₅ | ¹⁴/₄₅ 7075600 | 1330 | 4 | 10636 | 8 175. We now return to (170), in which we compared two numbers together by their difference. This, however, is not the method of comparison which we employ in common life, as any single familiar instance will shew. For example, we say of A, who has 10 thousand pounds, that he is much richer than B, who has only 3 thousand; but we do not say that C, who has 107 thousand pounds, is much richer than D, who has 100 thousand, though the difference of fortune is the same in both cases, viz. 7 thousand pounds. In comparing numbers we take into our reckoning not only the differences, but the numbers themselves. Thus, if B and D both received 7 thousand pounds, B would receive 233 pounds and a third for every 100 pounds which he had before, while D for every 100 pounds would receive only 7 pounds. And though, in the view taken in (170), 3 is as near to 10 as 100 is to 107, yet, in the light in which we now regard them, 3 is not so near to 10 as 100 is to 107, for 3 differs from 10 by more than twice itself, while 100 does not differ from 107 by so much as one-fifth of itself. This is expressed in mathematical language by saying, that the _ratio_ or _proportion_ of 10 to 3 is greater than the _ratio_ or _proportion_ of 107 to 100. We proceed to define these terms more accurately. 176. When we use the term _part_ of a number or fraction in the remainder of this section, we mean, one of the various sets of _equal_ parts into which it may be divided, either the half, the third, the fourth, &c.: the term multiple has been already explained (102). By the term _multiple-part_ of a number we mean, the abbreviation of the words _multiple of a part_. Thus, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6, are parts of 12; ½ is also a part of 12, being contained in it 24 times; 12, 24, 36, &c., are multiples of 12; and 8, 9, ⁵/₂, &c. are multiple parts of 12, being multiples of some of its parts. And when multiple parts generally are spoken of, the parts themselves are supposed to be included, on the same principle that 12 is counted among the multiples of 12, the multiplier being 1. The multiples themselves are also included in this term; for 24 is also 48 halves, and is therefore among the multiple parts of 12. Each part is also in various ways a multiple-part; for one-fourth is two-eighths, and three-twelfths, &c. 177. Every number or fraction is a multiple-part of every other number or fraction. If, for example, we ask what part 12 is of 7, we see that on dividing 7 into 7 parts, and repeating one of these parts 12 times, we obtain 12; or, on dividing 7 into 14 parts, each of which is one-half, and repeating one of these parts 24 times, we obtain 24 halves, or 12. Hence, 12 is ¹²/₇, or ²⁴/₁₄, or ³⁶/₂₁ of 7; and so on. Generally, when _a_ and _b_ are two whole numbers, _a_/_b_ expresses the multiple-part which _a_ is of _b_, and _b_/_a_ that which _b_ is of _a_. Again, suppose it required to determine what multiple-part (2⅐) is of (3⅕), or ¹⁵/₇ of ¹⁶/₅. These fractions, reduced to a common denominator, are ⁷⁵/₃₅ and ¹¹²/₃₅, of which the second, divided into 112 parts, gives ¹/₃₅, which repeated 75 times gives ⁷⁵/₃₅, the first. Hence, the multiple-part which the first is of the second is ⁷⁵/₁₁₂, which being obtained by the rule given in (121), shews that _a_/_b_, or _a_ divided by _b_, according to the notion of division there given, expresses the multiple-part which _a_ is of _b_ in every case. 178. When the first of four numbers is the same multiple-part of the second which the third is of the fourth, the four are said to be _geometrically[27] proportional_, or simply _proportional_. This is a word in common use; and it remains to shew that our mathematical definition of it, just given, is, in fact, the common notion attached to it. For example, suppose a picture is copied on a smaller scale, so that a line of two inches long in the original is represented by a line of one inch and a half in the copy; we say that the copy is not correct unless all the parts of the original are reduced in the same proportion, namely, that of 2 to (1½). Since, on dividing two inches into 4 parts, and taking 3 of them, we get (1½), the same must be done with all the lines in the original, that is, the length of any line in the copy must be three parts out of four of its length in the original. Again, interest being at 5 per cent, that is, £5 being given for the use of £100, a similar proportion of every other sum would be given; the interest of £70, for example, would be just such a part of £70 as £5 is of £100. [27] The same remark may be made here as was made in the note on the term ‘arithmetical proportion,’ page 101. The word ‘geometrical’ is, generally speaking, dropped, except when we wish to distinguish between this kind of proportion and that which has been called arithmetical. Since, then, the part which _a_ is of _b_ is expressed by the fraction _a_/_b_, or any other fraction which is equivalent to it, and that which _c_ is of _d_ by _c_/_d_, it follows, that when _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_, are proportional, _a_/_b_ = _c_/_d_. This equation will be the foundation of all our reasoning on proportional quantities; and in considering proportionals, it is necessary to observe not only the quantities themselves, but also the order in which they come. Thus, _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_, being proportionals, that is, _a_ being the same multiple-part of _b_ which _c_ is of _d_, it does not follow that _a_, _d_, _b_, and _c_ are proportionals, that is, that _a_ is the same multiple-part of _d_ which _b_ is of _c_. It is plain that _a_ is greater than, equal to, or less than _b_, according as _c_ is greater than, equal to, or less than _d_. 179. Four numbers, _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_, being proportional in the order written, _a_ and _d_ are called the _extremes_, and _b_ and _c_ the _means_, of the proportion. For convenience, we will call the two extremes, or the two means, _similar_ terms, and an extreme and a mean, _dissimilar_ terms. Thus, _a_ and _d_ are similar, and so are _b_ and _c_; while _a_ and _b_, _a_ and _c_, _d_ and _b_, _d_ and _c_, are dissimilar. It is customary to express the proportion by placing dots between the numbers, thus: _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ 180. Equal numbers will still remain equal when they have been increased, diminished, multiplied, or divided, by equal quantities. This amounts to saying that if _a_ = _b_ and _p_ = _q_, _a_ + _p_ = _b_ + _q_, _a_ - _p_ = _b_ - _q_, _ap_ = _bq_, _a_ _b_ and --- = ---. _p_ _q_ It is also evident, that _a_ + _p_-_p_, _a_ -_p_ + _p_, _ap_/_p_, and _a_/_p_ × _p_, are all equal to _a_. 181. The product of the extremes is equal to the product of the means. Let _a_/_b_ = _c_/_d_, and multiply these equal numbers by the product _bd_. Then, _a_ _abd_ --- × _bd_ = ----- (116) = _ad_, _b_ _b_ _c_ _cbd_ and --- × _bd_ = ----- = _cb_: hence (180), _ad_ = _bc_. _d_ _d_ Thus, 6, 8, 21, and 28, are proportional, since 6 3 3 × 7 21 --- = --- = ------ = --- (180); 8 4 4 × 7 28 and it appears that 6 × 28 = 8 × 21, since both products are 168. 182. If the product of two numbers be equal to the product of two others, these numbers are proportional in any order whatever, provided the numbers in the same product are so placed as to be similar terms; that is, if _ab_ = _pq_, we have the following proportions:-- _a_ : _p_ ∷ _q_ : _b_ _a_ : _q_ ∷ _p_ : _b_ _b_ : _p_ ∷ _q_ : _a_ _b_ : _q_ ∷ _p_ : _a_ _p_ : _a_ ∷ _b_ : _q_ _p_ : _b_ ∷ _a_ : _q_ _q_ : _a_ ∷ _b_ : _p_ _q_ : _b_ ∷ _a_ : _p_ To prove any one of these, divide both _ab_ and _pq_ by the product of its second and fourth terms; for example, to shew the truth of _a_: _q_ ∷ _p_: _b_, divide both _ab_ and _pq_ by _bq_. Then, _ab_ _a_ _pq_ _p_ ---- = ---, and ---- = ---; hence (180), _bq_ _q_ _bq_ _b_ _a_ _p_ --- = ---, or _a_ : _q_ ∷ _p_ : _b_. _q_ _b_ The pupil should not fail to prove every one of the eight cases, and to verify them by some simple examples, such as 1 × 6 = 2 × 3, which gives 1: 2 ∷ 3: 6, 3: 1 ∷ 6: 2, &c. 183. Hence, if four numbers be proportional, they are also proportional in any other order, provided it be such that similar terms still remain similar. For since, when _a_ _c_ --- = ---, _b_ _d_ it follows (181) that _ad_ = _bc_, all the proportions which follow from _ad_ = _bc_, by the last article, follow also from _a_ _c_ --- = ---, _b_ _d_ 184. From (114) it follows that _a_ _b_ + _a_ 1 + --- = ---------, _b_ _b_ _a_ and if --- be less than 1, _b_ _a_ _b_ - _a_ 1 - --- = ---------, _b_ _b_ _a_ while if --- be greater than 1, _b_ _a_ _a_ - _b_ --- - 1 = ---------. _b_ _b_ _a_ + _b_ _a_ - _b_ Also (122), if --------- be divided by --------- _b_ _b_ _a_ + _b_ the result is ---------. _a_ - _b_ Hence, _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_, being proportionals, we may obtain other proportions, thus: _a_ _c_ Let --- = --- _b_ _d_ _a_ _c_ Then (114) 1 + --- = 1 + --- _b_ _d_ _a_ + _b_ _c_ + _d_ or --------- = --------- _b_ _d_ or _a_ + _b_: _b_ ∷ _c_ + _d_: _d_ That is, the sum of the first and second is to the second as the sum of the third and fourth is to the fourth. For brevity, we shall not state in words any more of these proportions, since the pupil will easily supply what is wanting. Resuming the proportion _a_: _b_ ∷ _c_: _d_ _a_ _c_ or --- = --- _b_ _d_ _a_ _c_ _a_ 1 - --- = 1 - ---, if --- be less than 1, _b_ _d_ _b_ _b_ - _a_ _d_ - _c_ or --------- = --------- _b_ _d_ that is, _b_-_a_: _b_ ∷ _d_-_c_: _d_ or, _a_-_b_: _b_ ∷ _c_-_d_: _d_, _a_ if --- be greater than 1. _b_ _a_ + _b_ _c_ + _d_ Again, since --------- = --------- _b_ _d_ _a_ - _b_ _c_ - _d_ _a_ and --------- = --------- (--- being greater than 1) _b_ _d_ _b_ _a_ + _b_ _c_ + _d_ dividing the first by the second we have --------- = ----------, _a_ - _b_ _c_ - _d_ or _a_ + _b_ : _a_ - _b_ ∷ _c_ + _d_ : _c_ - _d_ and also _a_ + _b_ : _b_ - _a_ ∷ _c_ + _d_ : _d_ - _c_, _a_ if --- be less than 1. _b_ 185. Many other proportions might be obtained in the same manner. We will, however, content ourselves with writing down a few which can be obtained by combining the preceding articles. _a_ + _b_ : _a_ ∷ _c_ + _d_ : _c_ _a_ : _a_ - _b_ ∷ _c_ : _c_ - _d_ _a_ + _c_ : _a_ - _c_ ∷ _b_ + _d_ : _b_ - _d_. In these and all others it must be observed, that when such expressions as _a_-_b_ and _c_-_d_ occur, it is supposed that _a_ is greater than _b_, and _c_ greater than _d_. 186. If four numbers be proportional, and any two dissimilar terms be both multiplied, or both divided by the same quantity, the results are proportional. Thus, if _a_: _b_ ∷ _c_: _d_, and _m_ and _n_ be any two numbers, we have also the following: _ma_ : _b_ ∷ _mc_ : _d_ _a_ : _mb_ ∷ _c_ : _md_ _a_ _c_ --- : _mb_ ∷ --- : _md_ _n_ _n_ _ma_ : _nb_ ∷ _mc_ : _nd_ _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ --- : --- ∷ --- : --- _m_ _m_ _m_ _m_ _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ --- : --- ∷ --- : --- _m_ _m_ _n_ _n_ and various others. To prove any one of these, recollect that nothing more is necessary to make four numbers proportional except that the product of the extremes should be equal to that of the means. Take the third of those just given; the product of its extremes is _a_ _mad_ --- × _md_, or -----, _n_ _n_ _c_ _mbc_ while that of the means is _mb_ × ---, or -----. _n_ _n_ But since _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_, by (181) _ad_ = _bc_, _mad_ _mbc_ whence, by (180), _mad_ = _mbc_, and ----- = -----. _n_ _n_ _a_ _c_ Hence, ---, _mb_, ---, and _md_, are proportionals. _n_ _n_ 187. If the terms of one proportion be multiplied by the terms of a second, the products are proportional; that is, if _a_: _b_ ∷ _c_: _d_, and _p_: _q_ ∷ _r_: _s_, it follows that _ap_: _bq_ ∷ _cr_: _ds_. For, since _ad_ = _bc_, and _ps_ = _qr_, by (180) _adps_ = _bcqr_, or _ap_ × _ds_ = _bq_ × _cr_, whence (182) _ap_: _bq_ ∷ _cr_: _ds_. 188. If four numbers be proportional, any similar powers of these numbers are also proportional; that is, if _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ Then _aa_ : _bb_ ∷ _cc_ : _dd_ _aaa_ : _bbb_ ∷ _ccc_ : _ddd_ &c. &c. For, if we write the proportion twice, thus, _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ by (187) _aa_ : _bb_ ∷ _cc_ : _dd_ But _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ Whence (187) _aaa_ : _bbb_ ∷ _ccc_ : _ddd_; and so on. 189. An expression is said to be homogeneous with respect to any two or more letters, for instance, _a_, _b_, and _c_, when every term of it contains the same number of letters, counting _a_, _b_, and _c_ only. Thus, _maab_ + _nabc_ + _rccc_ is homogeneous with respect to _a_, _b_, and _c_; and of the third degree, since in each term there is either _a_, _b_, and _c_, or one of these repeated alone, or with another, so as to make three in all. Thus, 8_aaabc_, 12_abccc_, _maaaaa_, _naabbc_, are all homogeneous, and of the fifth degree, with respect to _a_, _b_, and _c_ only; and any expression made by adding or subtracting these from one another, will be homogeneous and of the fifth degree. Again _ma_ + _mnb_ is homogeneous with respect to _a_ and _b_, and of the first degree; but it is not homogeneous with respect to _m_ and _n_, though it is so with respect to _a_ and _n_. This being premised, we proceed to a theorem,[28] which will contain all the results of (184), (185), and (188). [28] A theorem is a general mathematical fact: thus, that every number is divisible by four when its last two figures are divisible by four, is a theorem; that in every proportion the product of the extremes is equal to the product of the means, is another. 190. If any four numbers be proportional, and if from the first two, _a_ and _b_, any two homogeneous expressions of the same degree be formed; and if from the last two, two other expressions be formed, in precisely the same manner, the four results will be proportional. For example, if _a_: _b_ ∷ _c_: _d_, and if 2_aaa_ + 3_aab_ and _bbb_ + _abb_ be chosen, which are both homogeneous with respect to _a_ and _b_, and both of the third degree; and if the corresponding expressions 2_ccc_ + 3_ccd_ and _ddd_ + _cdd_ be formed, which are made from _c_ and _d_ precisely in the same manner as the two former ones from _a_ and _b_, then will 2_aaa_ + 3_aab_ : _bbb_ + _abb_ ∷ 2_ccc_ + 3_ccd_ : _ddd_ + _cdd_ _a_ To prove this, let --- be called _x_. _b_ _a_ _a_ _c_ Then, since --- = _x_, and --- = ---, _b_ _b_ _d_ _c_ it follows that --- = _x_. _d_ But since _a_ divided by _b_ gives _x_, _x_ multiplied by _b_ will give _a_, or _a_ = _bx_. For a similar reason, _c_ = _dx_. Put _bx_ and _dx_ instead of _a_ and _c_ in the four expressions just given, recollecting that when quantities are multiplied together, the result is the same in whatever order the multiplications are made; that, for example, _bxbxbx_ is the same as _bbbxxx_. Hence, 2_aaa_ + 3_aab_ = 2_bxbxbx_ + 3_bxbxb_ = 2_bbbxxx_ + 3_bbbxx_ which is _bbb_ multiplied by 2_xxx_ + 3_xx_ or _bbb_ (2_xxx_ + 3_xx_)[29] Similarly, 2_ccc_ + 3_ccd_ = _ddd_ (2_xxx_ + 3_xx_) Also, _bbb_ + _abb_ = _bbb_ + _bxbb_ = _bbb_ multiplied by 1 + _x_ or _bbb_(1 + _x_) Similarly, _ddd_ + _cdd_ = _ddd_ (1 + _x_) Now, _bbb_ : _bbb_ ∷ _ddd_ : _ddd_ [29] If _bx_ be substituted for _a_ in any expression which is homogeneous with respect to _a_ and _b_, the pupil may easily see that _b_ must occur in every term as often as there are units in the degree of the expression: thus, _aa_ + _ab_ becomes _bxbx_ + _bxb_ or _bb_(_xx_ + _x_); _aaa_ + _bbb_ becomes _bxbxbx_ + _bbb_ or _bbb_(_xxx_ + 1); and so on. Whence (186), _bbb_(2_xxx_ + 3_xx_): _bbb_(1 + _x_) ∷ _ddd_(2_xxx_ + 3_xx_): _ddd_(1 + _x_), which, when instead of these expressions their equals just found are substituted, becomes 2_aaa_ + 3_aab_: _bbb_ + _abb_ ∷ 2_ccc_ + 3_ccd_: _ddd_ + _cdd_. The same reasoning may be applied to any other case, and the pupil may in this way prove the following theorems: If _a_ : _b_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ 2_a_ + 3_b_ : _b_ ∷ 2_c_ + 3_d_ : _d_ _aa_ + _bb_ : _aa_ - _bb_ ∷ _cc_ + _dd_ : _cc_ - _dd_ _mab_ : 2_aa_ + _bb_ ∷ _mcd_ : 2_cc_ + _dd_ 191. If the two means of a proportion be the same, that is, if _a_ : _b_ ∷ _b_: _c_, the three numbers, _a_, _b_, and _c_, are said to be in _continued_ proportion, or in _geometrical progression_. The same terms are applied to a series of numbers, of which any three that follow one another are in continued proportion, such as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 &c. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 --- --- --- --- ---- ---- &c. 3 9 27 81 243 729 Which are in continued proportion, since 2 2 2 1 : 2 ∷ 2 : 4 2 : --- ∷ --- : --- 3 3 9 2 2 2 2 2 : 4 ∷ 4 : 8 --- : --- ∷ --- : --- 3 9 9 27 &c. &c. 192. Let _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, _e_ be in continued proportion; we have then _a_ _b_ _a_ : _b_ ∷ _b_ : _c_ or --- = --- or _ac_ = _bb_ _b_ _c_ _b_ _c_ _b_ : _c_ ∷ _c_ : _d_ --- = --- _bd_ = _cc_ _c_ _d_ _c_ _d_ _c_ : _d_ ∷ _d_ : _e_ --- = --- _ce_ = _dd_ _d_ _e_ Each term is formed from the preceding, by multiplying it by the same number. Thus, _b_ _c_ _b_ = --- × _a_ (180); _c_ = ---× _b_; _a_ _b_ _a_ _b_ _b_ _c_ _b_ and since --- = ---, --- = --- or _c_ = --- × _b_. _b_ _c_ _a_ _b_ _a_ _d_ _d_ _c_ _b_ Again, _d_ = --- × _c_, but --- = ---, which is = ---; _c_ _c_ _b_ _a_ _b_ therefore, _d_ = --- × _c_, and so on. _c_ _b_ If, then, --- _a_ (which is called the _common ratio_ of the series) be denoted by _r_, we have _b_ = _ar_ _c_ = _br_ = _arr_ _d_ = _cr_ = _arrr_ and so on; whence the series _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ &c. is _a_ _ar_ _arr_ _arrr_ &c. Hence _a_ : _c_ ∷ _a_ : _arr_ (186) ∷ _aa_ : _aarr_ ∷ _aa_ : _bb_ because, _b_ being _ar_, _bb_ is _arar_ or _aarr_. Again, _a_ : _d_ ∷ _a_ : _arrr_ (186) ∷ _aaa_ : _aaarrr_ ∷ _aaa_ : _bbb_ Also _a_ : _e_ ∷ _aaaa_ : _bbbb_, and so on; that is, the first bears to the _n_ᵗʰ term from the first the same proportion as the _n_ᵗʰ power of the first to the _n_ᵗʰ power of the second. 193. A short rule may be found for adding together any number of terms of a continued proportion. Let it be first required to add together the terms 1, _r_, _rr_, &c. where _r_ is greater than unity. It is evident that we do not alter any expression by adding or subtracting any numbers, provided we afterwards subtract or add the same. For example, _p_ = _p_-_q_ + _q_-_r_ + _r_- _s_ + _s_ Let us take four terms of the series, 1, _r_, _rr_, &c. or, 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ It is plain that _rrrr_-1 = _rrrr_-_rrr_ + _rrr_-_rr_ + _rr_-_r_ + _r_-1 Now (54), _rr_-_r_ = _r_(_r_-1), _rrr_ -_rr_ = _rr_(_r_-1), _rrrr_-_rrr_ = _rrr_(_r_-1), and the above equation becomes _rrrr_ -1 = _rrr_(_r_-1) + _rr_ (_r_-1) + _r_ (_r_-1) + _r_-1; which is (54) _rrr_ + _rr_ + _r_ + 1 taken _r_-1 times. Hence, _rrrr_-1 divided by _r_-1 will give 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_, the sum of the terms required. In this way may be proved the following series of equations: _rr_ - 1 1 + _r_ = -------- _r_ - 1 _rrr_ - 1 1 + _r_ + _rr_ = --------- _r_ - 1 _rrrr_ - 1 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ = ---------- _r_ - 1 _rrrrr_ - 1 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ + _rrrr_ = ----------- _r_ - 1 If _r_ be less than unity, in order to find 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_, observe that 1 - _rrrr_ = 1 - _r_ + _r_ - _rr_ + _rr_ - _rrr_ + _rrr_ - _rrrr_ = 1 - _r_ + _r_(1 - _r_) + _rr_(1 - _r_) + _rrr_(1 - _r_); whence, by similar reasoning, 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ is found by dividing 1-_rrrr_ by 1-_r_; and equations similar to these just given may be found, which are, 1 - _rr_ 1 + _r_ = -------- 1 - _r_ 1 - _rrr_ 1 + _r_ + _rr_ = --------- 1 - _r_ 1 - _rrrr_ 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ = ---------- 1 - _r_ 1 - _rrrrr_ 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ + _rrrr_ = ----------- 1 - _r_ The rule is: To find the sum of n terms of the series, 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + &c., divide the difference between 1 and the (_n_ + 1)ᵗʰ term by the difference between 1 and _r_. 194. This may be applied to finding the sum of any number of terms of a continued proportion. Let _a_, _b_, _c_, &c. be the terms of which it is required to sum four, that is, to find _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_, or (192) _a_ + _ar_ + _arr_ + _arrr_, or (54) a(1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_), which (193) is _rrrr_ - 1 1 - _rrrr_ ---------- × _a_, or ---------- × _a_, _r_ - 1 1 - _r_ according as _r_ is greater or less than unity. The first fraction is _arrrr_ - _a_ _e_ - _a_ -------------, or (192) ---------. _r_ - 1 _r_ - 1 _a_ - _e_ Similarly, the second is ---------. 1 - _r_ The rule, therefore, is: To sum _n_ terms of a continued proportion, divide the difference of the (_n_ + 1)ᵗʰ and first terms by the difference between unity and the common measure. For example, the sum of 10 terms of the series 1 + 3 + 9 + 27 + &c. is required. The eleventh term is 59049, and ⁽⁵⁹⁰⁴⁹ ⁻ ¹⁾/₍₃₋₁₎ is 29524. Again, the sum of 18 terms of the series 2 + 1 + ½ + ½ + &c. of which the nineteenth term is ¹/₁₃₁₀₇₂, is 1 2 - ------ 131072 131070 ----------- = 3 ------. 1 - ½ 131072 EXAMPLES. 9 terms of 1 + 4 + 16 + &c. are 87381 6 12 847422675 10 ...... 3 + --- + ---- + &c. ... --------- 7 49 201768035 1 1 1 1048575 20 ...... --- + --- + --- + &c. ... ------- 2 4 8 1048576 195. The powers of a number or fraction greater than unity increase; for since 2½ is greater than 1, 2½ × 2½ is 2½ taken more than once, that is, is greater than 2½, and so on. This increase goes on without limit; that is, there is no quantity so great but that some power of 2½ is greater. To prove this, observe that every power of 2½ is made by multiplying the preceding power by 2½, or by 1 + 1½, that is, by adding to the former power that power itself and its half. There will, therefore, be more added to the 10th power to form the 11th, than was added to the 9th power to form the 10th. But it is evident that if any given quantity, however small, be continually added to 2½, the result will come in time to exceed any other quantity that was also given, however great; much more, then, will it do so if the quantity added to 2½ be increased at each step, which is the case when the successive powers of 2½ are formed. It is evident, also, that the powers of 1 never increase, being always 1; thus, 1 × 1 = 1, &c. Also, if _a_ be greater than _m_ times _b_, the square of _a_ is greater than _mm_ times the square of _b_. Thus, if _a_ = 2_b_ + _c_, where _a_ is greater than 2_b_, the square of _a_, or _aa_, which is (68) 4_bb_ + 4_bc_ + _cc_ is greater than 4_bb_, and so on. 196. The powers of a fraction less than unity continually decrease; thus, the square of ⅖, or ⅖ × ⅖, is less than ⅖, being only two-fifths of it. This decrease continues without limit; that is, there is no quantity so small but that some power of ⅖ is less. For if 5 2 1 1 1 --- = _x_, --- = ---, and the powers of ⅖ are ----, -----, 2 5 _x_ _xx_ _xxx_ and so on. Since _x_ is greater than 1 (195), some power of _x_ may be found which shall be greater than a given quantity. Let this be called _m_; then 1/_m_ is the corresponding power of ⅖; and a fraction whose denominator can be made as great as we please, can itself be made as small as we please (112). 197. We have, then, in the series 1 _r_ _rr_ _rrr_ _rrrr_ &c. I. A series of increasing terms, if _r_ be greater than 1. II. Of terms having the same value, if _r_ be equal to 1. III. A series of decreasing terms, if _r_ be less than 1. In the first two cases, the sum 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ + &c. may evidently be made as great as we please, by sufficiently increasing the number of terms. But in the third this may or may not be the case; for though something is added at each step, yet, as that augmentation diminishes at every step, we may not certainly say that we can, by any number of such augmentations, make the result as great as we please. To shew the contrary in a simple instance, consider the series, 1 + ½ + ¼ + ⅛ + ¹/₁₆ + &c. Carry this series to what extent we may, it will always be necessary to add the last term in order to make as much as 2. Thus, (1 + ½ + ¼) + ¼ = 1 + ½ + ½ = 1 + 1 = 2 (1 + ½ + ¼ + ⅛) + ⅛ = 2. (1 + ½ + ¼ + ⅛ + ¹/₁₆) + ¹/₁₆ = 2, &c. But in the series, every term is only the half of the preceding; consequently no number of terms, however great, can be made as great as 2 by adding one more. The sum, therefore, of 1, ½, ¼, ⅛ &c. continually approaches to 2, diminishing its distance from 2 at every step, but never reaching it. Hence, 2 is celled the _limit_ of 1 + ½ + ¼ + &c. We are not, therefore, to conclude that _every_ series of decreasing terms has a limit. The contrary may be shewn in the very simple series, 1 + ½ + ⅓ + ¼ + &c. which may be written thus: 1 + ½ + (⅓ + ¼) + (⅕ + ... up to ⅛) + (⅑ + ... up to ¹/₁₆) + (¹/₁₇ + ... up to ¹/₃₂) + &c. We have thus divided all the series, except the first two terms, into lots, each containing half as many terms as there are units in the denominator of its last term. Thus, the fourth lot contains 16 or ³²/₂2 terms. Each of these lots may be shewn to be greater than ½. Take the third, for example, consisting of ⅑, ¹/₁₀, ¹/₁₁, ¹/₁₂, ¹/₁₃, ¹/₁₄, ¹/₁₅, and ¹/₁₆. All except ¹/₁₆, the last, are greater than ¹/₁₆; consequently, by substituting ¹/₁₆ for each of them, the amount of the whole lot would be lessened; and as it would then become ⁸/₁₆, or ½, the lot itself is greater than ½. Now, if to 1 + ½, ½ be continually added, the result will in time exceed any given number. Still more will this be the case if, instead of ½, the several lots written above be added one after the other. But it is thus that the series 1 + ½ + ⅓, &c. is composed, which proves what was said, that this series has no limit. 198. The series 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + _rrr_ + &c. always has a limit when _r_ is less than 1. To prove this, let the term succeeding that at which we stop be _a_, whence (194) the sum is 1 - _a_ 1 _a_ -------, or (112) ------- - ------. 1 - _r_ 1 - _r_ 1 - _r_ The terms decrease without limit (196), whence we may take a term so far distant from the beginning, that _a_, and therefore _a_ -------, 1 - _r_ shall be as small as we please. But it is evident that in this case 1 _a_ ------- - ------- though always less than 1 - _r_ 1 - _r_ 1 1 -------- may be brought as near to ------- 1 - _r_ 1 - _r_ as we please; that is, the series 1 + _r_ + _rr_ + &c. continually approaches to the limit 1 --------. 1 - _r_ Thus 1 + ½ + ¼ + ⅛ + &c. where _r_ = ½, continually approaches to 1 ----- or 2, as was shewn in the last article. 1 - ½ EXERCISES. 2 2 The limit of 2 + --- + --- + &c. 3 9 1 1 or 2(1 + --- + --- + &c.) is 3 3 9 9 81 ... 1 + --- + ---- + &c. ... 10 10 100 15 45 ... 5 + ---- + ---- + &c. ... 8¾ 7 49 199. When the fraction _a_/_b_ is not equal to _c_/_d_, but greater, _a_ is said to have to _b_ a greater ratio than _c_ has to _d_; and when _a_/_b_ is less than _c_/_d_, _a_ is said to have to _b_ a less ratio than _c_ has to _d_. We propose the following questions as exercises, since they follow very simply from this definition. I. If _a_ be greater than _b_, and _c_ less than or equal to _d_, _a_ will have a greater ratio to _b_ than _c_ has to _d_. II. If _a_ be less than _b_, and _c_ greater than or equal to _d_, _a_ has a less ratio to _b_ than _c_ has to _d_. III. If _a_ be to _b_ as _c_ is to _d_, and if _a_ have a greater ratio to _b_ than _c_ has to _x_, _d_ is less than _x_; and if _a_ have a less ratio to _b_ than _c_ to _x_, _d_ is greater than _x_. IV. _a_ has to _b_ a greater ratio than _ax_ to _bx_ + _y_, and a less ratio than _ax_ to _bx_- _y_. 200. If _a_ have to _b_ a greater ratio than _c_ has to _d_, _a_ + _c_ has to _b_ + _d_ a less ratio than _a_ has to _b_, but a greater ratio than _c_ has to _d_; or, in other words, if _a_/_b_ be the greater of the two fractions _a_/_b_ and _c_/_d_, _a_ + _c_ --------- _b_ + _d_ will be greater than _c_/_d_, but less than _a_/_b_. To shew this, observe that (_mx_ + _ny_)/(_m_ + _n_) must lie between _x_ and _y_, if _x_ and _y_ be unequal: for if _x_ be the less of the two, it is certainly greater than _mx_ + _nx_ ----------- or than _x_; _m_ + _n_ and if _y_ be the greater of the two, it is certainly less than _my_ + _ny_ -----------, or than _y_. _m_ + _n_ It therefore lies between _x_ and _y_. Now let _a_/_b_ be _x_, and let _c_/_d_ be _y_: then _a_ = _bx_, _c_ = _dy_. Now _bx_ + _dy_ ----------- _b_ + _d_ is something between _x_ and _y_, as was just proved; therefore _a_ + _c_ --------- _b_ + _d_ is something between _a_/_b_ and _c_/_d_. Again, since _a_/_b_ and _c_/_d_ are respectively equal to _ap_/_bp_ and _cq_/_dq_, and since, as has just been proved, _ap_ + _cq_ ----------- _bp_ + _dq_ lies between the two last, it also lies between the two first; that is, if _p_ and _q_ be any numbers or fractions whatsoever, _ap_ + _cq_ ----------- _bp_ + _dq_ lies between _a_/_b_ and _c_/_d_. 201. By the last article we may often form some notion of the value of an expression too complicated to be easily calculated. Thus, 1 + _x_ 1 _x_ 1 -------- lies between --- and ----, or 1 and ---; 1 + _xx_ 1 _xx_ _x_ _ax_ + _by_ _ax_ _by_ -------------- lies between ----- and ------, _axx_ + _bbyy_ _axx_ _bbyy_ that is, between 1/_x_ and 1/_by_. And it has been shewn that (_a_ + _b_)/2 lies between _a_ and _b_, the denominator being considered as 1 + 1. 202. It may also be proved that a fraction such as _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_ --------------------- _p_ + _q_ + _r_ + _s_ _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ always lies among ---, ---, ---, and ---, _p_ _q_ _r_ _s_ that is, is less than the greatest of them, and greater than the least. Let these fractions be arranged in order of magnitude; that is, let _a_/_p_ be greater than _b_/_q_, _b_/_q_ be greater than _c_/_r_, and _c_/_r_ greater than _d_/_s_. Then by (200) is and less greater _a_ + _b_ _a_ than than _b_ _c_ --------- --- --- and --- _p_ + _q_ _p_ _q_ _r_ _a_ + _b_ + _c_ _a_ + _b_ _a_ _c_ _d_ --------------- --------- and --- --- and --- _p_ + _q_ + _r_ _p_ + _q_ _p_ _r_ _s_ _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_ _a_ + _b_ + _c_ _a_ _d_ --------------------- --------------- and --- --- _p_ + _q_ + _r_ + _s_ _p_ + _q_ + _r_ _p_ _s_ whence the proposition is evident. 203. It is usual to signify “_a_ is greater than _b_” by _a_ > _b_ and “_a_ is less than _b_” by _a_ < _b_; the opening of V being turned towards the greater quantity. The pupil is recommended to make himself familiar with these signs. SECTION IX. ON PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS. 204. If a number of counters, distinguished by different letters, be placed on the table, and any number of them, say four, be taken away, the question is, to determine in how many different ways this can be done. Each way of doing it gives what is called a _combination_ of four, but which might with more propriety be called a _selection_ of four. Two combinations or selections are called different, which differ in any way whatever; thus, _abcd_ and _abce_ are different, _d_ being in one and _e_ in the other, the remaining parts being the same. Let there be six counters, _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, _e_, and _f_; the combinations of three which can be made out of them are twenty in number, as follow: _abc_ _ace_ _bcd_ _bef_ _abd_ _acf_ _bce_ _cde_ _abe_ _ade_ _bcf_ _cdf_ _abf_ _adf_ _bde_ _cef_ _acd_ _aef_ _bdf_ _def_ The combinations of four are fifteen in number, namely, _abcd_ _abde_ _acde_ _adef_ _bcef_ _abce_ _abdf_ _acdf_ _bcde_ _bdcf_ _abcf_ _abef_ _acef_ _bcdf_ _cdef_ and so on. 205. Each of these combinations may be written in several different orders; thus, _abcd_ may be disposed in any of the following ways: _abcd_ _acbd_ _acdb_ _abdc_ _adbc_ _adcb_ _bacd_ _cabd_ _cadb_ _badc_ _dabc_ _dacb_ _bcad_ _cbad_ _cdab_ _bdac_ _dbac_ _dcab_ _bcda_ _cbda_ _cdba_ _bdca_ _dbca_ _dcba_ of which no two are entirely in the same order. Each of these is said to be a distinct _permutation_ of _abcd_. Considered as a _combination_, they are all the same, as each contains _a_, _b_, _c_, and _d_. 206. We now proceed to find how many _permutations_, each containing one given number, can be made from the counters in another given number, six, for example. If we knew how to find all the permutations containing four counters, we might make those which contain five thus: Take any one which contains four, for example, _abcf_ in which _d_ and _e_ are omitted; write _d_ and _e_ successively at the end, which gives _abcfd_, _abcfe_, and repeat the same process with every other permutation of four; thus, _dabc_ gives _dabce_ and _dabcf_. No permutation of five can escape us if we proceed in this manner, provided only we know those of four; for any given permutation of five, as _dbfea_, will arise in the course of the process from _dbfe_, which, according to our rule, furnishes _dbfea_. Neither will any permutation be repeated twice, for _dbfea_, if the rule be followed, can only arise from the permutation _dbfe_. If we begin in this way to find the permutations of two out of the six, _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ _e_ _f_ each of these gives five; thus, _a_ gives _ab_ _ac_ _ad_ _ae_ _af_ _b_ ... _ba_ _bc_ _bd_ _be_ _bf_ and the whole number is 6 × 5, or 30. Again, _ab_ gives _abc_ _abd_ _abe_ _abf_ _ac_ ... _acb_ _acd_ _ace_ _acf_ and here are 30, or 6 × 5 permutations of 2, each of which gives 4 permutations of 3; the whole number of the last is therefore 6 × 5 × 4, or 120. Again, _abc_ gives _abcd_ _abce_ _abcf_ _abd_ ... _abdc_ _abde_ _abdf_ and here are 120, or 6 × 5 × 4, permutations of three, each of which gives 3 permutations of four; the whole number of the last is therefore 6 × 5 × 4 × 3, or 360. In the same way, the number of permutations of 5 is 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2, and the number of permutations of six, or the number of different ways in which the whole six can be arranged, is 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1. The last two results are the same, which must be; for since a permutation of five only omits one, it can only furnish one permutation of six. If instead of six we choose any other number, _x_, the number of permutations of two will be _x_(_x_-1), that of three will be _x_(_x_-1)(_x_-2), that of four _x_(_x_ -1)(_x_-2)(_x_-3), the rule being: Multiply the whole number of counters by the next less number, and the result by the next less, and so on, until as many numbers have been multiplied together as there are to be counters in each permutation: the product will be the whole number of permutations of the sort required. Thus, out of 12 counters, permutations of four may be made to the number of 12 × 11 × 10 × 9, or 11880. EXERCISES. 207. In how many different ways can eight persons be arranged on eight seats? _Answer_, 40320. In how many ways can eight persons be seated at a round table, so that all shall not have the same neighbours in any two arrangements?[30] _Answer_, 5040. [30] The difference between this problem and the last is left to the ingenuity of the pupil. If the hundredth part of a farthing be given for every different arrangement which can be made of fifteen persons, to how much will the whole amount? _Answer_, £13621608. Out of seventeen consonants and five vowels, how many words can be made, having two consonants and one vowel in each? _Answer_, 4080. 208. If two or more of the counters have the same letter upon them, the number of distinct permutations is less than that given by the last rule. Let there be _a_, _a_, _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, and, for a moment, let us distinguish between the three as thus, _a_, _a′_, _a″_. Then, _abca′a″d_, and _a″bcaa′d_ are reckoned as distinct permutations in the rule, whereas they would not have been so, had it not been for the accents. To compute the number of distinct permutations, let us make one with _b_, _c_, and _d_, leaving places for the _a_s, thus, ( ) _bc_ ( ) ( ) _d_. If the _a_s had been distinguished as _a_, _a′_, _a″_, we might have made 3 × 2 × 1 distinct permutations, by filling up the vacant places in the above, all which six are the same when the _a_s are not distinguished. Hence, to deduce the number of permutations of _a_, _a_, _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, from that of _aa′a″bcd_, we must divide the latter by 3 × 2 × 1, or 6, which gives 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 --------------------- or 120. 3 × 2 × 1 Similarly, the number of permutations of _aaaabbbcc_ is 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 --------------------------------- 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 × 3 × 2 × 1 × 2 × 1. EXERCISE. How many variations can be made of the order of the letters in the word antitrinitarian? _Answer_, 126126000. 209. From the number of permutations we can easily deduce the number of combinations. But, in order to form these combinations independently, we will shew a method similar to that in (206). If we know the combinations of two which can be made out of _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, _e_, we can find the combinations of three, by writing successively at the end of each combination of two, the letters which come after the last contained in it. Thus, _ab_ gives _abc_, _abd_, _abe_; _ad_ gives _ade_ only. No combination of three can escape us if we proceed in this manner, provided only we know the combinations of two; for any given combination of three, as _acd_, will arise in the course of the process from _ac_, which, according to our rule, furnishes _acd_. Neither will any combination be repeated twice, for _acd_, if the rule be followed, can only arise from _ac_, since neither _ad_ nor _cd_ furnishes it. If we begin in this way to find the combinations of the five, _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ _e_ _a_ gives _ab_ _ac_ _ad_ _ae_ _b_ ···· _bc_ _bd_ _be_ _c_ ···· _cd_ _ce_ _d_ ···· _de_ Of these, _ab_ gives _abc_ _abd_ _abe_ _ac_ ···· _acd_ _ace_ _ad_ ···· _ade_ _bc_ ···· _bcd_ _bce_ _bd_ ···· _bde_ _cd_ ···· _cde_ _ae_ _be_ _ce_ and _de_ give none. Of these, _abc_ gives _abcd_ _abce_ _abd_ ···· _abde_ _acd_ ···· _acde_ _bcd_ ···· _bcde_ Those which contain _e_ give none, as before. Of the last, _abcd_ gives _abcde_, and the others none, which is evidently true, since only one selection of five can be made out of five things. 210. The rule for calculating the number of combinations is derived directly from that for the number of permutations. Take 7 counters; then, since the number of permutations of two is 7 × 6, and since two permutations, _ba_ and _ab_, are in any combination _ab_, the number of combinations is half that of the permutations, or (7 × 6)/2. Since the number of permutations of three is 7 × 6 × 5, and as each combination _abc_ has 3 × 2 × 1 permutations, the number of combinations of three is 7 × 6 × 5 ----------. 1 × 2 × 3 Also, since any combination of four, _abcd_, contains 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 permutations, the number of combinations of four is 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 -------------, 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 and so on. The rule is: To find the number of combinations, each containing _n_ counters, divide the corresponding number of permutations by the product of 1, 2, 3, &c. up to _n_. If _x_ be the whole number, the number of combinations of two is _x_(_x_ - 1) -------------; 1 × 2 that of three is _x_(_x_ - 1)(_x_ - 2) ---------------------; 1 × 2 × 3 that of four is _x_(_x_ - 1)(_x_ - 2)(_x_ - 3) ------------------------------; and so on. 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 211. The rule may in half the cases be simplified, as follows. Out of ten counters, for every distinct selection of seven which is taken, a distinct combination of 3 is left. Hence, the number of combinations of seven is as many as that of three. We may, therefore, find the combinations of three instead of those of seven; and we must moreover expect, and may even assert, that the two formulæ for finding these two numbers of combinations are the same in result, though different in form. And so it proves; for the number of combinations of seven out of ten is 10 × 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 --------------------------, 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 × 7 in which the product 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 occurs in both terms, and therefore may be removed from both (108), leaving 10 × 9 × 8 ----------, 1 × 2 × 3 which is the number of combinations of three out of ten. The same may be shewn in other cases. EXERCISES. How many combinations of four can be made out of twelve things? _Answer_, 495. What number { 6 } { 8 } { 28 of combinations { 4 } out of { 11 } _Answer_, { 330 can be made of { 26 } { 28 } { 378 { 6 } { 15 } { 5005 How many combinations can be made of 13 out of 52; or how many different hands may a person hold at the game of whist? _Answer_, 635013559600. BOOK II. COMMERCIAL ARITHMETIC. SECTION I. WEIGHTS, MEASURES, &C. 212. In making the calculations which are necessary in commercial affairs, no more processes are required than those which have been explained in the preceding book. But there is still one thing wanted--not to insure the accuracy of our calculations, but to enable us to compare and judge of their results. We have hitherto made use of a single unit (15), and have treated of other quantities which are made up of a number of units, in Sections II., III., and IV., and of those which contain parts of that unit in Sections V. and VI. Thus, if we are talking of distances, and take a mile as the unit, any other length may be represented,[31] either by a certain number of miles, or a certain number of parts of a mile, and (1 meaning one mile) may be expressed either by a whole number or a fraction. But we can easily see that in many cases inconveniences would arise. Suppose, for example, I say, that the length of one room is ¹/₁₈₀ of a mile, and of another ¹/₁₇₄ of a mile, what idea can we form as to how much the second is longer than the first? It is necessary to have some smaller measure; and if we divide a mile into 1760 equal parts, and call each of these parts a yard, we shall find that the length of the first room is 9 yards and ⁷/₉ of a yard, and that of the second 10 yards and ¹⁰/₈₇ of a yard. From this we form a much better notion of these different lengths, but still not a very perfect one, on account of the fractions ⁷/₉ and ¹⁰/₈₇. To get a clearer idea of these, suppose the yard to be divided into three equal parts, and each of these parts to be called a foot; then ⁷/₉ of a yard contains 2⅓ feet, and ¹⁰/₈₇ of a yard contains ³⁰/₈₇ of a foot, or a little more than ⅓ of a foot. Therefore the length of the first room is now 9 yards, 2 feet, and ⅓ of a foot; that of the second is 10 yards and a little more than ⅓ of a foot. We see, then, the convenience of having large measures for large quantities, and smaller measures for small ones; but this is done for convenience only, for it is _possible_ to perform calculations upon any sort of quantity, with one measure alone, as certainly as with more than one; and not only possible, but more convenient, as far as the mere calculation is concerned. [31] It is not true, that if we choose any quantity as a unit, _any_ other quantity of the same kind can be exactly represented either by a certain number of units, or of parts of a unit. To understand how this is proved, the pupil would require more knowledge than he can be supposed to have; but we can shew him that, for any thing he knows to the contrary, there may be quantities which are neither units nor parts of the unit. Take a mathematical line of one foot in length, divide it into ten parts, each of those parts into ten parts, and so on continually. If a point A be taken at hazard in the line, it does not appear self-evident that if the decimal division be continued ever so far, one of the points of division must at last fall exactly on A: neither would the same appear necessarily true if the division were made into sevenths, or elevenths, or in any other way. There may then possibly be a part of a foot which is no exact numerical fraction whatever of the foot; and this, in a higher branch of mathematics, is found to be the case times without number. What is meant in the words on which this note is written, is, that any part of a foot can be represented as nearly as we please by a numerical fraction of it; and this is sufficient for practical purposes. The measures which are used in this country are not those which would have been chosen had they been made all at one time, and by a people well acquainted with arithmetic and natural philosophy. We proceed to shew how the results of the latter science are made useful in our system of measures. Whether the circumstances introduced are sufficiently well known to render the following methods exact enough for the recovery of _astronomical_ standards, may be matter of opinion; but no doubt can be entertained of their being amply correct for commercial purposes. It is evidently desirable that weights and measures should always continue the same, and that posterity should be able to replace any one of them when the original measure is lost. It is true that a yard, which is now exact, is kept by the public authorities; but if this were burnt by accident,[32] how are those who shall live 500 years hence to know what was the length which their ancestors called a yard? To ensure them this knowledge, the measure must be derived from something which cannot be altered by man, either from design or accident. We find such a quantity in the time of the daily revolution of the earth, and also in the length of the year, both of which, as is shewn in astronomy, will remain the same, at least for an enormous number of centuries, unless some great and totally unknown change take place in the solar system. So long as astronomy is cultivated, it is impossible to suppose that either of these will be lost, and it is known that the latter is 365·24224 mean solar days, or about 365¼ of the average interval which elapses between noon and noon, that is, between the times when the sun is highest in the heavens. Our year is made to consist of 365 days, and the odd quarter is allowed for by adding one day to every fourth year, which gives what we call leap-year. This is the same as adding ¼ of a day to each year, and is rather too much, since the excess of the year above 365 days is not ·25 but ·24224 of a day. The difference is ·00776 of a day, which is the quantity by which our average year is too long. This amounts to a day in about 128 years, or to about 3 days in 4 centuries. The error is corrected by allowing only one out of four of the years which close the centuries to be leap-years. Thus, A.D. 1800 and 1900 are not leap-years, but 2000 is so. [32] Since this was first written, the accident has happened. The _standard yard_ was so injured as to be rendered useless by the fire at the Houses of Parliament. 213. The day is therefore the first measure obtained, and is divided into 24 parts or hours, each of which is divided into 60 parts or minutes, and each of these again into 60 parts or seconds. One second, marked thus, 1″,[33] is therefore the 86400ᵗʰ part of a day, and the following is the MEASURE OF TIME.[34] 60 _seconds_ are 1 _minute_ 1 m. 60 _minutes_ ” 1 _hour_ 1 h. 24 _hours_ ” 1 _day_ 1 d. 7 _days_ ” 1 _week_ 1 wk. 365 _days_ ” 1 _year_ 1 yr. 214. The _second_ having been obtained, a pendulum can be constructed which shall, when put in motion, perform one vibration in exactly one second, in the latitude of Greenwich.[35] If we were inventing measures, it would be convenient to call the length of this pendulum a yard, and make it the standard of all our measures of length. But as there is a yard already established, it will do equally well to tell the length of the pendulum in yards. It was found by commissioners appointed for the purpose, that this pendulum in London was 39·1393 inches, or about one yard, three inches, and ⁵/₃₆ of an inch. The following is the division of the yard. MEASURES OF LENGTH. The lowest measure is a barleycorn.[36] 3 _barleycorns_ are 1 _inch_ 1 in. 12 _inches_ 1 _foot_ 1 ft. 3 _feet_ 1 _yard_ 1 yd. 5½ _yards_ 1 _pole_ 1 po. 40 _poles_ or 220 _yards_ 1 _furlong_ 1 fur. 8 _furlongs_ or 1760 _yards_ 1 _mile_ 1 mi. Also 6 _feet_ 1 _fathom_ 1 fth. 69⅓ _miles_ 1 _degree_ 1 deg. or 1°. [33] The minute and second are often marked thus, 1′, 1″: but this notation is now almost entirely appropriated to the minute and second of _angular_ measure. [34] The measures in italics are those which it is most necessary that the student should learn by heart. [35] The lengths of the pendulums which will vibrate in one second are slightly different in different latitudes. Greenwich is chosen as the station of the Royal Observatory. We may add, that much doubt is now entertained as to the system of standards derived from nature being capable of that extreme accuracy which was once attributed to it. [36] The inch is said to have been originally obtained by putting together three grains of barley. A geographical mile is ¹/₆₀th of a degree, and three such miles are one nautical league. In the measurement of cloth or linen the following are also used: 2¼ inches are 1 nail 1 nl. 4 nails 1 quarter (of a yard) 1 qr. 3 quarters 1 Flemish ell 1 Fl. e. 5 quarters 1 English ell 1 E. e. 6 quarters 1 French ell 1 Fr. e. 215. MEASURES OF SURFACE, OR SUPERFICIES. All surfaces are measured by square inches, square feet, &c.; the square inch being a square whose side is an inch in length, and so on. The following measures may be deduced from the last, as will afterwards appear. 144 square inches are 1 square foot 1 sq. ft. 9 square feet 1 square yard 1 sq. yd. 30¼ square yards 1 square pole 1 sq. p. 40 square poles 1 rood 1 rd. 4 roods 1 acre 1 ac. Thus, the acre contains 4840 square yards, which is ten times a square of 22 yards in length and breadth. This 22 yards is the length which land-surveyors’ chains are made to have, and the chain is divided into 100 links, each ·22 of a yard or 7·92 inches. An acre is then 10 square chains. It may also be noticed that a square whose side is 69⁴/₇ yards is nearly an acre, not exceeding it by ⅕ of a square foot. 216. MEASURES OF SOLIDITY OR CAPACITY.[37] Cubes are solids having the figure of dice. A cubic inch is a cube each of whose sides is an inch, and so on. 1728 cubic inches are 1 cubic foot 1 c. ft. 27 cubic feet 1 cubic yard 1 c. yd. [37] ‘Capacity’ is a term which cannot be better explained than by its use. When one measure holds more than another, it is said to be more capacious, or to have a greater capacity. This measure is not much used, except in purely mathematical questions. In the measurements of different commodities various measures were used, which are now reduced, by act of parliament, to one. This is commonly called the imperial measure, and is as follows: MEASURE OF LIQUIDS AND OF ALL DRY GOODS. 4 _gills_ are 1 _pint_ 1 pt. 2 _pints_ 1 _quart_ 1 qt. 4 _quarts_ 1 _gallon_ 1 gall. 2 _gallons_ 1 _peck_[38] 1 pk. 4 _pecks_ 1 _bushel_ 1 bu. 8 _bushels_ 1 _quarter_ 1 qr. 5 _quarters_ 1 _load_ 1 ld. The gallon in this measure is about 277·274 cubic inches; that is, very nearly 277¼ cubic inches.[39] 217. The smallest weight in use is the grain, which is thus determined. A vessel whose interior is a cubic inch, when filled with water,[40] has its weight increased by 252·458 grains. Of the grains so determined, 7000 are a pound _averdupois_, and 5760 a pound _troy_. The first pound is always used, except in weighing precious metals and stones, and also medicines. It is divided as follows: [38] This measure, and those which follow, are used for dry goods only. [39] Since the publication of the third edition, the _heaped_ measure, which was part of the new system, has been abolished. The following paragraph from the third edition will serve for reference to it: “The other imperial measure is applied to goods which it is customary to sell by _heaped measure_, and is as follows: 2 gallons 1 peck 4 pecks 1 bushel 3 bushels 1 sack 12 sacks 1 chaldron. The gallon and bushel in this measure hold the same when only just filled, as in the last. The bushel, however, heaped up as directed by the act of parliament, is a little more than one-fourth greater than before.” [40] Pure water, cleared from foreign substances by distillation, at a temperature of 62° Fahr. AVERDUPOIS WEIGHT. 27¹¹/₃₂ _grains_ are 1 _dram_ 1 dr. 6 _drams_, or _drachms_ 1 _ounce_[41] 1 oz. 16 _ounces_ 1 _pound_ 1 lb. 28 _pounds_ 1 _quarter_ 1 qr. 4 _quarters_ 1 _hundred-weight_ 1 cwt. 20 _hundred-weight_ 1 _ton_ 1 ton. [41] It is more common to divide the ounce into four quarters than into sixteen drams. The pound averdupois contains 7000 grains. A cubic foot of water weighs 62·3210606 pounds averdupois, or 997·1369691 ounces. For the precious metals and for medicines, the pound troy, containing 5760 grains, is used, but is differently divided in the two cases. The measures are as follow: TROY WEIGHT. 24 _grains_ are 1 _pennyweight_ 1 dwt. 20 _pennyweights_ 1 _ounce_ 1 oz. 12 _ounces_ 1 _pound_ 1 lb. The pound troy contains 5760 grains. A cubic foot of water weighs 75·7374 pounds troy, or 908·8488 ounces. APOTHECARIES’ WEIGHT. 20 _grains_ are 1 _scruple_ ℈ 3 _scruples_ 1 _dram_ ʒ 8 _drams_ 1 _ounce_ ℥ 12 _ounces_ 1 _pound_ lb 218. The standard coins of copper, silver, and gold, are,--the penny, which is 10⅔ drams of copper; the shilling, which weighs 3 pennyweights 15 grains, of which 3 parts out of 40 are alloy, and the rest pure silver; and the sovereign, weighing 5 pennyweights and 3¼ grains, of which 1 part out of 12 is copper, and the rest pure gold. MEASURES OF MONEY. The lowest coin is a farthing, which is marked thus, ¼, being one fourth of a penny. 2 _farthings_ are 1 _halfpenny_ ½_d_. 2 _halfpence_ 1 _penny_ 1_d_. 12 _pence_ 1 _shilling_ 1_s_. 20 _shillings_ 1 _pound_[42] or _sovereign_ £1 21 _shillings_ 1 _guinea_.[43] 219. When any quantity is made up of several others, expressed in different units, such as £1. 14. 6, or 2cwt. 1qr. 3lbs., it is called a _compound quantity_. From these tables it is evident that any compound quantity of any substance can be measured in several different ways. For example, the sum of money which we call five pounds four shillings is also 104 shillings, or 1248 pence, or 4992 farthings. It is easy to reduce any quantity from one of these measurements to another; and the following examples will be sufficient to shew how to apply the same process, usually called REDUCTION, to all sorts of quantities. I. How many farthings are there in £18. 12. 6¾?[44] [42] The English pound is generally called a _pound sterling_, which distinguishes it from the weight called a pound, and also from foreign coins. [43] The coin called a guinea is now no longer in use, but the name is still given, from custom, to 21 shillings. The pound, which was not a coin, but a note promising to pay 20 shillings to the bearer, is also disused for the present, and the sovereign supplies its place; but the name pound is still given to 20 shillings. [44] Farthings are never written but as parts of a penny. Thus, three farthings being 3/4 of a penny, is written 3/4, or ¾. One halfpenny may be written either as 2/4 or ½; the latter is most common. Since there are 20 shillings in a pound, there are, in £18, 18 × 20, or 360 shillings; therefore, £18. 12 is 360 + 12, or 372 shillings. Since there are 12 pence in a shilling, in 372 shillings there are 372 × 12, or 4464 pence; and, therefore, in £18. 12. 6 there are 4464 + 6, or 4470 pence. Since there are 4 farthings in a penny, in 4470 pence there are 4470 × 4, or 17880 farthings; and, therefore, in £18. 12. 6¾ there are 17880 + 3, or 17883 farthings. The whole of this process may be written as follows: £18 . 12 . 6¾ 20 -------- 360 + 12 = 372 12 ----- 4464 + 6 = 4470 4 ----- 17880 + 3 = 17883 II. In 17883 farthings, how many pounds, shillings, pence, and farthings are there? Since 17883, divided by 4, gives the quotient 4470, and the remainder 3, 17883 farthings are 4470 pence and 3 farthings (218). Since 4470, divided by 12, gives the quotient 372, and the remainder 6, 4470 pence is 372 shillings and 6 pence. Since 372, divided by 20, gives the quotient 18, and the remainder 12, 372 shillings is 18 pounds and 12 shillings. Therefore, 17883 farthings is 4470¾_d_., which is 372s. 6¾_d_., which is £18. 12. 6¾. The process may be written as follows: 4)17883 ----- 12)4470 ... 3 ---- 20)372 ... 6 £18 . 12 . 6¾ EXERCISES. A has £100. 4. 11½, and B has 64392 farthings. If A receive 1492 farthings, and B £1. 2. 3½, which will then have the most, and by how much?--_Answer_, A will have £33. 12. 3 more than B. In the following table the quantities written opposite to each other are the same: each line furnishes two exercises. £15 . 18 . 9½ | 15302 farthings. 115ˡᵇˢ 1ᵒᶻ 8ᵈᵚᵗ | 663072 grains. 3ˡᵇˢ 14ᵒᶻ 9ᵈʳ | 1001 drams. 3ᵐ 149 yds 2ᶠᵗ 9 in | 195477 inches. 19ᵇᵘ 2ᵖᵏˢ 1 gall 2 qᵗˢ | 1260 pints. 16 ʰ 23ᵐ 47ˢ | 59027 seconds. 220. The same may be done where the number first expressed is fractional. For example, how many shillings and pence are there in ⁴/₁₅ of a pound? Now, ⁴/₁₅ of a pound is ⁴/₁₅ of 20 shillings; ⁴/₁₅ of 20 is 4 × 20 4 × 4 16 ------, or ----- (110), or ---, 15 3 3 or (105) 5⅓ of a shilling. Again, ⅓ of a shilling is ⅓ of 12 pence, or 4 pence. Therefore, £⁴/₁₅ = 5_s._ 4_d._ Also, ·23 of a day is ·23 × 24 in hours, or 5ʰ·52; and ·52 of an hour is ·52 × 60 in minutes, or 3ᵐ·2; and ·2 of a minute is ·2 × 60 in seconds, or 12ˢ; whence ·23 of a day is 5ʰ 31ᵐ 12ˢ. Again, suppose it required to find what part of a pound 6_s_. 8_d_. is. Since 6_s._ 8_d._ is 80 pence, and since the whole pound contains 20 × 12 or 240 pence, 6_s._ 8_d._ is made by dividing the pound into 240 parts, and taking 80 of them. It is therefore £⁸⁰/₂₄₀ (107), but ⁸⁰/₂₄₀ = ⅓ (108); therefore, 6_s._ 8_d._ = £⅓. EXERCISES. ⅖ of a day is 9ʰ 36ᵐ ·12841 of a day 3ʰ 4ᵐ 54ᔆ·624[45] ·257 of a cwt. 28ˡᵇˢ 12ᵒᶻ 8ᵈʳ·704 £·14936 2ˢ 11ᵈ 3ᶠ·3856 [45] When a decimal follows a whole number, the decimal is always of the same unit as the whole number. Thus, 5ᔆ·5 is five _seconds_ and five-tenths of a _second_. Thus, 0ᔆ·5 means five-tenths of a second; 0ʰ·3, three-tenths of an hour. 221, 222. I have thought it best to refer the mode of converting shillings, pence, and farthings into decimals of a pound to the Appendix (See Appendix _On Decimal Money_). I should strongly recommend the reader to make himself perfectly familiar with the modes given in that Appendix. To prevent the subsequent sections from being altered in their numbering, I have numbered this paragraph as above. 223. The rule of addition[46] of two compound quantities of the same sort will be evident from the following example. Suppose it required to add £192. 14. 2½ to £64. 13. 11¾. The sum of these two is the whole of that which arises from adding their several parts. Now ¾_d._ + ½_d._ = ⁵/₄_d._ = £0 . 0 . 1¼ (219) 11_d._ + 2_d._ = 13_d._ = 0 . 1 . 1 13_s._ + 14_s._ = 27_s._ = 1 . 7 . 0 £64 + £192 = 256 . 0 . 0 ----------- The sum of all of which is £257. 8 . 2¼ This may be done at once, and written as follows: £192 . 14 . 2½ 64 . 13 . 11¾ ---------------- £257 . 8 . 2¼ [46] Before reading this article and the next, articles (29) and (42) should be read again carefully. Begin by adding together the farthings, and reduce the result to pence and farthings. Set down the last only, carry the first to the line of pence, and add the pence in both lines to it. Reduce the sum to shillings and pence; set down the last only, and carry the first to the line of shillings, and so on. The same method must be followed when the quantities are of any other sort; and if the tables be kept in memory, the process will be easy. 224. SUBTRACTION is performed on the same principle as in (40), namely, that the difference of two quantities is not altered by adding the same quantity to both. Suppose it required to subtract £19 . 13. 10¾ from £24. 5. 7½. Write these quantities under one another thus: £24. 5. 7½ 19. 13. 10¾ Since ¾ cannot be taken from ½ or ²/₄, add 1_d._ to both quantities, which will not alter their difference; or, which is the same thing, add 4 farthings to the first, and 1_d._ to the second. The pence and farthings in the two lines then stand thus: 7⁶/₄_d._ and 11¾_d._ Now subtract ¾ from ⁶/₄, and the difference is ¾ which must be written under the farthings. Again, since 11_d._ cannot be subtracted from 7_d._, add 1_s._ to both quantities by adding 12_d._ to the first, and 1_s._ to the second. The pence in the first line are then 19, and in the second 11, and the difference is 8, which write under the pence. Since the shillings in the lower line were increased by 1, there are now 14_s._ in the lower, and 5_s._ in the upper one. Add 20_s._ to the upper and £1 to the lower line, and the subtraction of the shillings in the second from those in the first leaves 11_s._ Again, there are now £20 in the lower, and £24 in the upper line, the difference of which is £4; therefore the whole difference of the two sums is £4. 11. 8¾. If we write down the two sums with all the additions which have been made, the process will stand thus: £24 . 25 . 19⁶/₄ 20 . 14 . 11¾ ------------------ Difference £4 . 11 . 8¾ 225. The same method may be applied to any of the quantities in the tables. The following is another example: From 7 cwt. 2 qrs. 21 lbs. 14 oz. Subtract 2 cwt. 3 qrs. 27 lbs. 12 oz. After alterations have been made similar to those in the last article, the question becomes: From 7 cwt. 6 qrs. 49 lbs. 14 oz. Subtract 3 cwt. 4 qrs. 27 lbs. 12 oz. ---------------------------- The difference is 4 cwt. 2 qrs. 22 lbs. 2 oz. In this example, and almost every other, the process may be a little shortened in the following way. Here we do not subtract 27 lbs. from 21 lbs., which is impossible, but we increase 21 lbs. by 1 qr. or 28 lbs. and then subtract 27 lbs. from the sum. It would be shorter, and lead to the same result, first to subtract 27 lbs. from 1 qr. or 28 lbs. and add the difference to 21 lbs. 226. EXERCISES. A man has the following sums to receive: £193. 14. 11¼, £22. 0. 6¾, £6473. 0. 0, and £49. 14. 4½; and the following debts to pay: £200 . 19. 6¼, £305. 16. 11, £22, and £19. 6. 0½. How much will remain after paying the debts? _Answer_, £6190. 7. 4¾. There are four towns, in the order A, B, C, and D. If a man can go from A to B in 5ʰ 20ᵐ 33ˢ, from B to C in 6ʰ 49ᵐ 2ˢ and from A to D in 19ʰ 0ᵐ 17ˢ, how long will he be in going from B to D, and from C to D? _Answer_, 13ʰ 39ᵐ 44ˢ, and 6ʰ 50ᵐ 42ˢ. 227. In order to perform the process of MULTIPLICATION, it must be recollected that, as in (52), if a quantity be divided into several parts, and each of these parts be multiplied by a number, and the products be added, the result is the same as would arise from multiplying the whole quantity by that number. It is required to multiply £7. 13. 6¼ by 13. The first quantity is made up of 7 pounds, 13 shillings, 6 pence, and 1 farthing. And 1 farth. × 13 is 13 farth. or £0 . 0 . 3¼ (219) 6 pence × 13 is 78 pence, or 0 . 6 . 6 13 shill. × 13 is 169 shill. or 8 . 9 . 0 7 pounds × 13 is 91 pounds, or 91 . 0 . 0 -------------- The sum of all these is £99 . 15 . 9¼ which is therefore £7. 13. 6¼ × 13. This process is usually written as follows: £7 . 13 . 6¼ 13 ------------- £99 . 15 . 9¼ 228. DIVISION is performed upon the same principle as in (74), viz. that if a quantity be divided into any number of parts, and each part be divided by any number, the different quotients added together will make up the quotient of the whole quantity divided by that number. Suppose it required to divide £99. 15. 9¼ by 13. Since 99 divided by 13 gives the quotient 7, and the remainder 8, the quantity is made up of £13 × 7, or £91, and £8. 15. 9¼. The quotient of the first, 13 being the divisor, is £7: it remains to find that of the second. Since £8 is 160_s._, £8. 15. 9¼ is 175_s._ 9¼_d._, and 175 divided by 13 gives the quotient 13, and the remainder 6; that is, 175_s._ 9¼_d._ is made up of 169_s._ and 6_s._ 9¼_d._, the quotient of the first of which is 13_s._, and it remains to find that of the second. Since 6_s._ is 72_d._, 6_s._ 9¼_d._ is 81¼_d._, and 81 divided by 13 gives the quotient 6 and remainder 3; that is, 81¼_d._ is 78_d._ and 3¼_d._, of the first of which the quotient is 6_d._ Again, since 3_d._ is ¹²/₄, or 12 farthings, 3¼_d._ is 13 farthings, the quotient of which is 1 farthing, or ¼, without remainder. We have then divided £99. 15. 9¼ into four parts, each of which is divisible by 13, viz. £91, 169_s._, 78_d._, and 13 farthings; so that the thirteenth part of this quantity is £7. 13. 6¼. The whole process may be written down as follows; and the same sort of process may be applied to the exercises which follow: £ _s._ _d._ £ _s._ _d._ 13)99 15 9¼( 7 13 6¼ 91 -- 8 20 --- 160 + 15 = 175 13 --- 45 39 -- 6 12 -- 72 + 9 = 81 78 -- 3 4 -- 12 + 1 = 13 13 -- 0 Here, each of the numbers 99, 175, 81, and 13, is divided by 13 in the usual way, though the divisor is only written before the first of them. EXERCISES. 2 cwt. 1 qr. 21 lbs. 7 oz. × 53 = 129 cwt. 1 qr. 16 lbs. 3 oz. 2ᵈ 4ʰ 3ᵐ 27ˢ × 109 = 236ᵈ 10ʰ 16ᵐ 3ˢ £27 . 10 . 8 × 569 = £15666 . 9 . 4 £7 . 4 . 8 × 123 = £889 . 14 £166 × ₈/₃₃ = £40 . 4 . 10⁶/₃₃ £187 . 6 . 7 × ³/₁₀₀ = £5 . 12 . 4¾ ²/₂₅ 4_s._ 6½_d._ × 1121 = £254 . 11 . 2½ 4_s._ 4_d._ × 4260 = 6_s._ 6_d._ × 2840 229. Suppose it required to find how many times 1s. 4¼_d._ is contained in £3. 19. 10¾. The way to do this is to find the number of farthings in each. By 219, in the first there are 65, and in the second 3835 farthings. Now, 3835 contains 65 59 times; and therefore the second quantity is 59 times as great as the first. In the case, however, of pounds, shillings, and pence, it would be best to use decimals of a pound, which will give a sufficiently exact answer. Thus 1s. 4¼_d._ is £·067, and £3. 19. 10¾ is £3·994, and 3·994 divided by ·067 is 3994 by 67, or 59⁴¹/₆₇. This is an extreme case, for the smaller the divisor, the greater the effect of an error in a given place of decimals. EXERCISES. How many times does 6 cwt. 2 qrs. contain 1 qr. 14 lbs. 1 oz.? and 1ᵈ 2ʰ 0ᵐ 47ˢ contain 3ᵐ 46ˢ? _Answer_, 17·30758 and 414·367257. If 2 cwt. 3 qrs. 1 lb. cost £150. 13. 10, how much does 1 lb. cost? _Answer_, 9_s._ 9_d._ ¹³/₃₀₉. A grocer mixes 2 cwt. 15 lbs. of sugar at 11_d._ per pound with 14 cwt. 3 lbs. at 5_d._ per pound. At how much per pound must he sell the mixture so as not to lose by mixing them? _Answer_, 5_d._ ¾ ¹⁵³/₉₀₅. 230. There is a convenient method of multiplication called PRACTICE. Suppose I ask, How much do 153 tons cost if each ton cost £2. 15. 7½? It is plain that if this sum be multiplied by 153, the product is the price of the whole. But this is also evident, that, if I buy 153 tons at £2. 15. 7½ each ton, payment may be made by first putting down £2 for each ton, then 10s. for each, then 5_s._, then 6_d._, and then 1½_d._ These sums together make up £2. 15. 7½, and the reason for this separation of £2. 15 . 7½ into different parts will be soon apparent. The process may be carried on as follows: 1. 153 tons, at £2 each ton, will cost £306 0 0 2. Since 10s. is £½, 153 tons, at 10_s._ each, will cost £15³/₂, which is 76 10 0 3. Since 5_s._ is ½ of 10_s._, 153 tons, at 5_s._, will cost half as much as the same number at 10_s._ each, that is, ½ of £76 . 10, which is 38 5 0 4. Since 6_d._ is ⅒ of 5_s._, 153 tons, at 6_d._ each, will cost ⅒ of what the same number costs at 5_s._each, that is, ⅒ of £38 . 5, which is 3 16 6 5. Since 1½ or 3 halfpence is ¼ of 6_d._ or 12 halfpence, 153 tons, at 1½_d._ each, will cost ¼ of what the same number costs at 6_d._ each, that is, ¼ of£3 . 16 . 6, which is 0 19 1½ ----------- The sum of all these quantities is 425 10 7½ which is, therefore, £2 . 15 . 7½ × 153. The whole process may be written down as follows: or what 153 tons would | £153 0 0 cost at £1 per ton. | ----------- ----------- £2 is 2 × £1 | 306 0 0 2 0 0 10_s._ is ½ of £1 | 76 10 0 0 10 0 5_s._ is ½ of 10_s._ | 38 5 0 0 5 0 6_d._ is ⅒ of 5_s._ | 3 16 6 0 0 6 1½_d._ is ¼ of 6_d._ | 0 19 1½ 0 0 1½ | ------------ ---------- Sum | £425 10 7½ £2 15 7½ ANOTHER EXAMPLE. What do 1735 lbs. cost at 9_s._ 10¾_d._ per lb.? The price 9_s._ 10¾_d_. is made up of 5_s._, 4_s._, 10_d._, ½_d._, and ¼_d._; of which 5_s._ is ¼ of £1, 4_s._ is ⅕ of £1, 10_d._ is ⅙ of 5_s._, ½_d._ is ¹/₂₀ of 10_d._, and ¼_d._ is ½ of ½_d._ Follow the same method as in the last example, which gives the following: or what 1735 tons would | £1735 0 0 cost at £1 per lb. | ------------ ----------- 5_s._ is ¼ of £1 | 433 15 0 0 5 0 | 4_s._ is ⅕ of £1 | 347 0 0 0 4 0 | 10_d._ is ⅙ of 5_s._ | 72 5 10 0 0 10 | ½_d._ is ¹/₂₀ of 10_d._ | 3 12 3½ 0 0 0½ | ¼_d._ is ½ of ½_d._ | 1 16 1¾ 0 0 0¼ | ------------- ------------ by addition ... | £858 9 3¼ £0 9 10¾ In all cases, the price must first be divided into a number of parts, each of which is a simple fraction[47] of some one which goes before. No rule can be given for doing this, but practice will enable the student immediately to find out the best method for each case. When that is done, he must find how much the whole quantity would cost if each of these parts were the price, and then add the results together. [47] Any fraction of a unit, whose numerator is unity, is generally called an _aliquot part_ of that unit. Thus, 2_s._ and 10_s._ are both aliquot parts of a pound, being £⅒ and £½. EXERCISES. What is the cost of 243 cwt. at £14 . 18 . 8¼ per cwt.?--_Answer_, £3629 . 1 . 0¾. 169 bushels at £2 . 1 . 3¼ per bushel?--_Answer_, £348 . 14 . 9¼. 273 qrs. at 19_s._ 2_d._ per quarter?--_Answer_, £261 . 12. 6. 2627 sacks at 7_s._ 8½_d._ per sack?--_Answer_, £1012 . 9 . 9½. 231. Throughout this section it must be observed, that the rules can be applied to cases where the quantities given are expressed in common or decimal fractions, instead of the measures in the tables. The following are examples: What is the price of 272·3479 cwt. at £2. 1. 3½ per cwt.? _Answer_, £562·2849, or £562. 5. 8¼. 66½lbs. at 1_s._ 4½_d._ per lb. cost £4. 11. 5¼. How many pounds, shillings, and pence, will 279·301 acres let for if each acre lets for £3·1076?--_Answer_, £867·9558, or £867. 19. 1¼. What does ¼ of ³/₁₃ of 17 bush. cost at ⅙ of ⅔ of £17. 14 per bushel? _Answer_, £2·3146, or £2. 6. 3½. What is the cost of 19lbs. 8oz. 12dwt. 8gr. at £4. 4. 6 per ounce?--_Answer_, £999. 14. 1¼ ⅙. 232. It is often required to find to how much a certain sum per day will amount in a year. This may be shortly done, since it happens that the number of days in a year is 240 + 120 + 5; so that a penny per day is a pound, half a pound, and 5 pence per year. Hence the following rule: To find how much any sum per day amounts to in a year, turn it into pence and fractions of a penny; to this add the half of itself, and let the pence be pounds, and each farthing five shillings; then add five times the daily sum, and the total is the yearly amount. For example, what does 12_s._ 3¾_d._ amount to in a year? This is 147¾_d._, and its half is 73⅞_d._, which added to 147¾_d._ gives 221⅝_d._, which turned into pounds is £221. 12. 6. Also, 12_s._ 3¾_d._ × 5 is £3. 1. 6¾, which added to the former sum gives £224. 14. 0¾ for the yearly amount. In the same way the yearly amount of 2_s._ 3½_d._ is £41. 16. 5½; that of 6¾_d._ is £10. 5. 3¾; and that of 11_d._ is £16. 14. 7. 233. An inverse rule may be formed, sufficiently correct for every purpose, in the following way: If the year consisted of 360 days, or ³/₂ of 240, the subtraction of one-third from any sum per year would give the proportion which belongs to 240 days; and every pound so obtained would be one penny per day. But as the year is not 360, but 365 days, if we divide each day’s share into 365 parts, and take 5 away, the whole of the subtracted sum, or 360 × 5 such parts, will give 360 parts for each of the 5 days which we neglected at first. But 360 such parts are left behind for each of the 360 first days; therefore, this additional process divides the whole annual amount equally among the 365 days. Now, 5 parts out of 365 is one out of 73, or the 73d part of the first result must be subtracted from it to produce the true result. Unless the daily sum be very large, the 72d part will do equally well, which, as 72 farthings are 18 pence, is equivalent to subtracting at the rate of one farthing for 18_d._, or ½_d._ for 3_s._, or 10_d._ for £3. The rule, then, is as follows: To find how much per day will produce a given sum per year, turn the shillings, &c. in the given sum into decimals of a pound (221); subtract one-third; consider the result as pence; and diminish it by one farthing for every eighteen pence, or ten pence for every £3. For example, how much per day will give £224. 14. 0¾ per year? This is 224·703, and its third is 74·901, which subtracted from 224·703, gives 149·802, which, if they be pence, amounts to 12_s._ 5·802_d._, in which 1_s._ 6_d._ is contained 8 times. Subtract 8 farthings, or 2_d._, and we have 12_s._ 3·802_d._, which differs from the truth only about ¹/₂₀ of a farthing. In the same way, £100 per year is 5_s._ 5¾_d._ per day. 234. The following connexion between the measures of length and the measures of surface is the foundation of the application of arithmetic to geometry. [Illustration] Suppose an oblong figure, A, B, C, D, as here drawn (which is called a _rectangle_ in geometry), with the side A B 6 inches, and the side A C 4 inches. Divide A B and C D (which are equal) each into 6 inches by the points _a, b, c, l, m_, &c.; and A C and B D (which are also equal) into 4 inches by the points _f, g, h, x, y_, and _z_. Join _a_ and l, _b_ and _m_, &c., and _f_ and _x_, &c. Then, the figure A B C D is divided into a number of squares; for a square is a rectangle whose sides are equal, and therefore A _a f_ E is square, since A _a_ is of the same length as A _f_, both being 1 inch. There are also four rows of these squares, with six squares in each row; that is, there are 6 × 4, or 24 squares altogether. Each of these squares has its sides 1 inch in length, and is what was called in (215) _a square inch_. By the same reasoning, if one side had contained 6 _yards_, and the other 4 _yards_, the surface would have contained 6 × 4 _square yards_; and so on. [Illustration] 235. Let us now suppose that the sides of A B C D, instead of being a whole number of inches, contain some inches and a fraction. For example, let A B be 3½ inches, or (114) ⁷/₂ of an inch, and let A C contain 2½ inches, or ⁹/₄ of an inch. Draw A E twice as long as A B, and A F four times as long as A C, and complete the rectangle A E F G. The rest of the figure needs no description. Then, since A E is twice A B, or twice ⁷/₂ inches, it is 7 inches. And since A F is four times A C, or four times ⁹/₄ inches, it is 9 inches. Therefore, the whole rectangle A E F G contains, by (234), 7 × 9 or 63 square inches. But the rectangle A E F G contains 8 rectangles, all of the same figure as A B C D; and therefore A B C D is one-eighth part of A E F G, and contains ⁶³/₈ square inches. But ⁶³/₈ is made by multiplying ⁹/₄ and ⁷/₂ together (118). From this and the last article it appears, that, whether the sides of a rectangle be a whole or a fractional number of inches, the number of square inches in its surface is the product of the numbers of inches in its sides. The square itself is a rectangle whose sides are all equal, and therefore the number of square inches which a square contains is found by multiplying the number of inches in its side by itself. For example, a square whose side is 13 inches in length contains 13 × 13 or 169 square inches. 236. EXERCISES. What is the content, in square feet and inches, of a room whose sides are 42 ft. 5 inch. and 31 ft. 9 inch.? and supposing the piece from which its carpet is taken to be three quarters of a yard in breadth, what length of it must be cut off?--_Answer_, The content is 1346 square feet 105 square inches, and the length of carpet required is 598 feet 6⁵/₉ inches. The sides of a rectangular field are 253 yards and a quarter of a mile; how many acres does it contain?--_Answer_, 23. What is the difference between 18 _square miles_, and a square of 18 miles long, or 18 _miles square_?--_Answer_, 306 square miles. 237. It is by this rule that the measure in (215) is deduced from that in (214); for it is evident that twelve inches being a foot, the square foot is 12 × 12 or 144 square inches, and so on. In a similar way it may be shewn that the content in cubic inches of a cube, or parallelepiped,[48] may be found by multiplying together the number of inches in those three sides which meet in a point. Thus, a cube of 6 inches contains 6 × 6 × 6, or 216 cubic inches; a chest whose sides are 6, 8, and 5 feet, contains 6 × 8 × 5, or 240 cubic feet. By this rule the measure in (216) was deduced from that in (214). [48] A parallelepiped, or more properly, a _rectangular_ parallelepiped, is a figure of the form of a brick; its sides, however, may be of any length; thus, the figure of a plank has the same name. A cube is a parallelepiped with equal sides, such as is a die. SECTION II. RULE OF THREE. 238. Suppose it required to find what 156 yards will cost, if 22 yards cost 17_s._ 4_d._ This quantity, reduced to pence, is 208_d._; and if 22 yards cost 208_d._, each yard costs ²⁰⁸/₂₂_d_. But 156 yards cost 156 times the price of one yard, and therefore cost 208 208 × 156 ---- × 156 pence, or --------- pence (117). 22 22 Again, if 25½ French francs be 20 shillings sterling, how many francs are in £20. 15? Since 25½ francs are 20 shillings, twice the number of francs must be twice the number of shillings; that is, 51 francs are 40 shillings, and one shilling is the fortieth part of 51 francs, or ⁵¹/₄₀ francs. But £20 15_s._ contain 415 shillings (219); and since 1 shilling is ⁵¹/₄₀ francs, 415 shillings is 51 × 415 ⁵¹/₄₀ × 415 francs, or (117) -------- francs. 40 239. Such questions as the last two belong to the most extensive rule in Commercial Arithmetic, which is called the RULE OF THREE, because in it three quantities are given, and a fourth is required to be found. From both the preceding examples the following rule may be deduced, which the same reasoning will shew to apply to all similar cases. It must be observed, that in these questions there are two quantities which are of the same sort, and a third of another sort, of which last the answer must be. Thus, in the first question there are 22 and 156 yards and 208 pence, and the thing required to be found is a number of pence. In the second question there are 20 and 415 shillings and 25½ francs, and what is to be found is a number of francs. Write the three quantities in a line, putting that one last which is the only one of its kind, and that one first which is connected with the last in the question.[49] Put the third quantity in the middle. In the first question the quantities will be placed thus: 22 yds. 156 yds. 17_s._ 4_d._ In the second question they will be placed thus: 20_s._ £20 15_s._ 25½ francs. [49] This generally comes in the same member of the sentence. In some cases the ingenuity of the student must be employed in detecting it. The reasoning of (238) is the best guide. The following may be very often applied. If it be evident that the answer must be less than the given quantity of its kind, multiply that given quantity by the less of the other two; if greater, by the greater. Thus, in the first question, 156 yards must cost more than 22; multiply, therefore, by 156. Reduce the first and second quantities, if necessary, to quantities of the same denomination. Thus, in the second question, £20 15_s._ must be reduced to shillings (219). The third quantity may also be reduced to any other denomination, if convenient; or the first and third may be multiplied by any quantity we please, as was done in the second question; and, on looking at the answer in (238), and at (108), it will be seen that no change is made by that multiplication. Multiply the second and third quantities together, and divide by the first. The result is a quantity of the same sort as the third in the line, and is the answer required. Thus, to the first question the answer is (238) 208 × 156 17_s._ 4_d_. × 156 ----------pence, or, which is the same thing, -------------------. 22 22 240. The whole process in the first question is as follows:[50] yds. yds. _s._ _d._ 22 : 156 ∷ 17 . 4 12 --- 208 pence. 156 ---- 1248 1040 208 ----- 22)32448(1474¾_d._ and ¹⁴/₂₂, or ⁷/₁₁ of a farthing, 22 or (219) £6 . 2 . 10¾-⁷/₁₁. --- 104 88 ---- 164 154 ---- 108 88 -- 20 (228) 4 -- 80 66 -- 14 [50] It is usual to place points, in the manner here shewn, between the quantities. Those who have read Section VIII. will see that the Rule of Three is no more than the process for finding the fourth term of a proportion from the other three. The question might have been solved without reducing 17_s._ 4_d._ to pence, thus: yds. yds. _s._ _d._ 22 : 156 ∷ 17 . 4 156 (227) ---------- 22)£135 . 4 . 0(£6 . 2 . 10¾-⁷/₁₁ (228) 132 --- 3 × 20 + 4 = 64 44 -- 20 × 12 = 240 220 --- 20 × 4 = 80 66 -- 14 The student must learn by practice which is the most convenient method for any particular case, as no rule can be given. 241. It may happen that the three given quantities are all of one denomination; nevertheless it will be found that two of them are of one, and the third of another sort. For example: What must an income of £400 pay towards an income-tax of 4_s._ 6_d._ in the pound? Here the three given quantities are, £400, 4_s._ 6_d._, and £1, which are all of the same species, viz. money. Nevertheless, the first and third are income; the second is a tax, and the answer is also a tax; and therefore, by (152), the quantities must be placed thus: £1 : £400 ∷ 4_s._ 6_d._ 242. The following exercises either depend directly upon this rule, or can be shewn to do so by a little consideration. There are many questions of the sort, which will require some exercise of ingenuity before the method of applying the rule can be found. EXERCISES. If 15 cwt. 2 qrs. cost £198. 15. 4, what does 1 qr. 22 lbs. cost? _Answer_, £5 . 14 . 5 ¾ ¹⁸⁵/₂₁₇. If a horse go 14 m. 3 fur. 27 yds. in 3ʰ 26ᵐ 12ˢ, how long will he be in going 23 miles? _Answer_, 5ʰ 29ᵐ 34ˢ(²⁴⁶²/₂₅₃₂₇). Two persons, A and B, are bankrupts, and owe exactly the same sum; A can pay 15_s._ 4½_d._ in the pound, and B only 7_s._ (6¾)_d._ At the same time A has in his possession £1304. 17 more than B; what do the debts of each amount to? _Answer_, £3340 . 8 . 3 ¾ ⁹/₂₅. For every (12½) acres which one country contains, a second contains (56¼). The second country contains 17,300 square miles. How much does the first contain? Again, for every 3 people in the first, there are 5 in the second; and there are in the first 27 people on every 20 acres. How many are there in each country?--_Answer_, The number of square miles in the first is 3844⁴/₉, and its population 3,321,600; and the population of the second is 5,536,000. If (42½) yds. of cloth, 18 in. wide, cost £59. 14. 2, how much will (118¼) yds. cost, if the width be 1 yd.? _Answer_, £332. 5. (2⁴/₁₇). If £9. 3. 6 last six weeks, how long will £100 last? _Answer_, (65¹⁴⁵/₃₆₇) weeks. How much sugar, worth (9¾d). a pound, must be given for 2 cwt. of tea, worth 10_d._ an ounce? _Answer_, 32 cwt. 3 qrs. 7 lbs. ³⁵/₃₉. 243. Suppose the following question asked: How long will it take 15 men to do that which 45 men can finish in 10 days? It is evident that one man would take 45 × 10, or 450 days, to do the same thing, and that 15 men would do it in one-fifteenth part of the time which it employs one man, that is, in (450 ÷ 15) or 30 days. By this and similar reasoning the following questions can be solved. EXERCISES. If 15 oxen eat an acre of grass in 12 days, how long will it take 26 oxen to eat 14 acres? _Answer_, (96¹²/₁₃) days. If 22 masons build a wall 5 feet high in 6 days, how long will it take 43 masons to build 10 feet? _Answer_, (6⁶/₄₃) days. 244. The questions in the preceding article form part of a more general class of questions, whose solution is called the DOUBLE RULE OF THREE, but which might, with more correctness, be called the Rule of _Five_, since five quantities are given, and a sixth is to be found. The following is an example: If 5 men can make 30 yards of cloth in 3 days, how long will it take 4 men to make 68 yards? The first thing to be done is to find out, from the first part of the question, the time it will take one man to make one yard. Now, since one man, in 3 days, will do the fifth part of what 5 men can do, he will in 3 days make ³⁰/₅, or 6 yards. He will, therefore, make one yard in ³/₆6 or (3 × 5)/30 of a day. From this we are to find how long it will take 4 men to make 68 yards. Since one man makes a yard in 3 × 5 3 × 5 ----- of a day, he will make 68 yards in ----- × 68 days, 30 30 3 × 5 × 68 or (116) in ---------- days; and 4 men will do this in one-fourth 30 3 × 5 × 68 of the time, that is (123), in ---------- days, or in 8½ days. 30 × 4 Again, suppose the question to be: If 5 men can make 30 yards in 3 days, how much can 6 men do in 12 days? Here we must first find the quantity one man can do in one day, which appears, on reasoning similar to that in the last example, to be 30/(3 × 5) yards. Hence, 6 men, in one day, will make 6 × 30 12 × 6 × 30 ------ yards, and in 12 days will make ----------- or 144 yards. 5 × 3 5 × 3 From these examples the following rule may be drawn. Write the given quantities in two lines, keeping quantities of the same sort under one another, and those which are connected with each other, in the same line. In the two examples above given, the quantities must be written thus: [Illustration] SECOND EXAMPLE. [Illustration] Draw a curve through the middle of each line, and the extremities of the other. There will be three quantities on one curve and two on the other. Divide the product of the three by the product of the two, and the quotient is the answer to the question. If necessary, the quantities in each line must be reduced to more simple denominations (219), as was done in the common Rule of Three (238). EXERCISES. If 6 horses can, in 2 days, plough 17 acres, how many acres will 93 horses plough in 4½ days? _Answer_, 592⅞. If 20 men, in 3¼ days, can dig 7 rectangular fields, the sides of each of which are 40 and 50 yards, how long will 37 men be in digging 53 fields, the sides of each of which are 90 and 125½ yards? 2451 _Answer_, 75----- days. 20720 If the carriage of 60 cwt. through 20 miles cost £14 10_s._, what weight ought to be carried 30 miles for £5. 8. 9? _Answer_, 15 cwt. If £100 gain £5 in a year, how much will £850 gain in 3 years and 8 months? _Answer_, £155. 16. 8. SECTION III. INTEREST, ETC. 245. In the questions contained in this Section, almost the only process which will be employed is the taking a fractional part of a sum of money, which has been done before in several cases. Suppose it required to take 7 parts out of 40 from £16, that is, to divide £16 into 40 equal parts, and take 7 of them. Each of these parts is 16 16 16 × 7 £----, and 7 of them make ---- × 7, or ------ pounds (116). 40 40 40 The process may be written as below: £16 7 ----- 40)112(£2 . 16_s._ 80 -- 32 20 --- 640 40 --- 240 240 --- 0 Suppose it required to take 13 parts out of a hundred from £56. 13. 7½. 56 . 13 . 7½ 13 ---------------- 100) 736 . 17 . 1½ ( £7 . 7 . 4 ¼ ¹/₄₁ 700 --- 36 × 20 + 17 = 737 700 --- 37 × 12 + 1 = 445 400 --- 45 × 4 × 2 = 182 100 --- 82 Let it be required to take 2½ parts out of a hundred from £3 12_s._ The result, by the same rule is £3 12_s._ × 2½ 5 -------------------, or 123 £3 12_s._ × ---; 100 200 so that taking 2½ out of a hundred is the same as taking 5 parts out of 200. EXERCISES. Take 7⅓ parts out of 53 from £1 10_s._ 129 _Answer_, 4_s._ 1---_d._ 159 Take 5 parts out of 100 from £107 13_s._ 4¾_d._ _Answer_, £5. 7. 8 and ³/₂₀ of a farthing. £56 3_s._ 2_d._ is equally divided among 32 persons. How much does the share of 23 of them exceed that of the rest? _Answer_, £24. 11. 4½ ½. 246. It is usual, in mercantile business, to mention the fraction which one sum is of another, by saying how many parts out of a hundred must be taken from the second in order to make the first. Thus, instead of saying that £16 12_s._ is the half of £33 4_s._, it is said that the first is 50 per cent of the second. Thus, £5 is 2½ per cent of £200; because, if £200 be divided into 100 parts, 2½ of those parts are £5. Also, £13 is 150 per cent of £8. 13. 4, since the first is the second and half the second. Suppose it asked, How much per cent is 23 parts out of 56 of any sum? The question amounts to this: If he who has £56 gets £100 for them, how much will he who has 23 receive? This, by 238, is 23 × ¹⁰⁰/₅₆ or ²³⁰⁰/₅₆ or 41¹/₁₄. Hence, 23 out of 56 is 41¹/₁₄ per cent. Similarly 16 parts out of 18 is 16 × ¹⁰⁰/₁₈, or 88⁸/₉ per cent, and 2 parts out of 5 is 2 × ¹⁰⁰/₅, or 40 per cent. From which the method of reducing other fractions to the rate per cent is evident. Suppose it asked, How much per cent is £6. 12. 2 of £12. 3? Since the first contains 1586_d._, and the second 2916_d._, the first is 1586 out of 2916 parts of the second; that is, by the last rule, it is ¹⁵⁸⁶⁰⁰/₂₉₁₆, or 54¹¹³⁶/₂₉₁₆, or £54. 7. 9½ per cent, very nearly. The more expeditious way of doing this is to reduce the shillings, &c. to decimals of a pound. Three decimal places will give the rate per cent to the nearest shilling, which is near enough for all practical purposes. For instance, in the last example, which is to find how much £6·608 is of £12·15, 6·608 × 100 is 660·8, which divided by 12·15 gives £54·38, or £54. 7. Greater correctness may be had, if necessary, as in the Appendix. EXERCISES. How much per cent is 198¼ out of 233 parts?--_Ans._ £85. 1. 8¾. Goods which are bought for £193. 12, are sold for £216. 13. 4; how much per cent has been gained by them? _Answer_, A little less than £11. 18. 6. A sells goods for B to the amount of £230. 12, and is allowed a commission[51] of 3 per cent; what does that amount to? _Answer_, £6 . 18. 4¼ ⁷/₂₅. [51] Commission is what is allowed by one merchant to another for buying or selling goods for him, and is usually a per-centage on the whole sum employed. Brokerage is an allowance similar to commission, under a different name, principally used in the buying and selling of stock in the funds. Insurance is a per-centage paid to those who engage to make good to the payers any loss they may sustain by accidents from fire, or storms, according to the agreement, up to a certain amount which is named, and is a per-centage upon this amount. Tare, tret, and cloff, are allowances made in selling goods by wholesale, for the weight of the boxes or barrels which contain them, waste, &c.; and are usually either the price of a certain number of pounds of the goods for each box or barrel, or a certain allowance on each cwt. A stockbroker buys £1700 stock, brokerage being at £⅛ per cent; what does he receive?--_Answer_, £2. 2. 6. A ship whose value is £15,423 is insured at 19⅔ per cent; what does the insurance amount to?--_Answer_, £3033. 3. 9½ ²/₅. 247. In reckoning how much a bankrupt is able to pay his creditors, as also to how much a tax or rate amounts, it is usual to find how many shillings in the pound is paid. Thus, if a person who owes £100 can only pay £50, he is said to pay 10_s._ in the pound. The rule is easily derived from the same reasoning as in 246. For example, £50 out of £82 is 50 50×20 £---- out of £1, or ----- shillings, 82 82 or 12_s._ 2½ ¹⁵/₄₁ in the pound. 248. INTEREST is money paid for the use of other money, and is always a per-centage upon the sum lent. It may be paid either yearly, half-yearly, or quarterly; but when it is said that £100 is lent at 4 per cent, it must be understood to mean 4 per cent per annum; that is, that 4 pounds are paid every year for the use of £100. The sum lent is called the _principal_, and the interest upon it is of two kinds. If the borrower pay the interest as soon as, from the agreement, it becomes due, it is evident that he has to pay the same sum every year; and that the whole of the interest which he has to pay in any number of years is one year’s interest multiplied by the number of years. But if he do not pay the interest at once, but keeps it in his hands until he returns the principal, he will then have more of his creditor’s money in his hands every year, and if it were so agreed will have to pay interest upon each year’s interest for the time during which he keeps it after it becomes due. In the first case, the interest is called _simple_, and in the second _compound_. The interest and principal together are called the _amount_. 249. What is the simple interest of £1049. 16. 6 for 6 years and one-third, at 4½ per cent? This interest must be 6⅓ times the interest of the same sum for one year, which (245) is found by multiplying the sum by 4½, and dividing by 100. The process is as follows: (230) (_a_) |£1049 . 16 . 6 +-------------- _a_ × 4 | 4199 . 6 . 0 _a_ × ½ | 524 . 18 . 3 +-------------- (82) 100) 47,24 . 4 . 3(£47 . 4 . 10¹¹/₁₀₀ 20 ---- (228) 4,84[52] 12 ------ 10,11[53] (_b_) £47 . 4 . 10¹¹/₁₀₀ Int. for one yr. +------------------ _b_ × 6 | 283 . 9 . 0⁶⁶/₁₀₀ _b_ × ⅓ | 15 . 14 . 11³⁷/₁₀₀ +--------------------- £299 . 4 . 0³/₁₀₀ Int. for 6⅓ yrs. [52] Here the 4_s._ from the dividend is taken in. [53] Here the 3_d._ from the dividend is taken in. EXERCISES. What is the interest of £105. 6. 2 for 19 years and 7 weeks at 3 per cent? _Answer_, £60. 9, very nearly. What is the difference between the interest of £50. 19 for 7 years at 3 per cent, and for 8 years at 2½ per cent? _Answer_, 10_s._ (2½)_d._ What is the interest of £157. 17. 6 for one year at 5 per cent? _Answer_, £7. 17. 10½. Shew that the interest of any sum for 9 years at 4 per cent is the same as that of the same sum for 4 years at 9 per cent. 250. In order to find the interest of any sum at compound interest, it is necessary to find the amount of the principal and interest at the end of every year; because in this case (248) it is the amount of both principal and interest at the end of the first year, upon which interest accumulates during the second year. Suppose, for example, it is required to find the interest, for 3 years, on £100, at 5 per cent, compound interest. The following is the process: £100 First principal. 5 First year’s interest. --- 105 Amount at the end of the first year. (249) 5 . 5 Interest for the second year on £105. -------- 110 . 5 Amount at the end of two years. 5 . 10 . 3 Interest due for the third year. ------------ 115 . 15 . 3 Amount at the end of three years. 100 . 0 . 0 First principal. ------------ 15 . 15 . 3 Interest gained in the three years. When the number of years is great, and the sum considerable, this process is very troublesome; on which account tables[54] are constructed to shew the amount of one pound, for different numbers of years, at different rates of interest. To make use of these tables in the present example, look into the column headed “5 per cent;” and opposite to the number 3, in the column headed “Number of years,” is found 1·157625; meaning that £1 will become £1·157625 in 3 years. Now, £100 must become 100 times as great; and 1·157625 × 100 is 115·7625 (141); but (221) £·7625 is 15_s._ 3_d._; therefore the whole amount of £100 is £115. 15. 3, as before. [54] Sufficient tables for all common purposes are contained in the article on Interest in the Penny Cyclopædia; and ample ones in the Treatise on Annuities and Reversions, in the Library of Useful Knowledge. 251. Suppose that a sum of money has lain at simple interest 4 years, at 5 per cent, and has, with its interest, amounted to £350; it is required to find what the sum was at first. Whatever the sum was, if we suppose it divided into 100 parts, 5 of those parts were added every year for 4 years, as interest; that is, 20 of those parts have been added to the first sum to make £350. If, therefore, £350 be divided into 120 parts, 100 of those parts are the principal which we want to find, and 20 parts are interest upon it; that is, the principal is £(350 × 100)/150, or £291. 13. 4. 252. Suppose that A was engaged to pay B £350 at the end of four years from this time, and that it is agreed between them that the debt shall be paid immediately; suppose, also, that money can be employed at 5 per cent, simple interest; it is plain that A ought not to pay the whole sum, £350, because, if he did, he would lose 4 years’ interest of the money, and B would gain it. It is fair, therefore, that he should only pay to B as much as will, _with interest_, amount in four years to £350, that is (251), £291. 13. 4. Therefore, £58. 6. 8 must be struck off the debt in consideration of its being paid before the time. This is called DISCOUNT;[55] and £291. 13. 4 is called the _present value_ of £350 due four years hence, discount being at 5 per cent. The rule for finding the present value of a sum of money (251) is: Multiply the sum by 100, and divide the product by 100 increased by the product of the rate per cent and number of years. If the time that the debt has yet to run be expressed in years and months, or months only, the months must be reduced to the equivalent fraction of a year. [55] This rule is obsolete in business. When a bill, for instance, of £100 having a year to run, is _discounted_ (as people now say) at 5 per cent, this means that 5 per cent of £100, or £5, is struck off. EXERCISES. What is the discount on a bill of £138. 14. 4, due 2 years hence, discount being at 4½ per cent? _Answer_, £11. 9. 1. What is the present value of £1031. 17, due 6 months hence, interest being at 3 per cent? _Answer_, £1016. 12. 253. If we multiply by _a_ + _b_, or by _a_-_b_, when we should multiply by _a_, the result is wrong by the fraction _b_ _b_ --- + _b_, or ---------, _a_ _a_ - _b_ of itself: being too great in the first case, and too small in the second. Again, if we divide by _a_ + _b_, where we should have divided by _a_, the result is too small by the fraction _b_/_a_ of itself; while, if we divide by _a_-_b_ instead of _a_, the result is too great by the same fraction of itself. Thus, if we divide by 20 instead of 17, the result is ³/₁₇ of itself too small; and if we divide by 360 instead of 365, the result is too great by ⁵/₃₆₅, or ¹/₇₃ of itself. If, then, we wish to find the interest of a sum of money for a portion of a year, and have not the assistance of tables, it will be found convenient to suppose the year to contain only 360 days, in which case its 73d part (the 72d part will generally do) must be subtracted from the result, to make the alteration of 360 into 365. The number 360 has so large a number of divisors, that the rule of Practice (230) may always be readily applied. Thus, it is required to find the portion which belongs to 274 days, the yearly interest being £18. 9. 10, or 18·491. 274 18·491 ------ 180 is ½ of 360 9·246 --- 94 90 is ½ of 180 4·623 -- 4 is ¹/₉₀ of 360 ·205 ------ 9)14·074 ------ 8)1·564 ----- ·196 13·878 = £13 . 17 . 7 _Answer._ But if the nearest farthing be wanted, the best way is to take 2-tenths of the number of days as a multiplier, and 73 as a divisor; since _m_ ÷ 365 is 2_m_ ÷ 730, or (²/₁₀)_m_ ÷ 73. Thus, in the preceding instance, we multiply by 54·8 and divide by 73; and 54·8 × 18·491 = 1013·3068, which divided by 73 gives 13·881, very nearly agreeing with the former, and giving £13. 17. 7½, which is certainly within a farthing of the truth. 254. Suppose it required to divide £100 among three persons in such a way that their shares may be as 6, 5, and 9; that is, so that for every £6 which the first has, the second may have £5, and the third £9. It is plain that if we divide the £100 into 6 + 5 + 9, or 20 parts, the first must have 6 of those parts, the second 5, and the third 9. Therefore (245) their shares are respectively, 100 × 6 100 × 5 100 × 9 £-------, £------- and £-------, or £30, £25, and £45. 20 20 20 EXERCISES. Divide £394. 12 among four persons, so that their shares may be as 1, 6, 7, and 18.--_Answer_, £12. 6. 7½; £73. 19. 9; £86. 6. 4½; £221. 19. 3. Divide £20 among 6 persons, so that the share of each may be as much as those of all who come before put together.--_Answer_, The first two have 12_s._ 6_d._; the third £1. 5; the fourth £2. 10; the fifth £5; and the sixth £10. 255. When two or more persons employ their money together, and gain or lose a certain sum, it is evidently not fair that the gain or loss should be equally divided among them all, unless each contributed the same sum. Suppose, for example, A contributes twice as much as B, and they gain £15, A ought to gain twice as much as B; that is, if the whole gain be divided into 3 parts, A ought to have two of them and B one, or A should gain £10 and B £5. Suppose that A, B, and C engage in an adventure, in which A embarks £250, B £130, and C £45. They gain £1000. How much of it ought each to have? Each one ought to gain as much for £1 as the others. Now, since there are 250 + 130 + 45, or 425 pounds embarked, which gain £1000, for each pound there is a gain of £¹⁰⁰⁰/₄₂₄. Therefore A should gain 1000 × ²⁵⁰/₄₂₅ pounds, B should gain 1000 × ¹³⁰/₄₂₅ pounds, and C 1000 × ⁴⁵/₄₂₅ pounds. On these principles, by the process in (245), the following questions may be answered. A ship is to be insured, in which A has ventured £1928, and B £4963. The expense of insurance is £474. 10. 2. How much ought each to pay of it? _Answer_, A must pay £132. 15. (2½). A loss of £149 is to be made good by three persons, A, B, and C. Had there been a gain, A would have gained 4 times as much as B, and C as much as A and B together. How much of the loss must each bear? _Answer_, A pays £59. 12, B £14. 18, and C £74. 10. 256. It may happen that several individuals employ several sums of money together for different times. In such a case, unless there be a special agreement to the contrary, it is right that the more time a sum is employed, the more profit should be made upon it. If, for example, A and B employ the same sum for the same purpose, but A’s money is employed twice as long as B’s, A ought to gain twice as much as B. The principle is, that one pound employed for one month, or one year, ought to give the same return to each. Suppose, for example, that A employs £3 for 6 months, B £4 for 7 months, and C £12 for 2 months, and the gain is £100; how much ought each to have of it? Now, since A employs £3 for six months, he must gain 6 times as much as if he employed it one month only; that is, as much as if he employed £6 × 3, or £18, for one month; also, B gains as much as if he had employed £4 × 7 for one month; and C as if he had employed £12 × 2 for one month. If, then, we divide £100 into 6 × 3 + 4 × 7 + 12 × 2, or 70 parts, A must have 6 × 3, or 18, B must have 4 × 7, or 28, and C 12 × 2, or 24 of those parts. The shares of the three are, therefore, 6 × 3 × 100 4 × 7 × 100 £----------------------, £----------------------, 6 × 3 + 4 × 7 + 12 × 2 6 × 3 + 4 × 7 + 12 × 2 12 × 2 × 100 and £----------------------. 6 × 3 + 4 × 7 + 12 × 2 EXERCISES. A, B, and C embark in an undertaking; A placing £3. 6 for 2 years, B £100 for 1 year, and C £12 for 1½ years. They gain £4276. 7 How much must each receive of the gain? _Answer_, A £226. 10. 4; B £3432. 1. 3; C £617. 15. 5. A, B, and C rent a house together for 2 years, at £150 per annum. A remains in it the whole time, B 16 months, and C 4½ months, during the occupancy of B. How much must each pay of the rent?[56] _Answer_, A should pay £190. 12. 6; B £90. 12. 6; C £18. 15. [56] This question does not at first appear to fall under the rule. A little thought will serve to shew that what probably will be the first idea of the proper method of solution is erroneous. 257. These are the principal rules employed in the application of arithmetic to commerce. There are others, which, as no one who understands the principles here laid down can fail to see, are virtually contained in those which have been given. Such is what is commonly called the Rule of Exchange, for such questions as the following: If 20 shillings be worth 25½ francs, in France, what is £160 worth? This may evidently be done by the Rule of Three. The rules here given are those which are most useful in common life; and the student who understands them need not fear that any ordinary question will be above his reach. But no student must imagine that from this or any other book of arithmetic he will learn precisely the modes of operation which are best adapted to the wants of the particular kind of business in which his future life may be passed. There is no such thing as a set of rules which are at once most convenient for a butcher and a banker’s clerk, a grocer and an actuary, a farmer and a bill-broker; but a person with a good knowledge of the _principles_ laid down in this work, will be able to examine and meet his own future wants, or, at worst, to catch with readiness the manner in which those who have gone before him have done so for themselves. APPENDIX TO THE FIFTH EDITION OF DE MORGAN’S ELEMENTS OF ARITHMETIC. I. ON THE MODE OF COMPUTING. The rules in the preceding work are given in the usual form, and the examples are worked in the usual manner. But if the student really wish to become a ready computer, he should strictly follow the methods laid down in this Appendix; and he may depend upon it that he will thereby save himself trouble in the end, as well as acquire habits of quick and accurate calculation. I. In numeration learn to connect each primary decimal number, 10, 100, 1000, &c. not with the place in which the unit falls, but with the number of ciphers following. Call ten a _one-cipher_ number, a hundred a _two-cipher_ number, a million a _six-cipher_ number, and so on. If _five_ figures be cut off from a number, those that are left are hundred-thousands; for 100,000 is a _five-cipher_ number. Learn to connect tens, hundreds, thousands, tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands, millions, &c. with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, &c. in the mind. What is a _seventeen-cipher_ number? For every 6 in seventeen say _million_, for the remaining 5 say _hundred-thousand_: the answer is a hundred thousand millions of millions. If twelve places be cut off from the right of a number, what does the remaining number stand for?--_Answer_, As many millions of millions as there are units in it when standing by itself. II. After learning to count forwards and backwards with rapidity, as in 1, 2, 3, 4, &c. or 30, 29, 28, 27, &c., learn to count forwards or backwards by twos, threes, &c. up to nines at least, beginning from any number. Thus, beginning from four and proceeding by sevens, we have 4, 11, 18, 25, 32, &c., along which series you must learn to go as easily as along the series 1, 2, 3, 4, &c.; that is, as quick as you can pronounce the words. The act of addition must be made in the mind without assistance: you must not permit yourself to say, 4 and 7 are 11, 11 and 7 are 18, &c.; but only 4, 11, 18, &c. And it would be desirable, though not so necessary, that you should go back as readily as forward; by sevens for instance, from sixty, as in 60, 53, 46, 39, &c. III. Seeing a number and another both of one figure, learn to catch instantly the number you must add to the smaller to get the greater. Seeing 3 and 8, learn by practice to think of 5 without the necessity of saying 3 _from_ 8 _and there remains_ 5. And if the second number be the less, as 8 and 3, learn also by practice how to pass _up_ from 8 to the next number which ends with 3 (or 13), and to catch the necessary augmentation, _five_, without the necessity of formally undertaking in words to subtract 8 from 13. Take rows of numbers, such as 4 2 6 0 5 0 1 8 6 4 and practise this rule upon every figure and the next, not permitting yourself in this simple case ever to name the higher one. Thus, say 4 and 8 (4 first, 2 second, 4 from the next number that ends with 2, or 12, leaves 8), 2 and 4, 6 and 4, 0 and 5, 5 and 5, 0 and 1, 1 and 7, 8 and 8, 6 and 8. IV. Study the same exercise as the last one with two figures and one. Thus, seeing 27 and 6, pass from 27 up to the next number that ends with 6 (or 36), catch the 9 through which you have to pass, and allow yourself to repeat as much as “27 and 9 are 36.” Thus, the row of figures 17729638109 will give the following practice: 17 and 0 are 17; 77 and 5 are 82; 72 and 7 are 79; 29 and 7 are 36; 96 and 7 are 103; 63 and 5 are 68; 38 and 3 are 41; 81 and 9 are 90; 10 and 9 are 19. V. In a number of two figures, practise writing down the units at the moment that you are keeping the attention fixed upon the tens. In the preceding exercise, for instance, write down the results, repeating the tens with emphasis at the instant of writing down the units. VI. Learn the multiplication table so well as to name the product the instant the factors are seen; that is, until 8 and 7, or 7 and 8, suggest 56 at once, without the necessity of saying “7 times 8 are 56.” Thus looking along a row of numbers, as 39706548, learn to name the products of every successive pair of digits as fast as you can repeat them, namely, 27, 63, 0, 0, 30, 20, 32. VII. Having thoroughly mastered the last exercise, learn further, on seeing three numbers, to augment the product of the first and second by the third without any repetition of words. Practise until 3, 8, 4, for instance, suggest 3 times 8 and 4, or 28, without the necessity of saying “3 times 8 are 24, and 4 is 28.” Thus, 179236408 will suggest the following practice, 16, 65, 21, 12, 22, 24, 8. VIII. Now, carry the last still further, as follows: Seeing four figures, as 2, 7, 6, 9, catch up the product of the first and second, increased by the third, as in the last, without a helping word; name the result, and add the next figure, name the whole result, laying emphasis upon the tens. Thus, 2, 7, 6, 9, must immediately suggest “20 and 9 are 29.” The row of figures 773698974 will give the instances 52 and 6 are 58; 27 and 9 are 36; 27 and 8 are 35; 62 and 9 are 71; 81 and 7 are 88; 79 and 4 are 83. IX. Having four numbers, as 2, 4, 7, 9, vary the last exercise as follows: Catch the product of the first and second, increased by the third; but instead of adding the fourth, go up to the next number that ends with the fourth, as in exercise IV. Thus, 2, 4, 7, 9, are to suggest “15 and 4 are 19.” And the row of figures 1723968929 will afford the instances 9 and 4 are 13; 17 and 2 are 19; 15 and 1 are 16; 33 and 5 are 38; 62 and 7 are 69; 57 and 5 are 62; 74 and 5 are 79. X. Learn to find rapidly the number of times a digit is contained in given units and tens, with the remainder. Thus, seeing 8 and 53, arrive at and repeat “6 and 5 over.” Common short division is the best practice. Thus, in dividing 236410792 by 7, 7)236410792 --------- 33772970, remainder 2. All that is repeated should be 3 and 2; 3 and 5; 7 and 5; 7 and 2; 2 and 6; 9 and 4; 7 and 0; 0 and 2. In performing the several rules, proceed as follows: ADDITION. Not one word more than repeating the numbers written in the following process: the accented figure is the one to be written down; the doubly accented figure is carried (and don’t _say_ “carry 3,” but do it). 47963 1598 26316 54792 819 6686 ------ 138174 6, 15, 17, 23, 31, 3″ 4′; 11, 12, 21, 22, 31, 3″7′; 9, 17, 24, 27, 32, 4″1′; 10, 14, 20, 21, 2″8′; 7, 9, 1′3′. In verifying additions, instead of the usual way of omitting one line, adding without it, and then adding the line omitted, verify each column by adding it both upwards and downwards. SUBTRACTION. The following process is enough. The carriages, being always of _one_, need not be mentioned. From 79436258190 Take 58645962738 ----------- 20790295452 8 and 2′, 4 and 5′, 7 and 4′, 3 and 5′, 6 and 9′, 10 and 2′, 6 and 0′, 4 and 9′, 7 and 7′, 9 and 0′, 5 and 2′. It is useless to stop and say, 8 and 2 make 10; for as soon as the 2 is obtained, there is no occasion to remember what it came from. MULTIPLICATION. The following, put into words, is all that need be repeated in the multiplying part; the addition is then done as usual. The unaccented figures are carried. 670383 9876 ------- 4022298 18′, 49′, 22′, 2′, 42′, 4′0′, 4692681 21′, 58′, 26′, 2′, 49′, 4′6′, 5363064 24′, 66′, 30′, 3′, 56′, 5′3′, 6033447 27′, 74′, 34′, 3′, 63′, 6′0′. ---------- 6620702508 Verify each line of the multiplication and the final result by casting out the nines. (_Appendix_ II. p. 166.) It would be almost as easy, for a person who has well practised the 8th exercise, to add each line to the one before in the process, thus: 670383 9876 ------- 4022298 50949108 587255508 6620702508 8; 21 and 9 are 30′; 59 and 2 are 61′; 27 and 2 are 29; 2 and 2 are 4′; 49 and 0 are 49′; 46 and 4 are 5′0′. On the right is all the process of forming the second line, which completes the multiplication by 76, as the third line completes that by 876, and the fourth line that by 9876. DIVISION. Make each multiplication and the following subtraction in one step, by help of the process in the 9th exercise, as follows: 27693)441972809662(15959730 165042 265778 165410 269459 202226 83756 6772 The number of words by which 26577 is obtained from 165402 (the multiplier being 5) is as follows: 15 and 7′ are 2″2; 47 and 7′ are 5″4; 35 and 5′ are 4″0; 39 and 6′ are 4″5; 14 and 2′ are 16. The processes for extracting the square root, and for the solution of equations (_Appendix_ XI.), should be abbreviated in the same manner as the division.[57] [57] The teacher will find further remarks on this subject in the _Companion to the Almanac_ for 1844, and in the _Supplement to the Penny Cyclopædia_, article _Computation_. APPENDIX II. ON VERIFICATION BY CASTING OUT NINES AND ELEVENS. The process of _casting out the nines_, as it is called, is one which the young computer should learn and practise, as a check upon his computations. It is not a complete check, since if one figure were made too small, and another as much too great, it would not detect this double error; but as it is very unlikely that such a double error should take place, the check furnishes a strong presumption of accuracy. The proposition upon which this method depends is the following: If _a, b, c, d_ be four numbers, such that _a_ = _bc_ + _d_, and if _m_ be any other number whatsoever, and if _a, b, c, d_, severally divided by _m_, give the remainders _p, q, r, s_, then _p_ and _qr_ + _s_ give the same remainder when divided by _m_ (and perhaps are themselves equal). For instance, 334 = 17 × 19 + 11; divide these four numbers by 7, the remainders are 5, 3, 5, and 4. And 5 and 5 × 3 + 4, or 5 and 19, both leave the remainder 5 when divided by 7. Any number, therefore, being used as a divisor, may be made a check upon the correctness of an operation. To provide a check which may be most fit for use, we must take a divisor the remainder to which is most easily found. The most convenient divisors are 3, 9, and 11, of which 9 is far the most useful. As to the numbers 3 and 9, the remainder is always the same as that of the sum of the digits. For instance, required the remainder of 246120377 divided by 9. The sum of the digits is 2 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 2 + 0 + 3 + 7 + 7, or 32, which gives the remainder 5. But the easiest way of proceeding is by throwing out nines as fast as they arise in the sum. Thus, repeat 2, 6 (2 + 4), 12 (6 + 6), say 3 (throwing out 9), 4, 6, 9 (throw this away), 7, 14, (or throwing out the 9) 5. This is the remainder required, as would appear by dividing 246120377 by 9. A proof may be given thus: It is obvious that each of the numbers, 1, 10, 100, 1000, &c. divided by 9, leaves a remainder 1, since they are 1, 9 + 1, 99 + 1, &c. Consequently, 2, 20, 200, &c. leave the remainder 2; 3, 30, 300, the remainder 3; and so on. If, then, we divide, say 1764 by 9 in parcels, 1000 will be one more than an exact number of nines, 700 will be seven more, and 60 will be six more. So, then, from 1, 7, 6, 4, put together, and the nines taken out, comes the only remainder which can come from 1764. To apply this process to a multiplication: It is asserted, in page 32, that 10004569 × 3163 = 31644451747. In casting out the nines from the first, all that is necessary to repeat is, one, five, ten, one, _seven_; in the second, three, four, ten, one, _four_; in the third, three, four, ten, one, five, nine, four, nine, eight, twelve, three, ten, _one_. The remainders then are, 7, 4, 1. Now, 7 × 4 is 28, which, casting out the nines, gives 1, the same as the product. Again, in page 43, it is asserted that 23796484 = 130000 × 183 + 6484. Cast out the nines from 13000, 183, 6484, and we have 4, 3, and 4. Now, 4 × 3 + 4, with the nines cast out, gives 7; and so does 23796484. To avoid having to remember the result of one side of the equation, or to write it down, in order to confront it with the result of the other side, proceed as follows: Having got the remainder of the more complicated side, into which two or more numbers enter, subtract it from 9, and carry the remainder into the simple side, in which there is only one number. Then the remainder of that side ought to be 0. Thus, having got 7 from the left-hand of the preceding, take 2, the rest of 9, forget 7, and carry in 2 as a beginning to the left-hand side, giving 2, 4, 7, 14, 5, 11, 2, 6, 14, 5, 9, 0. Practice will enable the student to cast out nines with great rapidity. This process of casting out the nines does not detect any errors in which the remainder to 9 happens to be correct. If a process be tedious, and some additional check be desirable, the method of casting out _elevens_ may be followed after that of casting out the nines. Observe that 10 + 1, 100-1, 1000 + 1, 10000-1, &c. are all divisible by eleven. From this the following rule for the remainder of division by 11 may be deduced, and readily used by those who know the algebraical process of subtraction. For those who have not got so far, it may be doubted whether the rule can be made easier than the actual division by 11. Subtract the first figure from the second, the result from the third, the result from the fourth, and so on. The final result, or the rest of 11 if the figure be negative, is the remainder required. Thus, to divide 1642915 by 11, and find the remainder, we have 1 from 6, 5; 5 from 4,-1;-1 from 2, 3; 3 from 9, 6; 6 from 1,-5;-5 from 5, 10; and 10 is the remainder. But 164 gives-1, and 10 is the remainder; 164291 gives-5, and 6 is the remainder. With very little practice these remainders may be read as rapidly as the number itself. Thus, for 127619833424 need only be repeated, 1, 6, 0, 1, 8, 0, 3, 0, 4,-2, 6, and 6 is the remainder. When a question has been tried both by nines and elevens, there can be no error unless it be one which makes the result wrong by a number of times 99 exactly. APPENDIX III. ON SCALES OF NOTATION. We are so well accustomed to 10, 100, &c., as standing for ten, ten tens, &c., that we are not apt to remember that there is no reason why 10 might not stand for five, 100 for five fives, &c., or for twelve, twelve twelves, &c. Because we invent different columns of numbers, and let units in the different columns stand for collections of the units in the preceding columns, we are not therefore bound to allow of no collections except in tens. If 10 stood for 2, that is, if every column had its unit double of the unit in the column on the right, what we now represent by 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, &c., would be represented by 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 1100, &c. This is the _binary_ scale. If we take the _ternary_ scale, in which 10 stands for 3, we have 1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21, 22, 100, 101, 102, 110, &c. In the _quinary_ scale, in which 10 is five, 234 stands for 2 twenty-fives, 3 fives, and 4, or sixty-nine. If we take the _duodenary_ scale, in which 10 is twelve, we must invent new symbols for ten and eleven, because 10 and 11 now stand for twelve and thirteen; use the letters _t_ and _e_. Then 176 means 1 twelve-twelves, 7 twelves, and 6, or two hundred and thirty-four; and 1_te_ means two hundred and seventy-five. The number which 10 stands for is called the _radix_ of the _scale of notation_. To change a number from one scale into another, divide the number, written as in the first scale, by the number which is to be the radix of the new scale; repeat this division again and again, and the remainders are the digits required. For example, what, in the quinary scale, is that number which, in the decimal scale, is 17036? 5)17036 ----- 5)3407 Remʳ. 1 ---- 5)681 2 --- 5)136 1 --- 5)27 1 -- 5)5 2 - 5)1 0 - 0 1 _Answer_ 1021121 Quinary. Decimal. _Verification_, 1000000 means 15625 20000 1250 1000 125 100 25 20 10 1 1 ------ ----- 1021121 17036 The reason of this rule is easy. Our process of division is nothing but telling off 17036 into 3407 fives and 1 over; we then find 3407 fives to be 681 fives of fives and 2 _fives_ over. Next we form 681 fives of fives into 136 fives of fives of fives and 1 five of fives over; and so on. It is a useful exercise to multiply and divide numbers represented in other scales of notation than the common or decimal one. The rules are in all respects the same for all systems, _the number carried being always the radix of the system_. Thus, in the quinary system we carry fives instead of tens. I now give an example of multiplication and division: Quinary. Decimal. 42143 means 2798 1234 194 ------ ----- 324232 11192 232034 25182 134341 2798 42143 --------- ------ 114332222 542812 Duodecimal. Decimal. 4_t_9)76_t_4_e_08(16687 705)22610744(32071 4_t_9 1460 ----- 5074 2814 1394 2546 689 ----- 28_te_ 2546 ------ 3650 3320 ----- 3308 2_t_33 ------ 495 Another way of turning a number from one scale into another is as follows: Multiply the first digit by the _old_ radix _in the new scale_, and add the next digit; multiply the result again by the old radix in the new scale, and take in the next digit, and so on to the end, always using the radix of the scale you want to leave, and the notation of the scale you want to end in. Thus, suppose it required to turn 16687 (duodecimal) into the decimal scale, and 16432 (septenary) into the quaternary scale: 16687 16432 Duodecimals into Decimals. Septenaries into Quaternaries. 1 × 12 + 6 = 18 1 × 7 + 6 = 31 × 12 + 6 × 7 + 4 --- ---- 222 1133 × 12 + 8 × 7 + 3 ---- ----- 2672 22130 × 12 + 7 × 7 + 2 ------ ------- _Answer_ 32071 1021012 Owing to our division of a foot into 12 equal parts, the duodecimal scale often becomes very convenient. Let the square foot be also divided into 12 parts, each part is 12 square inches, and the 12th of the 12th is one square inch. Suppose, now, that the two sides of an oblong piece of ground are 176 feet 9 inches 7-12ths of an inch, and 65 feet 11 inches 5-12ths of an inch. Using the duodecimal scale, and _duodecimal fractions_, these numbers are 128·97 and 55·_e_5. Their product, the number of square feet required, is thus found: 128·97 55·_e_5 --------- 617_ee_ 116095 617_ee_ 617_ee_ ------------ 68_e_8144_e_ _Answer_, 68_e_8·144_e_ (duod.) square feet, or 11660 square feet 16 square inches ⁴/₁₂ and ¹¹/₁₄₄ of a square inch. It would, however, be exact enough to allow 2-hundredths of a foot for every quarter of an inch, an additional hundredth for every 3 inches,[58] and 1-hundredth more if there be a 12th or 2-12ths above the quarter of an inch. Thus, 9⁷/₁₂ inches should be ·76 + ·03 + ·01, or ·80, and 11⁵/₁₂ would be ·95; and the preceding might then be found decimally as 176·8 × 65·95 as 11659·96 square feet, near enough for every practical purpose. [58] And at discretion one hundredth more for a large fraction of three inches. APPENDIX IV. ON THE DEFINITION OF FRACTIONS. The definition of a fraction given in the text shews that ⁷/₉, for instance, is the _ninth_ part of _seven_, which is shewn to be the same thing as _seven-ninths_ of a unit. But there are various modes of speech under which a fraction may be signified, all of which are more or less in use. 1. In ⁷/₉ we have the 9th part of 7. 2. 7-9ths of a unit. 3. The fraction which 7 is of 9. 4. The times and parts of a time (in this case part of a time only) which 7 contains 9. 5. The multiplier which turns _nines_ into _sevens_. 6. The _ratio_ of 7 to 9, or the _proportion_ of 7 to 9. 7. The multiplier which alters a number in the ratio of 9 to 7. 8. The 4th proportional to 9, 1, and 7. The first two views are in the text. The third is deduced thus: If we divide 9 into 9 equal parts, each is 1, and 7 of the parts are 7; consequently the fraction which 7 is of 9 is ⁷/₉. The fourth view follows immediately: For _a time_ is only a word used to express one of the repetitions which take place in multiplication, and we allow ourselves, by an easy extension of language, to speak of a portion of a number as being that number taken a _part of a time_. The fifth view is nothing more than a change of words: A number reduced to ⁷/₉ of its amount has every 9 converted into a 7, and any fraction of a 9 which may remain over into the corresponding fraction of 7. This is completely proved when we prove the equation ⁷/₉ of _a_ = 7 times _a_/9. The sixth, seventh, and eighth views are illustrated in the chapter on proportion. When the student comes to algebra, he will find that, in all the applications of that science, fractions such as _a_/_b_ most frequently require that _a_ and _b_ should be themselves supposed to be fractions. It is, therefore, of importance that he should learn to accommodate his views of a fraction to this more complicated case. 2½ Suppose we take -----. 4³/₅ We shall find that we have, in this case, a better idea of the views from and after the third inclusive, than of the first and second, which are certainly the most simple ways of conceiving ⁷/₉. We have no notion of the (4³/₅)th part of 2½, 1 ( 3 ) nor of 2 ---(4---)ths 2 ( 5 ) of a unit; indeed, we coin a new species of adjective when we talk of the (4³/₅)th part of anything. But we can readily imagine that 2½ is some fraction of 4³/₅; that the first is _some_ part of a time the second; that there must be _some_ multiplier which turns every 4³/₅ in a number into 2½; and so on. Let us now see whether we can invent a distinct mode of applying the first and second views to such a compound fraction as the above. We can easily imagine a fourth part of a length, and a fifth part, meaning the lines of which 4 and 5 make up the length in question; and there is also in existence a length of which four lengths and two-fifths of a length make up the original length in question. For instance, we might say that 6, 6, 2 is a division of 14 into 2⅓ equal parts--2 equal parts, 6, 6, and a third of a part, 2. So we might agree to say, that the (2⅓)th, or (2⅓)rd, or (2⅓)st (the reader may coin the adjective as he pleases) part of 14 is 6. If we divide the line A B into eleven equal parts in C, D, E, &c., we must then say that A C is the 11th part, [Illustration] A D the (5½)th, A E the (3⅔)th, A F the (2¾)th, A G the (2⅕)th, A H the (1⅚)th, A I the (1⁴/₇)th, A K the (1⅜)th, A L the (1²/₉)th, A M the (1⅒)th, and A B itself the 1st part of A B. The reader may refuse the language if he likes (though it is not so much in defiance of etymology as talking of _multiplying_ by ½); but when A B is called 1, he must either call A F 1/(2¾), or make one definition of one class of fractions and another of another. Whatever abbreviations they may choose, all persons will agree that _a_/_b_ is a direction to find such a fraction as, repeated _b_ times, will give 1, and then to take that fraction _a_ times. So, to get 2½/4⅗, the simplest way is to divide the whole unit into 46 parts; 10 of these parts, repeated 4⅗ times, give the whole. The [Illustration] 4⅗th is then ¹⁰/₄₆, and 2½ such parts is ²⁵/₄₆, or A C. The student should try several examples of this mode of interpreting complex fractions. But what are we to say when the denominator itself is less than unity, as in 3¼/⅖? Are we to have a (⅖)th part of a unit? and what is it? Had there been a 5 in the denominator, we should have taken the part of which 5 will make a unit. As there is ⅖ in the denominator, we must take the part of which ⅖ will be a unit. That part is larger than a unit; it is 2½ units; 2½ is that of which ⅖ is 1. The above fraction then directs us to repeat 2½ units 3¼ times. By extending our word ‘multiplication’ to the taking of a part of a time, all multiplications are also divisions, and all divisions multiplications, and all the terms connected with either are subject to be applied to the results of the other. If 2⅓ yards cost 3½ shillings, how much does one yard cost? In such a case as this, the student looks at a more simple question. If 5 yards cost 10 shillings, he sees that each yard costs ¹⁰/₅, or 2 shillings, and, concluding that the same process will give the true result when the data are fractional, he forms 3½/2⅓, reduces it by rules to ³/₂ or 1½, and concludes that 1 yard costs 18 pence. The answer happens to be correct; but he is not to suppose that this rule of copying for fractions whatever is seen to be true of integers is one which requires no demonstration. In the above question we want money which, repeated 2⅓ times, shall give 3½ shillings. If we divide the shilling into 14 equal parts, 6 of these parts repeated 2⅓ times give the shilling. To get 3½ times as much by the same repetition, we must take 3½ of these 6 parts at each step, or 21 parts. Hence, ²¹/₁₄, or 1½, is the number of shillings in the price. APPENDIX V. ON CHARACTERISTICS. When the student comes to use logarithms, he will find what follows very useful. In the mean while, I give it merely as furnishing a rapid rule for finding the place of a decimal point in the quotient before the division is commenced. When a bar is written over a number, thus, 7︤ let the number be called negative, and let it be thus used: Let it be augmented by additions of its own species, and diminished by subtractions; thus, 7︤ and 2︤ give 9︤, and let 7︤ with 2︤ subtracted give 5︤. But let the _addition_ of a number without the bar _diminish_ the negative number, and the _subtraction increase_ it. Thus, 7︤ and 4 are 3︤, 7︤ and 12 make 5, 7︤ with 8 subtracted is 1︦5. In fact, consider 1, 2, 3, &c., as if they were gains, and 1︤, 2︤, 3︤, as if they were losses: let the addition of a gain or the removal of a loss be equivalent things, and also the removal of a gain and the addition of a loss. Thus, when we say that 4︤ diminished by 1︦1 gives 7, we say that a loss of 4 incurred at the moment when a loss of 11 is removed, is, on the whole, equivalent to a gain of 7; and saying that 4︤ diminished by 2 is 6︤, we say that a loss of 4, accompanied by the removal of a gain of 2, is altogether a loss of 6. By the _characteristic_ of a number understand as follows: When there are places before the decimal point, it is one less than the number of such places. Thus, 3·214, 1·0083, 8 (which is 8·00 ...) 9·999, all have 0 for their characteristics. But 17·32, 48, 93·116, all have 1; 126·03 and 126 have 2; 11937264·666 has 7. But when there are no places before the decimal point, look at the first decimal place which is significant, and make the characteristic negative accordingly. Thus, ·612, ·121, ·9004, in all of which significance begins in the first decimal place, have the characteristic 1︤; but ·018 and ·099 have 2︤; ·00017 has 4︤; ·000000001 has 9︤. To find the characteristic of a quotient, subtract the characteristic of the divisor from that of the dividend, carrying one before subtraction if the first significant figures of the divisor are greater than those of the dividend. For instance, in dividing 146·08 by ·00279. The characteristics are 2 and 3︤; and 2 with 3︤ removed would be 5. But on looking, we see that the first significant figures of the divisor, 27, taken by themselves, and without reference to their local value, mean a larger number than 14, the first two figures of the dividend. Consequently, to 3︤ we carry 1 before subtracting, and it then becomes 2︤, which, taken from 2, gives 4. And this 4 is the characteristic of the quotient, so that the quotient has 5 places before the decimal point. Or, if _abcdef_ be the first figures of the quotient, the decimal point must be thus placed, _abcde·f_. But if it had been to divide ·00279 by 146·08, no carriage would have been required; and 3︤ diminished by 2 is 5︤; that is, the first significant figure of the quotient is in the 5th place. The quotient, then, has ·0000 before any significant figure. A few applications of this rule will make it easy to do it in the head, and thus to assign the meaning of the first figure of the quotient even before it is found. APPENDIX VI. ON DECIMAL MONEY. Of all the simplifications of commercial arithmetic, none is comparable to that of expressing shillings, pence, and farthings as decimals of a pound. The rules are thereby put almost upon as good a footing as if the country possessed the advantage of a real decimal coinage. Any fraction of a pound sterling may be decimalised by rules which can be made to give the result at once. Two shillings is £·100 | One shilling is £·050 | Sixpence is £·025 | One farthing is £·001 | 04⅙ Thus, every pair of shillings is a unit in the first decimal place; an odd shilling is a 50 in the second and third places; a farthing is so nearly the thousandth part of a pound, that to say one farthing is ·001, two farthings is ·002, &c., is so near the truth that it makes no error in the first three decimals till we arrive at sixpence, and then 24 farthings is exactly ·025 or 25 thousandths. But 25 farthings is ·026, 26 farthings is ·027, &c. Hence the rule for the _first three places_ is _One in the first for every pair of shillings; 50 in the second and third for the odd shilling, if any; and 1 for every farthing additional, with 1 extra for sixpence._ Thus, 0_s._ 3½_d._ = £·014 0_s._ 7¾_d._ = £·032 1_s._ 2½_d._ = £·060 1_s._ 11¼_d._ = £·096 2_s._ 6_d._ = £·125 2_s._ 9½_d._ = £·139 3_s._ 2¾_d._ = £·161 13_s._ 10¾_d._ = £·694 In the fourth and fifth places, and those which follow, it is obvious that we have no produce from any farthings except those above sixpence. For at every sixpence, ·00004⅙ is converted into ·001, and this has been already accounted for. Consequently, to fill up the _fourth and fifth_ places, _Take 4 for every farthing[59] above the last sixpence, and an additional 1 for every six farthings, or three halfpence._ [59] The student should remember all the multiples of 4 up to 4 × 25, or 100. The remaining places arise altogether from ·00000⅙ for every farthing above the last three halfpence; for at every three halfpence complete, ·00000⅙ is converted into ·00001, and has been already accounted for. Consequently, to fill up _all the places after the fifth_, _Let the number of farthings above the last three halfpence be a numerator, 6 a denominator, and annex the figures of the corresponding decimal fraction._ It may be easily remembered that The figures of ¹/₆ are 166666... ” ²/₆ ... 333333... ” ³/₆ ... 5 ” ⁴/₆ ... 666666... ” ⁵/₆ ... 833333... 0_s._ 3½_d._ = ·014|58|3333... 0_s._ 7¾_d._ = ·032|29|1666... 1_s._ 2½_d._ = ·060|41|6666... 1_s._ 11¼_d._ = ·096|87|5 2_s._ 6_d._ = ·125|00|0000... 2_s._ 9½_d._ = ·139|58|3333... 3_s._ 2¾_d._ = ·161|45|83333... 13_s._ 10¾_d._ = ·694|79|1666... The following examples will shew the use of this rule, if the student will also work them in the common way. To turn pounds, &c., into farthings: Multiply the pounds by 960, or by 1000-40, or by 1000(1-⁴/₁₀₀); that is, from 1000 times the pounds subtract 4 per cent of itself. Thus, required the number of farthings in £1663. 11. 9¾. 1663·590625 × 1000 = 1663590·625 4 per cent of this, 66543·625 ----------- No. of farthings required, 1597047 What is 47½ per cent of £166. 13. 10 and ·6148 of £2971. 16. 9? 166·691 -------- 40 p. c. 66·6764 5 p. c. 8·3346 2½ p. c. 4·1673 -------- 79·1783 £79.3.6¾ 2971·837 --------- ·6 1783·1022 ·01 29·7184 ·004 11·8873 ·0008 2·3775 --------- 1827·0854 £1827.1.8½ The inverse rule for turning the decimal of a pound into shillings, pence, and farthings, is obviously as follows: _A pair of shillings for every unit in the first place; an odd shilling for 50 (if there be 50) in the second and third places; and a farthing for every thousandth left, after abating 1 if the number of thousandths so left exceed 24._ The direct rule (with three places) gives too little, the inverse rule too much, except at the end of a sixpence, when both are accurate. Thus, £·183 is rather less than 3_s._ 8_d._, and 6_s._ 4¾_d._ is rather greater than £319; or when the two do not exactly agree, the _common money is the greatest_. But £·125 and £·35 are exactly 2_s._ 6_d._ and 7_s._ Required the price of 17 cwt. 81 lb. 13½ oz. at £3.11.9¾ per cwt. true to the hundredth of a farthing. 3·590625 17 --------- 61·040625 lb. 56 ½ 1·795313 16 ⅐ ·512946 7 ⅛ ·224414 2 ⅛ ·064118 oz. 8 ¼ ·016029 4 ½ ·008015 1 ¼ ·002004 ½ ½ ·001002 --------- £63·664466 £63.13.3½ Three men, A, B, C, severally invest £191.12.7¾, £61.14.8, and £122.1.9½ in an adventure which yields £511.12.6½. How ought the proceeds to be divided among them? A, 191·63229 B, 61·73333 C, 122·08958 Produce of £1. --------- 375·45520)511·62708(1·362686 136·17188 23·53532 1·00801 25710 3183 180 1·362686 1·362686 1·362686 92·236191 33·33716 85·980221 --------- --------- --------- 1·362686 8·17612 1·362686 1·226417 13627 272537 13627 9538 27254 8176 409 1090 409 41 122 27 4 7 3 -------- 1 1 8·41231 --------- --------- 1·663697 2·611346 261·1346 ... A’s share £261.2.8¼ 84·1231 ... B’s ... 84.2.5¾ 166·3697 ... C’s ... 166.7.4¾ -------- ------------- 511·6274 £511.2.6¾ If ever the fraction of a farthing be wanted, remember that the _coinage_-result is larger than the decimal of a pound, when we use only three places. From 1000 times the decimal take 4 per cent, and we get the exact number of farthings, and we need only look at the decimal then left to set the preceding right. Thus, in 134·6 123·1 369·7 5·38 4·92 14·79 ----- ------ ------ ·22 ·18 ·91 we see that (if we use four decimals only) the pence of the above results are nearly 8_d._ ·22 of a farthing, 5½_d._ ·18, and 4½_d._ ·91. A man can pay £2376. 4. 4½, his debts being £3293. 11. 0¾. How much per cent can he pay, and how much in the pound? 3293·553)2376·2180(·7214756 70·7309 4·8598 1·5662 2488 183 18 _Answer_, £72. 2.11½ per cent. 0.14.5¼ per pound. APPENDIX VII. ON THE MAIN PRINCIPLE OF BOOK-KEEPING. A brief notice of the principle on which accounts are kept (when they are _properly_ kept) may perhaps be useful to students who are learning book-keeping, as the treatises on that subject frequently give too little in the way of explanation. Any person who is engaged in business must desire to know accurately, whenever an investigation of the state of his affairs is made. 1, What he had at the commencement of the account, or immediately after the last investigation was made; 2, What he has gained and lost in the interval in all the several branches of his business; 3, What he is now worth. From the first two of these things he obviously knows the third. In the interval between two investigations, he may at any one time desire to know how any one account stands. An _account_ is a recital of all that has happened, in reference to any class of dealings, since the last investigation. It can only consist of receipts and expenditures, and so it is said to have two sides, a _debtor_ and a _creditor_ side. All accounts are kept in _money_. If goods be bought, they are estimated by the money paid for them. If a debtor give a bill of exchange, being a promise to pay a certain sum at a certain time, it is put down as worth that sum of money. All the tools, furniture, horses, &c. used in the business are rated at their value in money. All the actual coin, bank-notes, &c., which are in or come in, being the only money in the books which really is money, is called _cash_. The accounts are kept as if every different sort of account belonged to a separate person, and had an interest of its own, which every transaction either promotes or injures. If the student find that it helps him, he may imagine a clerk to every account: one to take charge of, and regulate, the actual cash; another for the bills which the house is to receive when due; another for those which it is to pay when due; another for the cloth (if the concern deal in cloth); another for the sugar (if it deal in sugar); one for every person who has an account with the house; one for the profits and losses; and so on. All these clerks (or accounts) belonging to one merchant, must account to him in the end--must either produce all they have taken in charge, or relieve themselves by shewing to whom it went. For all that they have received, for every responsibility they have undertaken to _the concern itself_, they are bound, or are _debtors_; for everything which has passed out of charge, or about which they are relieved from answering _to the concern_, they are unbound, or are _creditors_. These words must be taken in a very wide sense by any one to whom book-keeping is not to be a mystery. Thus, whenever any account assumes responsibility to any parties _out of the concern_, it must be creditor in the books, and debtor whenever it discharges any other parties of their responsibility. But whenever an account removes responsibility from any other account in the same books it is debtor, and creditor whenever it imposes the same. To whom are all these parties, or accounts, bound, and from whom are they released? Undoubtedly the merchant himself, or, more properly, the _balance-clerk_, presently mentioned. But it is customary to say that the accounts are debtors _to_ each other, and creditors _by_ each other. Thus, cash _debtor_ to bills receivable, means that the cash account (or the clerk who keeps it) is bound to answer for a sum which was paid on a bill of exchange due to the house. At full length it would be: “Mr. C (who keeps the cash-box) has received, and is answerable for, this sum which has been paid in by Mr. A, when he paid his bill of exchange.” On the other hand, the corresponding entry in the account of bills receivable runs--bills receivable, _creditor_ by cash. At full length: “Mr. B (who keeps the bills receivable) is freed from all responsibility for Mr. A’s bill, which he once held, by handing over to Mr. C, the cash-clerk, the money with which Mr. A took it up.” Bills receivable creditor _by_ cash is intelligible, but cash debtor _to_ bills receivable is a misnomer. The cash account is debtor _to the merchant by_ the sum received for the bill, and it should be cash debtor _by_ bill receivable. The fiction of debts, not one of which is ever paid to the party _to_ whom it is said to be owing, though of no consequence in practice, is a stumbling-block to the learner; but he must keep the phrase, and remember its true meaning. The account which is made _debtor_, or bound, is said to be _debited_; that which is made _creditor_, or released, is said to be _credited_. All who receive must be _debited_; all who give must be _credited_. No cancel is ever made. If cash received be afterwards repaid, the sum paid is not struck off the receipts (or debtor-side of the cash account), but a discharge, or credit, is written on the expenditure (or credit) side. The book in which the accounts are kept is called a _ledger_. It has double columns, or else the debtor-side is on one page, and the creditor side on the opposite, of each account. The debtor-side is always the left. Other books are used, but they are only to help in keeping the ledger correct. Thus there may be a _waste-book_, in which all transactions are entered as they occur, in common language; a _journal_, in which the transactions described in the waste-book are entered at stated periods, in the language of the ledger. The items entered in the journal have references to the pages of the ledger to which they are carried, and the items in the ledger have also references to the pages of the journal from which they come; and by this mode of reference it is easy to make a great deal of abbreviation in the ledger. Thus, when it happens, in making up the journal to a certain date, that several different sums were paid or received at or near the same time, the totals may be entered in the ledger, and the cash account may be made debtor to, or creditor by, sundry accounts, or sundries; the sundry accounts being severally credited or debited for their shares of the whole. The only book that need be explained is the ledger. All the other books, and the manner in which they are kept, important as they may be, have nothing to do with the main principle of the method. Let us, then, suppose that all the items are entered at once in the ledger as they arise. It has appeared that every item is entered twice. If A pay on account of B, there is an entry, “A, creditor by B;” and another, “B, debtor to A.” This is what is called _double-entry_; and the consequence of it is, that the sum of all the debtor items in the whole book is equal to the sum of all the creditor items. For what is the first set but the second with the items in a different order? If it were convenient, one entry of each sum might be made a double-entry. The multiplication table is called a table of _double-entry_, because 42, for instance, though it occurs only once, appears in two different aspects, namely, as 6 times 7 and as 7 times 6. Suppose, for example, that there are five accounts, A, B, C, D, E, and that each account has one transaction of its own with every other account; and let the debits be in the _columns_, the credits in the _rows_, as follows: -------------+------+------+------+------+------+ Debtor | A | B | C | D | E | -------------+------+------+------+------+------+ A, Creditor | | 23 | 19 | 32 | 4 | +------+------+------+------+------+ B, Creditor | 17 | | 6 | 11 | 25 | +------+------+------+------+------+ C, Creditor | 9 | 41 | | 10 | 2 | +------+------+------+------+------+ D, Creditor | 14 | 28 | 16 | | 3 | +------+------+------+------+------+ E, Creditor | 15 | 4 | 60 | 1 | | +------+------+------+------+------+ Here the 16 is supposed to appear in D’s account as D creditor by C, and in C’s account as C debtor to D. And to say that the sum of debtor items is the same as that of creditor items, is merely to say that the preceding numbers give the same sum, whether the rows or the columns be first added up. If it be desired to close the ledger when it stands as above, the following is the way the accounts will stand: the lines in italics will presently be explained. A, Debtor. | A, Creditor.| B, Debtor. | B, Creditor. To B 17 | By B 23 | To A 23 | By A 17 To C 9 | By C 19 | To C 41 | By C 6 To D 14 | By D 32 | To D 28 | By D 11 To E 15 | By E 4 | To E 4 | By E 25 To Balance 23 | | | By Balance 37 -- | -- | -- | -- 78 | 78 | 96 | 96 --------------+------------------+---------------+---------------+ C, Debtor. | C, Creditor. | D, Debtor. | D, Creditor. To A 19 | By A 9 | To A 32 | By A 14 To B 6 | By B 41 | To B 11 | By B 28 To D 16 | By D 10 | To C 10 | By C 16 To E 60 | By E 2 | To E 1 | By E 3 | By Balance 39 | To Balance 7 | --- | --- | -- | -- 101 | 101 | 61 | 61 --------------+------------------+-----------------+--------------- E, Debtor. | E, Creditor. | Balance, Debtor.| Balance, Cred. To A 4 | By A 15 | To B 37 | By A 23 To B 25 | By B 4 | To C 39 | By D 7 To C 2 | By C 60 | | By E 46 | | -- | -- To D 3 | By D 1 | 76 | 76 To Balance 46 | | | -- | -- | | 80 | 80 | | In all the part of the above which is printed in Roman letters we see nothing but the preceding table repeated. But when all the accounts have been completed, and no more entries are left to be made, there remains the last process, which is termed _balancing the ledger_. To get an idea of this, suppose a new clerk, who goes round all the accounts, collecting debts and credits, and taking them all upon himself, that he alone may be entitled to claim the debts and to be responsible for the assets of the concern. To this new clerk, whom I will call the _balance-clerk_, every account gives up what it has, whether the same be debt or credit. The cash-clerk gives up all the cash; the clerks of the two kinds of bills give up all their documents, whether bills receivable or entries of bills payable (remember that any entry against which there is money set down in the books counts as money when given up, that is, as money due or money owing); the clerks of the several accounts of goods give up all their unsold remainders at cost prices; the clerks of the several personal accounts give up vouchers for the sums owing to or from the several parties; and so on. But where more has been paid out than received, the balance-clerk adjusts these accounts by giving instead of receiving; in fact, he so acts as to make the debtor and creditor sides of the accounts he visits equal in amount. For instance, the A account is indebted to the concern 55, while payments or discharges to the amount of 78 have been made by it. The balance-clerk accordingly hands over 23 to that account, for which it becomes debtor, while the balance enters itself as creditor to the same amount. But in the B account there is 96 of receipt, and only 59 of payment or discharge. The balance-clerk then receives 37 from this account, which is therefore credited by balance, while the balance acknowledges as much of debt. The balance account must, of course, exactly balance itself, if the accounts be all right; for of all the equal and opposite entries of which the ledger consists, so far as they do not balance one another, one goes into one side of the balance account, and the other into the other. Thus the balance account becomes a test of the accuracy of one part of the work: if its two sides do not give the same sums, either there have been entries which have not had their corresponding balancing entries correctly made, or else there has been error in the additions. But since the balance account must thus always give the _same sum_ on both sides, and since _balance debtor_ implies what is favourable to the concern, and _balance creditor_ what is unfavourable, does it not appear as if this system could only be applied to cases in which there is neither loss nor gain? This brings us to the two accounts in which are entered all that the concern _began with_, and all that it _gains or loses_--the _stock account_, and the _profit-and-loss account_. In order to make all that there was to begin with a matter of double entry, the opening of the ledger supposes the merchant himself to put his several clerks in charge of their several departments. In the stock account, _stock_, which here stands for the owner of the books, is made creditor by all the property, and debtor by all the liabilities; while the several accounts are made debtors for all they take from the stock, and creditors by all the responsibilities they undertake. Suppose, for instance, there are £500 in cash at the commencement of the ledger. There will then appear that the merchant has handed over to the cash-box £500, and in the stock account will appear, “Stock creditor by cash, £500;” while in the cash account will appear, “Cash debtor to stock, £500.” Suppose that at the beginning there is a debt outstanding of £50 to Smith and Co., then there will appear in the stock account, “Stock debtor to Smith and Co. £50,” and in Smith and Co.’s account will appear “Smith and Co. creditors by stock, £50.” Thus there is double entry for all that the concern begins with by this contrivance of the stock account. The account to which everything is placed for which an actual equivalent is not seen in the books is the _profit-and-loss_ account. This profit-and-loss account, or the clerk who keeps it, is made answerable for every loss, and the supposed cause of every gain. This account, then, becomes debtor for every loss, and creditor by every gain. If goods be damaged to the amount of £20 by accident, and a loss to that amount occur in their sale, say they cost £80 and sell for £60 cash, it is clear that there is an entry “Cash debtor to goods £60,” and “Goods creditor by cash £60.” Now, there is an entry of £80 somewhere to the debit of the goods for cash laid out, or bills given, for the whole of the goods. It would affect the accuracy of the accounts to take no notice of this; for when the balance-clerk comes to adjust this account, he would find he receives £20 less than he might have reckoned upon, without any explanation of the reason; and there would be a failure of the principle of double-entry. Since it is convenient that the balance account of the goods should merely represent the stock in hand at the close, the account of goods therefore lays the responsibility of £20 upon the profit-and-loss account, or there is the entry “Goods creditor by profit-and-loss, £20,” and also “Profit-and-loss debtor to goods, £20.” Again, in all payments which are not to bring in a specific return, such as house and trade expenses, wages, &c. these several accounts are supposed to adjust matters with the profit-and-loss account before the balance begins. Thus, suppose the outgoings from the mere premises occupied exceed anything those premises yield by £200, or the debits of the house account exceed its credits by £200, the account should be balanced by transferring the responsibility to the profit-and-loss account, under the entries “House expenses creditor by profit-and-loss, £200”, “Profit-and-loss debtor to house expenses, £200.” In this way the profit-and-loss account steps in from time to time before the balance account commences its operations, in order that that same balance account may consist of _nothing but the necessary matters of account for the next year’s ledger_. This _transference of accounts_, or transfusion of one account into another, requires attentive consideration. The receiving account becomes creditor for the credits, and debtor for the debits, of the transmitting account. The rule, therefore, is: Make the transmitting account balance itself, and, on whichever side it is necessary to enter a balancing sum, make the account debtor or creditor, as the case may be, to the receiving account, and the latter creditor or debtor to the former. Thus, suppose account A is to be transferred to account B, and the latter is to arrange with the balance account. If the two stand as in Roman letters, the processes in Italic letters will occur before the final close. A, Debtor. | A, Creditor. | B, Debtor. | B, Creditor. | | | To sundries £100|By sundries £500|To sundries £600|By sundries £400 To B . . . 400| |To Balance 200|By A . . . 400 ----| ----| ----| ---- £500| £500| £800| £800 And the entry in the balance account will be, “Creditor by B, £200,” shewing that, on these two accounts, the credits exceed the debits by £200. Still, before the balance account is made up, it is desirable that the profit-and-loss account should be transferred to the stock account; for the profit and loss of this year is of no moment as a part of next year’s ledger, except in so far as it affects the stock at the commencement of the latter. Let this be done, and the balance account may then be made in the form required. The stock account and the profit-and-loss account, the latter being the only direct channel of alteration for the former, differ in a peculiar manner[60] from the other preliminary accounts, and the balance account is a species of umpire. They represent the merchant: their interests are his interests; he is solvent upon the excess of their credits over their debits, insolvent upon the excess of their debits over their credits. It is exactly the reverse in all the other accounts. If a malicious person were to get at the ledger, and put on a cipher to the pounds in various items, with a view of making the concern appear worse than it really is, he would make his alterations on the _debtor_ sides of the stock and profit-and-loss accounts, and on the _creditor_ sides of all the others. Accordingly, in the balance account, the net stock, after the incorporation of the profit-and-loss account, appears on the _creditor_ side (if not, it should be called amount of _insolvency_, not _stock_), and the debts of the concern appear on the same side. But on the debit side of the balance account appear all the assets of the concern (for which the balance-clerk is debtor to the clerks from whom he has taken them). [60] The treatises on book-keeping have described this difference in as peculiar a manner. They call these accounts the _fictitious accounts_. Now they represent the merchant himself; their credits are gain to the business, their debits losses or liabilities. If the terms real and fictitious are to be used at all, they are the _real_ accounts, end all the others are as _fictitious_ as the clerks whom we have supposed to keep them. The young student must endeavour to get the enlarged view of the words debtor and creditor which is requisite, and must then learn by practice (for nothing else will give it) facility in allotting the actual entries in the waste-book to the proper sides of the proper accounts. I do not here pretend to give more than such a view of the subject as may assist him in studying a treatise on book-keeping, which he will probably find to contain little more than examples. APPENDIX VIII. ON THE REDUCTION OF FRACTIONS TO OTHERS OF NEARLY EQUAL VALUE. There is a useful method of finding fractions which shall be nearly equal to a given fraction, and with which the computer ought to be acquainted. Proceed as in the rule for finding the greatest common measure of the numerator and denominator, and bring all the quotients into a line. Then write down, 1 2nd Quot. -------- ------------------------ 1st Quot. 1st Quot. × 2d Quot. + 1 Then take the third quotient, multiply the numerator and denominator of the second by it, and add to the products the preceding numerator and denominator. Form a third fraction with the results for a numerator and denominator. Then take the fourth quotient, and proceed with the third and second fractions in the same way; and so on till the quotients are exhausted. For example, let the fraction be ⁹¹³¹/₁₃₁₂₈. 9131)13128(1, 2 1137 3997(3, 1 551 586(1, 15 201 35(1, 2 26 9(1, 8 8 1 This is the process for finding the greatest common measure of 9131 and 13128 in its most compact form, and the quotients and fractions are: 1 2 3 1 1 15 1 2 1 8 1 2 7 9 16 249 265 779 1044 9131 --- --- --- --- ---- ----- ----- ----- ------ ------ 1 3 10 13 23 358 381 1120 1501 13128 It will be seen that we have thus a set of fractions ending with the original fraction itself, and formed by the above rule, as follows: 1 1 1st Fraction = -------- = --- 1st Quot. 1 2d Quot. 2 2d Fraction = ------------------------ = --- 1st Quot. × 2d Quot. + 1 3 2d Numʳ. × 3d Quot. + 1st Numʳ. 2 × 3 + 1 7 3d Fraction = ------------------------------- = --------- = --- 2d Denʳ. × 3d Quot. + 1st Denʳ. 3 × 3 + 1 10 3d Numʳ. × 4th Quot. + 2d Numʳ. 7 × 1 + 2 9 4th Fraction = ------------------------------- = --------- = ---; 3d Denʳ. × 4th Quot. + 2d Denʳ. 10 × 1 + 3 13 and so on. But we have done something more than merely reascend to the original fraction by means of the quotients. The set of fractions, ¹/₁, ²/₃, ⁷/₁₀, ⁹/₁₃, &c. are continually approaching in value to the original fraction, the first being too great, the second too small, the third too great, and so on alternately, but each one being nearer to the given fraction than any of those before it. Thus, ¹/₁ is too great, and ²/₃ is too small; but ²/₃ is not so much too small as ¹/₁ is too great. And again, ⁷/₁₀, though too great, is not so much too great as ²/₃ is too small. Moreover, the difference of any of the fractions from the original fraction is never greater than a fraction having unity for its numerator and the product of the denominator and the next denominator for its denominator. Thus, ¹/₁ does not err by so much as ¹/₃, nor ²/₃ by so much as ¹/₃₀, nor ⁷/₁₀ by so much as ¹/₁₃₀, nor ⁹/₁₃ by so much as ¹/₂₉₉, &c. Lastly, no fraction of a less numerator and denominator can come so near to the given fraction as any one of the fractions in the list. Thus, no fraction with a less numerator than 249, and a less denominator than 358, can come so near to 9131 249 ----- as ---. 13128 358 The reader may take any example for himself, and the test of the accuracy of the process is the ultimate return to the fraction begun with. Another test is as follows: The numerator of the difference of any two consecutive approximating fractions ought to be unity. Thus, in our instance, we have ¹⁶/₂₃ and ²⁴⁹/₃₅₈, which, with a common denominator, 23 × 358, have 5728 and 5727 for their numerators. As another example, let us examine this question: The length of the year is 365·24224 days, which is called in common life 365¼ days. Take the fraction ²⁴²²⁴/₁₀₀₀₀₀, and proceed as in the rule. 24224)100000(4, 7, 1, 4, 9, 2 2496 3104 64 608 0 32 1 7 8 39 359 757 --- --- --- ---- ---- ---- 4 29 33 161 1482 3125 and ⁷⁵⁷/₃₁₂₅ is ·24224 in its lowest terms. Hence, it appears that the excess of the year over 365 days amounts to about 1 day in 4 years, which is not wrong by so much as 1 day in 116 years; more accurately, to 7 days in 29 years, which is not wrong by so much as 1 day in 957 years; more accurately still, to 8 days in 33 years, which is not wrong by so much as 1 day in 5313 years; and so on. This method may be applied to finding fractions nearly equal to the square roots of integers, in the following manner: __ √43 = 6 + ... 6 | 1 5 4 5 5 4 5 1 6 6 |1 5 4, &c. 1 | 7 6 3 9 2 9 3 6 7 1 |7 6 3, &c. --+----------------------+------ 6 | 1 1 3 1 5 1 3 1 1 1 2|1 1 3, &c. Set down the number whose square root is wanted, say 43. This square root is 6 and a fraction. Set down the integer 6 in the first and third row, and 1 in the second row always. Form the successive rows each from the one before, in the following manner: One row The next row has _b′_, _a′_, _c′_, formed in this order, being thus, _a_ _a′_ = excess of _b′c′_, already formed, over _a_. _b_ _b′_ = quotient of 43 - _a_² divided by _b_. _c_ _c′_ = integer in the quotient of 6 + _a_ divided by _b′_. Thus the second row is formed from the first, as under: 6|1 = excess of 7 × 1 (both just found) over 6. 1|7 = 43 - 6 × 6 divided by 1. --+-- 6|1 = integer of 6 + 6 divided by 7 (just found). The third row is formed from the second, thus: 1 5 = excess of 1 × 6 over 1. 7 6 = 43 - 1 × 1 divided by 7. 1 1 = integer of 6 + 1 divided by 6; and so on. In process of time the second column, 1, 7, 1, occurs again, after which the several columns are repeated in the same order. As a final process, take the set in the lowest line (excluding the first, 6), namely, 1, 1, 3, 1, 5, 1, 3, &c. and use them by the rule given at the beginning of this article, as follows: 1 1 3 1 5 1 3 1 1, &c. 1 1 4 5 29 34 131 165 296 --- --- --- --- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 1 2 7 9 52 61 235 296 531 Hence, 6¹⁶⁵/₂₉₆ is very near the square root of 43, not erring by so much as 1 ---------. 296 × 531 If we try it, we shall find (⁶¹⁶⁵/₂₉₆) to be ¹⁹⁴¹/₂₉₆, the square of which is ³⁷⁶⁷⁴⁸¹/₈₇₆₁₆, or 43⁷/₈₇₆₁₆. This rule is of use when it is frequently wanted to use one square root, and therefore desirable to ascertain whether any easy approximation exists by means of a common fraction. For example, √2 is often used. _ √2 = 1 + ... 1|1 1 1|1 1 1|2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 5 12 29 70 --- --- --- --- --- ---, &c. 2 5 12 29 70 169 Here it appears that 29 1 99 100 - 1 1---- does not err by --------; consequently, ---- or ------- is, 70 70 × 169 70 70 considering the ease of the operation, a fair approximation. In fact, ⁹⁹/₇₀ is 1·4142857 ... the truth being 1·4142135 ... The following is an additional example: __ √19 = 4 + ... 4 | 2 3 3 2 4 4 2 1 | 3 5 2 5 3 1 3 4 | 2 1 3 1 2 8 2 1 3 1 2, &c. 1 1 4 5 14 --- --- --- --- ---, &c. 2 3 11 14 39 APPENDIX IX. ON SOME GENERAL PROPERTIES OF NUMBERS. PROP. 1. If a fraction be reduced to its lowest terms, _so called_,[61] that is, if neither, numerator nor denominator be divisible by any integer greater than unity, then no fraction of a smaller numerator and denominator can have the same value. [61] This theorem shews that what is _called_ reducing a fraction to its lowest terms (namely, dividing numerator and denominator by their greatest common measure), is correctly so called. Let _a_/_b_ be a fraction in which _a_ and _b_ have no common measure greater than unity: and, if possible, let _c_/_d_ be a fraction of the same value, _c_ being less than _a_, and _d_ less than _b_. Now, since _a_ _c_ _a_ _b_ --- = ---, we have --- = ---; _b_ _d_ _c_ _d_ let _m_ be the integer quotient of these last fractions (which must exist, since _a_ > _c_, _b_ > _d_), and let _e_ and _f_ be the remainders. Then _a_ _mc_ + _e_ _c_ _mc_ --- or ---------- = --- = ---- _b_ _md_ + _f_ _d_ _md_ Hence, _e_ _mc_ --- and ---- must be equal, for if not, _f_ _md_ _mc_ + _e_ _mc_ _e_ ---------- would lie between ---- and ---, _md_ + _f_ _md_ _f_ instead of being equal to the former. Hence, _a_ _e_ --- = ---; _b_ _f_ so that if a fraction whose numerator and denominator have no common measure greater than unity, be equal to a fraction of lower numerator and denominator, it is equal to another in which the numerator and denominator are still lower. If we proceed with _a_ _e_ --- = --- in a similar manner, we find _b_ _f_ _a_ _g_ --- = --- where _g_ < _e_, _h_ < _f_, _b_ _h_ and so on. Now, if there be any process which perpetually diminishes the terms of a fraction by one or more units at every step, it must at last bring either the numerator or denominator, or both, to 0. Let _a_ _v_ --- = --- _b_ _w_ be one of the steps, and let _a_ = _kv_ + _x_, _b_ = _kw_ + _y_; so that _kv_ + _x_ _v_ ---------- = ---. _kw_ + _y_ _w_ Now, if _x_ = 0 but not _y_, this is absurd, for it gives _kv_ _kv_ ---------- = ----. _kw_ + _y_ _kw_ A similar absurdity follows if _y_ be 0, but not _x_; and if both _x_ and _y_ be = 0, then _a_ = _kv_, _b_ = _kw_, or _a_ and _b_ have a common measure, _k_. Now _k_ must be greater than 1, for _v_ and _w_ are less than _c_ and _d_, which by hypothesis are less than _a_ and _b_. Consequently _a_ and _b_ have a common measure _k_ greater than 1, which by hypothesis they have not. If, then, _a_ and _b_ be integers not divisible by any integer greater than 1, the fraction _a_/_b_ is really _in its lowest terms_. Also _a_ and _b_ are said to be _prime to one another_. PROP. 2. If the product _ab_ be divisible by _c_, and if _c_ be prime to _b_, it must divide _a_. Let _ab_ _b_ _d_ ---- = _d_, then --- = ---. _c_ _c_ _c_ Now _b_/_c_ is in its lowest terms; therefore, by the last proposition, _d_ and _a_ must have a common measure. Let the greatest common measure be _k_, and let _a_ = _kl_, _d_ = _km_. Then _b_ _km_ _m_ _m_ --- = ---- = ---, and --- _c_ _kl_ _l_ _l_ is also in its lowest terms; but so is _b_/_c_; therefore we must have _m_ = _b_, _l_ = _c_, for otherwise a fraction in its lowest terms would be equal to another of lower terms. Therefore _a_ = _kc_, or _a_ is divisible by _c_. And from this it follows, that if a number be prime to two others, it is prime to their product. Let _a_ be prime to _b_ and _c_, then no measure of _a_ can measure either _b_ or _c_, and no such measure can measure the product _bc_; for any measure of _bc_ which is prime to one must measure the other. PROP. 3. If _a_ be prime to _b_, it is prime to all the powers of _b_. Every measure[62] of _a_ is prime to _b_, and therefore does not divide _b_. Hence, by the last, no measure of _a_ divides _b_²; hence, _a_ is prime to _b_², and so is every measure of it; therefore, no measure of _a_ divides _bb_², consequently _a_ is prime to _b_³, and so on. Hence, if _a_ be prime to _b_, _a_ cannot divide without remainder any power of _b_. This is the reason why no fraction can be made into a decimal unless its denominator be measured by no prime[63] numbers except 2 and 5. For if _a_ _c_ --- = ---, _b_ 10ⁿ which last is the general form of a decimal fraction, let _a_ 10ⁿ_a_ --- be in its lowest terms; then ------ _b_ _b_ is an integer, whence (Prop. 2) _b_ must divide 10ⁿ, and so must all the divisors of _b_. If, then, among the divisors of _b_ there be any prime numbers except 2 and 5, we have a prime number (which is of course a number prime to 10) not dividing 10, but dividing one of its powers, which is absurd. [62] For that which measures a measure is itself a measure; so that if a measure of _a_ could have a measure in common with _b_, _a_ itself would have a common measure with _b_. [63] A prime number is one which is prime to all numbers except its own multiples, or has no divisors except 1 and itself. PROP. 4. If _b_ be prime to _a_, all the multiples of _b_, as _b_, 2_b_, ... up to (_a_-1)_b_ must leave different remainders when divided by _a_. For if, _m_ being greater than _n_, and both less than _a_, we have _mb_ and _nb_ giving the same remainder, it follows that _mb_-_nb_, or (_m_-_n_)_b_, is divisible by _a_; whence (Prop. 2), a divides _m_-_n_, a number less than itself, which is absurd. * * * * * If a number be divided into its prime factors, or reduced to a product of prime numbers only (as in 360 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 5), and if _a_, _b_, _c_, &c. be the prime factors, and α, β, γ, &c. the number of times they severally enter, so that the number is _a_{^α} × _b_ᵝ × _c_ᵞ × &c., then this can be done in only one way: For any prime number _v_, not included in the above list, is prime to _a_, and therefore to _a_{^α}, to _b_ and therefore to _b_ᵝ and therefore to _a_{^α} × _b_ᵝ Proceeding in this way, we prove that _v_ is prime to the complete product above, or to the given number itself. The number of divisors which the preceding number _a_{^α}_b_ᵝ_c_ᵞ ... can have, 0 and itself included, is (α + 1)(β+ 1)(γ + 1).... For _a_{^α} as the divisors 1, _a_, _a_² ... _a_{^α} and no others, α + 1 in all. Similarly, _b_ᵝ has β+ 1 divisors, and so on. Now as all the divisors are made by multiplying together one out of each set, their number (page 202) is (α + 1)(β + 1)(γ+ 1).... If a number, _n_, be divisible by certain prime numbers, say 3, 5, 7, 11, then the third part of all the numbers up to _n_ is divisible by 3, the fifth part by 5, and so on. But more than this: when the multiples of 3 are omitted, exactly the fifth part of _those which remain_ are divisible by 5; for the fifth part of the whole are divisible by 5, and the fifth part of those which are removed are divisible by 5, therefore the fifth part of those which are left are divisible by 5. Again, because the seventh part of the whole are divisible by 7, and the seventh part of those which are divisible by 3, or by 5, or by 15, it follows that when all those which are multiples of 3 or 5, or both, are removed, the seventh part of those which remain are divisible by 7; and so on. Hence, the number of numbers not exceeding n, which are not divisible by 3, 5, 7, or 11, is ¹⁰/₁₁ of ⁶/₇ of ⁴/₅ of ²/₃ of n. Proceeding in this way, we find that the number of numbers which are prime to _n_, that is, which are not divisible by any one of its prime factors, _a_, _b_, _c_, ... is _a_ - 1 _b_ - 1 _c_ - 1 _n_ ------- ------- ------- ... _a_ _b_ _c_ or _a_{^α-1} - 1}_b_ᵝ⁻¹_c_ᵞ⁻¹ ... (_a_ - 1)(_b_ - 1)(_c_ - 1).... Thus, 360 being 2³3²5, its number of divisors is 4 × 3 × 2, or 24, and there are 2³3.1.2.4 or 96 numbers less than 360 which are prime to it. PROP. 5. If _a_ be prime to _b_, then the terms of the series, _a_, _a_², _a_³, ... severally divided by _b_, must all leave different remainders, until 1 occurs as a remainder, after which the cycle of remainders will be again repeated. Let _a_ + _b_ give the remainder _r_ (not unity); then _a_² ÷ _b_ gives the same remainder as _r__a_ + _b_, which (Prop. 4) cannot be _r_: let it be _s_. Then _a_ˢ ÷ _b_ gives the same remainder as _s__a_ ÷ _b_, which (Prop. 4) cannot be either _r_ or _s_, unless _s_ be 1: let it be _t_. Then _a_ᵗ ÷ _b_ gives the same remainder as _ta_ ÷ _b_; if _t_ be not 1, this cannot be either _r_, _s_, or _t_: let it be _u_. So we go on getting different remainders, until 1 occurs as a remainder; after which, at the next step, the remainder of _a_ ÷ _b_ is repeated. Now, 1 must come at last; for division by _b_ cannot give any remainders but 0, 1, 2, ... _b_- 1; and 0 never arrives (Prop. 3), so that as soon as _b_-2 _different_ remainders have occurred, no one of which is unity, the next, which must be different from all that precede, must be 1. If not before, then at _a_ᵇ⁻¹ we must have a remainder 1; after which the cycle will obviously be repeated. Thus, 7, 7², 7³, 7⁴, &c. will, when divided by 5, be found to give the remainders 2, 4, 3, 1, &c. PROP. 6. The difference of two _m_th powers is always divisible without remainder by the difference of the roots; or _a_ᵐ -_b_ᵐ is divisible by _a_-_b_; for _a_ᵐ - _b_ᵐ = _a_ᵐ - _a_ᵐ⁻¹_b_ + _a_ᵐ⁻¹_b_ - _b_ᵐ = _a_ᵐ⁻¹(_a_ - _b_) + _b_(_a_ᵐ⁻¹ - _b_ᵐ⁻¹) From which, if _aᵐ⁻¹_-_bᵐ⁻¹_ is divisible by _a_ -_b_, so is _a_ᵐ-_b_ᵐ. But _a_-_b_ is divisible by _a_-_b_; so therefore is _a_²- _b_²; so therefore is _a_³-_b_³; and so on. Therefore, if _a_ and _b_, divided by _c_, leave the same remainder, _a_² and _b_², _a_³ and _b_³, &c. severally divided by _c_, leave the same remainders; for this means that _a_-_b_ is divisible by _c_. But _a_ᵐ - _b_ᵐ is divisible by _a_-_b_, and therefore by every measure of _a_-_b_, or by _c_; but _a_ᵐ-_b_ᵐ cannot be divisible by _c_, unless _a_ᵐ and _b_ᵐ, severally divided by _c_, give the same remainder. PROP. 7. If _b_ be a prime number, and _a_ be not divisible by _b_, then _a_ᵇ and (_a_-1)ᵇ + 1 leave the same remainder when divided by _b_. This proposition cannot be proved here, as it requires a little more of algebra than the reader of this work possesses.[64] [64] Expand (_a_-1)ᵇ by the binomial theorem; shew that _when b is a prime number_ every coefficient which is not unity is divisible by _b_; and the proposition follows. PROP. 8. In the last case, _a_ᵇ⁻¹ divided by _b_ leaves a remainder 1. From the last, _a_ᵇ-_a_ leaves the same remainder as (_a_-1)ᵇ + 1-_a_ or (_a_-1)ᵇ- (_a_-1); that is, the remainder of _a_ᵇ-_a_ is not altered if _a_ be reduced by a unit. By the same rule, it may be reduced another unit, and so on, still without any alteration of the remainder. At last it becomes 1ᵇ-1, or 0, the remainder of which is 0. Accordingly, _a_ᵇ-_a_, which is _a_(_a_ᵇ⁻¹- 1), is divisible by _b_; and since _b_ is prime to _a_, it must (Prop. 2) divide _a_ᵇ⁻¹-1; that is, _a_ᵇ⁻¹, divided by _b_, leaves a remainder 1, if _b_ be a prime number and _a_ be not divisible by _b_. From the above it appears (Prop. 5 and 7), that if _a_ be prime to _b_, the set 1, _a_, _a_², _a_³, &c. successively divided by _b_, give a set of remainders beginning with 1, and in which 1 occurs again at _a_ᵇ⁻¹, if not before, and at _a_ᵇ⁻¹ certainly (whether before or not), if _b_ be a prime number. From the point at which 1 occurs, the cycle of remainders recommences, and 1 is always the beginning of a cycle. If, then, _a_ᵐ be the first power which gives 1 for remainder, _m_ must either be _b_-1, or a measure of it, _when b is a prime number_. But if we divide the terms of the series _m_, _ma_, _ma_², _ma_³, &c. by _b_, _m_ being less than _b_, we have cycles of remainders beginning with _m_. If 1, _r_, _s_, _t_, &c. be the first set of remainders, then the second set is the set of remainders arising from _m_, _mr_, _ms_, _mt_, &c. If 1 never occur in the first set before _a_ᵇ⁻¹ (except at the beginning), then all the numbers under _b_-1 inclusive are found among the set 1, _r_, _s_, _t_, &c.; and if _m_ be prime to _b_ (Prop. 4), all the same numbers are found, in a different order, among the remainders of _m_, _mr_, &c. But should it happen that the set 1, _r_, _s_, _t_, &c. is not complete, then _m_, _mr_, _ms_, &c. may give a different set of remainders. All these last theorems are constantly verified in the process for reducing a fraction to a decimal fraction. If _m_ be prime to _b_, or the fraction _m_/_b_ in its lowest terms, the process involves the successive division of _m_, _m_ × 10, _m_ × 10², &c. by _b_. This process can never come to an end unless some power of 10, say 10ⁿ, is divisible by _b_; which cannot be, if _b_ contain any prime factors except 2 and 5. In every other case the quotient repeats itself, the repeating part sometimes commencing from the first figure, sometimes from a later figure. Thus, ¹/₇ yields ·142857142857, &c., but ¹/₁₄ gives ·07(142857)(142857), &c., and ¹/₂₈ gives ·03(571428)(571428), &c. In _m_/_b_, the quotient always repeats from the very beginning whenever _b_ is a prime number and _m_ is less than _b_; and the number of figures in the repeating part is then always _b_-1, or a measure of it. That it must be so, appears from the above propositions. Before proceeding farther, we write down the repeating part of a quotient, with the remainders which are left after the several figures are formed. Let the fraction be ¹/₁₇, we have 0₁₀5₁₅8₁₄8₄2₆3₉5₅2₁₆9₇4₂1₃1₁₃7₁₁6₈4₁₂7₁ This may be read thus: 10 by 17, quotient 0, remainder 10; 10² by 17, quotient 05, remainder 15; 10³ by 17, quotient 058, remainder 14; and so on. It thus appears that 10¹⁶ by 17 leaves a remainder 1, which is according to the theorem. If we multiply 0588, &c. by _any number under_ 17, the same cycle is obtained with a different beginning. Thus, if we multiply by 13, we have 7647058823529411 beginning with what comes after remainder 13 in the first number. If we multiply by 7, we have 4117, &c. The reason is obvious: ¹/₁₇ × 13, or ¹³/₁₇, when turned into a decimal fraction, starts with the divisor 130, and we proceed just as we do in forming ¹/₁₇, when within four figures of the close of the cycle. It will also be seen, that in the last half of the cycle the quotient figures are complements to 9 of those in the first half, and that the remainders are complements to 17. Thus, in 0₁₀5₁₅8₁₄8₄, &c. and 9₇4₂1₃1₁₃, &c. we see 0 + 9 = 9, 5 + 4 = 9, 8 + 1 = 9, &c., and 10 + 7 = 17, 15 + 2 = 17, 14 + 3 = 17, &c. We may shew the necessity of this as follows: If the remainder 1 never occur till we come to use _a_ᵇ⁻¹, then, _b_ being prime, _b_-1 is even; let it be 2_k_. Accordingly, _a_²ᵏ-1 is divisible by _b_; but this is the product of _a_ᵏ-1 and _a_ᵏ + 1, one of which must be divisible by _b_. It cannot be _a_ᵏ-1, for then a power of _a_ preceding the (_b_-1)th would leave remainder 1, which is not the case in our instance: it must then be _a_ᵏ + 1, so that _a_ᵏ divided by _b_ leaves a remainder _b_-1; and the _k_th step concludes the first half of the process. Accordingly, in our instance, we see, _b_ being 17 and _a_ being 10, that remainder 16 occurs at the 8th step of the process. At the next step, the remainder is that yielded by 10(_b_-1), or 9_b_ + _b_-10, which gives the remainder _b_-10. But the first remainder of all was 10, and 10 + (_b_-10) = _b_. If ever this complemental character occur in any step, it must continue, which we shew as follows: Let _r_ be a remainder, and _b_-_r_ a subsequent remainder, the sum being _b_. At the next step after the first remainder, we divide 10_r_ by _b_, and, at the next step after the second remainder, we divide 10_b_-10_r_ by _b_. Now, since the sum of 10_r_ and 10_b_-10_r_ is divisible by _b_, the two remainders from these new steps must be such as added together will give _b_, and so on; and the _quotients_ added together must give 9, for the sum of the remainders 10_r_ and 10_b_-10_r_ yields a quotient 10, of which the two remainders give 1. If ¹/₅₉ and ¹/₆₁ be taken, the repeating parts will be found to contain 58 and 60 figures. Of these we write down only the first halves, as the reader may supply the rest by the complemental property just given. 01694915254237288135593220338, &c. 016393442622950819672131147540, &c. Here, then, are two numbers, the first of which multiplied by any number under 59, and the second by any number under 61, can have the products formed by carrying certain of the figures from one end to the other. But, _b_ being still prime, it may happen that remainder 1 may occur before _b_-1 figures are obtained; in which case, as shewn, the number of figures must be a measure of _b_-1. For example, take ¹/₄₁. The repeating quotient, written as above, has only 5 figures, and 5 measures 41-1. 0₁₀2₁₈4₁₆3₃₇9₁ Now, this period, it will be found, has its figures merely transposed, if we multiply by 10, 18, 16, or 37. But if we multiply by any other number under 41, we convert this period into the period of another fraction whose denominator is 41. The following are 8 periods which may be found. 0₁₀2₁₈4₁₆3₃₇9₁ | 1₉2₈1₃₉9₂₁5₅ 0₂₀4₃₆8₃₂7₃₃8₂ | 1₁₉4₂₆6₁₄3₁₇4₆ 0₃₀7₁₃3₇1₂₉7₃ | 2₂₈6₃₄8₁₂2₃₈9₁₁ 0₄₀9₈₁7₂₃5₂₅6₄ | 3₂₇6₂₄5₃₅8₂₂5₁₅ To find _m_/41, look out for _m_ among the remainders, and take the period in which it is, beginning after the remainder. Thus, ³⁴/₄₁ is ·8292682926, &c., and ¹⁵/₄₁ is ·3658536585, &c. These periods are complemental, four and four, as 02439 and 97560, 07317 and 92682, &c. And if the first number, 02439, be multiplied by any number under 41, look for that number among the remainders, and the product is found in the period of that remainder by beginning after the remainder. Thus, 02439 multiplied by 23 gives 56097, and by 6 gives 14634. The reader may try to decipher for himself how it is that, with no more figures than the following, we can extend the result of our division. The fraction of which the period is to be found is ¹/₈₇. 87)100(01149425 130 430 820 01149425 × 25 370 28735625 × 25 220 718390625 × 25 460 17959765625 × 25 25 448994140625 0114942528735625 718390625 1795976 5625 448994 ----------------------------+------ 0114942528735632183908045977|011494 | APPENDIX X. ON COMBINATIONS. There are some things connected with combinations which I place in an appendix, because I intend to demonstrate them more briefly than the matters in the text. Suppose a number of boxes, say 4, in each of which there are counters, say 5, 7, 3, and 11 severally. In how many ways can one counter be taken out of each box, the order of going to the boxes not being regarded. _Answer_, in 5 × 7 × 3 × 11 ways. For out of the first box we may draw a counter in 5 different ways, and to each such drawing we may annex a drawing from the second in 7 different ways--giving 5 × 7 ways of making a drawing from the first two. To each of these we may annex a drawing from the third box in 3 ways--giving 5 × 7 × 3 drawings from the first three; and so on. The following statements may now be easily demonstrated, and similar ones made as to other cases. If the order of going to the boxes make a difference, and if _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_ be the numbers of counters in the several boxes, there are 4 × 2 × 3 × 1 × _a_ × _b_ × _c_ × _d_ distinct ways. If we want to draw, say 2 out of the first box, 3 out of the second, 1 out of the third, and 3 out of the fourth, and if the order of the boxes be not considered, the number of ways is _a_ - 1 _b_ - 1 _b_ - 2 _d_ - 1 _d_ - 2 _a_------- × _b_------- -------- × _c_ × _d_------- ------- 2 2 3 2 3 If the order of going to the boxes be considered, we must multiply the preceding by 4 × 3 × 2 × 1. If the order of the drawings out of the boxes makes a difference, but not the order of the boxes, then the number of ways is _a_(_a_-1)_b_(_b_-1)(_b_-2)_cd_(_d_-1)(_d_-2) The nth power of _a_, or _a_ⁿ, represents the number of ways in which _a_ counters _differently marked_ can be distributed in _n_ boxes, order of placing them in each box not being considered. Suppose we want to distribute 4 differently-marked counters among 7 boxes. The first counter may go into either box, which gives 7 ways; the second counter may go into either; and any of the first 7 allotments may be combined with any one of the second 7, giving 7 × 7 distinct ways; the third counter varies each of these in 7 different ways, giving 7 × 7 × 7 in all; and so on. But if the counters be undistinguishable, the problem is a very different thing. Required the number of ways in which a number can be compounded of other numbers, different orders counting as different ways. Thus, 1 + 3 + 1 and 1 + 1 + 3 are to be considered as distinct ways of making 5. It will be obvious, on a little examination, that each number can be composed in exactly twice as many ways as the preceding number. Take 8 for instance. If every possible way of making 7 be written down, 8 may be made either by increasing the last component by a unit, or by annexing a unit at the end. Thus, 1 + 3 + 2 + 1 may yield 1 + 3 + 2 + 2, or 1 + 3 + 2 + 1 + 1: and all the ways of making 8 will thus be obtained; for any way of making 8, say _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + _d_, must proceed from the following mode of making 7, _a_ + _b_ + _c_ + (_d_-1). Now, (_d_-1) is either 0--that is, _d_ is unity and is struck out--or (_d_-1) remains, a number 1 less than _d_. Hence it follows that the number of ways of making _n_ is 2ⁿ⁻¹. For there is obviously 1 way of making 1, 2 of making 2; then there must be, by our rule, 2² ways of making 3, 2³ ways of making 4; and so on. { 1 + 1 + 1 { 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 { 1 + 1 { { 1 + 1 + 2 { { 1 + 2 { 1 + 2 + 1 1 { { 1 + 3 { { 2 + 1 { 2 + 1 + 1 { 2 { { 2 + 2 { 3 { 3 + 1 { 4 This table exhibits the ways of making 1, 2, 3, and 4. Hence it follows (which I leave the reader to investigate) that there are twice as many ways of forming _a_ + _b_ as there are of forming _a_ and then annexing to it a formation of _b_; four times as many ways of forming _a_ + _b_ + _c_ as there are of annexing to a formation of _a_ formations of _b_ and of _c_; and so on. Also, in summing numbers which make up _a_ + _b_, there are ways in which _a_ is a rest, and ways in which it is not, and as many of one as of the other. Required the number of ways in which a number can be compounded of odd numbers, different orders counting as different ways. If _a_ be the number of ways in which _n_ can be so made, and _b_ the number of ways in which _n_ + 1 can be made, then _a_ + _b_ must be the number of ways in which _n_ + 2 can be made; for every way of making 12 out of odd numbers is either a way of making 10 with the last number increased by 2, or a way of making 11 with a 1 annexed. Thus, 1 + 5 + 3 + 3 gives 12, formed from 1 + 5 + 3 + 1 giving 10. But 1 + 9 + 1 + 1 is formed from 1 + 9 + 1 giving 11. Consequently, the number of ways of forming 12 is the sum of the number of ways of forming 10 and of forming 11. Now, 1 can only be formed in 1 way, and 2 can only be formed in 1 way; hence 3 can only be formed in 1 + 1 or 2 ways, 4 in only 1 + 2 or 3 ways. If we take the series 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, &c. in which each number is the sum of the two preceding, then the _n_th number of this set is the number of ways (orders counting) in which _n_ can be formed of odd numbers. Thus, 10 can be formed in 55 ways, 11 in 89 ways, &c. Shew that the number of ways in which _mk_ can be made of numbers divisible by _m_ (orders counting) is 2ᵏ⁻¹. In the two series, 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 9 13 19 28, &c. 0 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5, &c., the first has each new term after the third equal to the sum of the last and last but two; the second has each new term after the third equal to the sum of the last but one and last but two. Shew that the _n_th number in the first is the number of ways in which _n_ can be made up of numbers which, divided by 3, leave a remainder 1; and that the _n_th number in the second is the number of ways in which _n_ can be made up of numbers which, divided by 3, leave a remainder 2. It is very easy to shew in how many ways a number can be made up of a given number of numbers, if different orders count as different ways. Suppose, for instance, we would know in how many ways 12 can be thus made of 7 numbers. If we write down 12 units, there are 11 intervals between unit and unit. There is no way of making 12 out of 7 numbers which does not answer to distributing 6 partition-marks in the intervals, 1 in each of 6, and collecting all the units which are not separated by partition-marks. Thus, 1 + 1 + 3 + 2 + 1 + 2 + 2, which is one way of making 12 out of 7 numbers, answers to | | | | | | 1 | 1 | 111 | 11 | 1 | 11 | 11 | | | | | | in which the partition-marks come in the 1st, 2d, 5th, 7th, 8th, and 10th of the 11 intervals. Consequently, to ask in how many ways 12 can be made of 7 numbers, is to ask in how many ways 6 partition-marks can be placed in 11 intervals; or, how many combinations or selections can be made of 6 out of 11. The answer is, 11 × 10 × 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 -----------------------, or 462. 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 Let us denote by _m_ₙ the number of ways in which _m_ things can be taken out of _n_ things, so that _m_ₙ is the abbreviation for _n_ - 1 _n_ - 2 _n_ - _m_ + 1 _n_ × ------ × ------- ... as far as ------------- 2 3 _m_ Then _m_ₙ also represents the number of ways in which _m_ + 1 numbers can be put together to make _n_ + 1. What we proved above is, that 6₁₁ is the number of ways in which we can put together 7 numbers to make 12. There will now be no difficulty in proving the following: 2ⁿ = 1 + 1ₙ + 2ₙ + 3ₙ ... + _n_ₙ In the preceding question, 0 did not enter into the list of numbers used. Thus, 3 + 1 + 0 + 0 was not considered as one of the ways of putting together four numbers to make 5. But let us now ask, what is the number of ways of putting together 7 numbers to make 12, allowing 0 to be in the list of numbers. There can be no more (nor fewer) ways of doing this than of putting 7 numbers together, among which 0 is _not_ included, to make 19. Take every way of making 12 (0 included), and put on 1 to each number, and we get a way of making 19 (0 not included). Take any way of making 19 (0 not included), and strike off 1 from each number, and we have one of the ways of making 12 (0 included). Accordingly, 6₁₈ is the number of ways of putting together 7 numbers (0 being allowed) to make 12. And (_m_- 1)ₙ₊ₘ₋₁ is the number of ways of putting together _m_ numbers to make _n_, 0 being included. This last amounts to the solution of the following: In how many ways can _n_ counters (undistinguishable from each other) be distributed into _m_ boxes? And the following will now be easily proved: The number of ways of distributing _c_ undistinguishable counters into _b_ boxes is (_b_ - 1)_{_b_ + _c_ - 1}, if any box or boxes may be left empty. But if there must be 1 at least in each box, the number of ways is (_b_ - 1)_{_c_ - 1}; if there must be 2 at least in each box, it is (_b_ - 1)_{_c- b_-1}; if there must be 3 at least in each box, it is (_b_ - 1)_{_c_ - 2_b_ - 1}; and so on. The number of ways in which _m odd_ numbers can be put together to make _n_, is the same as the number of ways in which _m_ even numbers (0 included) can be put together to make _n_-_m_; and this is the number of ways in which _m_ numbers (odd or even, 0 included) can be put together to make ½(_n_-_m_). Accordingly, the number of ways in which m odd numbers can be put together to make _n_ is the same as the number of combinations of _m_-1 things out of ½(_n_-_m_) + _m_-1, or ½(_n_ + _m_)-1. Unless _n_ and _m_ be both even or both odd, the problem is evidently impossible. There are curious and useful relations existing between numbers of combinations, some of which may readily be exhibited, under the simple expression of _m_ₙ to stand for the number of ways in which _m_ things may be taken out of _n_. Suppose we have to take 5 out of 12: Let the 12 things be marked A, B, C, &c. and set apart one of them, A. Every collection of 5 out of the 12 either does or does not include A. The number of the latter sort must be 5₁₁; the number of the former sort must be 4₁₁, since it is the number of ways in which the _other four_ can be chosen out of all but A. Consequently, 5₁₂ must be 5₁₁ + 4₁₁, and thus we prove in every case, _m_ₙ′ = _m_ₙ₋₁ + (_m_ - 1)ₙ₋₁ 0ₙ and _n_ₙ both are 1; for there is but one way of taking _none_, and but one way of taking _all_. And again _m_ₙ and (_n_-_m_)ₙ are the same things. And if _m_ be greater than _n_, _m_ₙ is 0; for there are no ways of doing it. We make one of our preceding results more symmetrical if we write it thus, 2ⁿ = 0ₙ + 1ₙ + 2ₙ + ... + _n_ₙ If we now write down the table of symbols in which the (_m_ + 1)th 0 1 2 3, &c. +-------------------------------------- 1 | 0₁ 1₁ 2₁ 3₁, &c. 2 | 0₂ 1₂ 2₂ 3₂, &c. 3 | 0₃ 1₃ 2₃ 3₃, &c. &c. | &c. &c. &c. &c. number of the _n_th row represents _m_ₙ, the number of combinations of _m_ out of _n_, we see it proved above that the law of formation of this table is as follows: Each number is to be the sum of the number above it and the number preceding the number above it. Now, the first row must be 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, &c. and the first column must be 1, 1, 1, 1, &c. so that we have a table of the following kind, which may be carried as far as we please: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 +---------------------------------------------------- 1 | 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 | 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 | 1 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 | 1 4 6 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 | 1 5 10 10 5 1 0 0 0 0 0 6 | 1 6 15 20 15 6 1 0 0 0 0 7 | 1 7 21 35 35 21 7 1 0 0 0 8 | 1 8 28 56 70 56 28 8 1 0 0 9 | 1 9 36 84 126 126 84 36 9 1 0 10 | 1 10 45 120 210 252 210 120 45 10 1 Thus, in the row 9, under the column headed 4, we see 126, which is 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 ÷ (1 × 2 × 3 × 4), the number of ways in which 4 can be chosen out of 9, which we represent by 4-{9}. If we add the several rows, we have 1 + 1 or 2, 1 + 2 + 1 or 2², next 1 + 3 + 3 + 1 or 2³, &c. which verify a theorem already announced; and the law of formation shews us that the several columns are formed thus: 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 3 1 ----- ------- --------- 1 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 6 4 1, &c. so that the sum in each row must be double of the sum in the preceding. But we can carry the consequences of this mode of formation further. If we make the powers of 1 + _x_ by actual algebraical multiplication, we see that the process makes the same oblique addition in the formation of the numerical multipliers of the powers of _x_. 1 + _x_ 1 + _x_ ------- 1 + _x_ _x_ + _x_² --------------- 1 + 2_x_ + _x_² 1 + 2_x_ + _x_² 1 + _x_ --------------- 1 + 2_x_ + _x_² _x_ + 2_x_² + _x_³ ----------------------- 1 + 3_x_ + 3_x_² + _x_³ Here are the second and third powers of 1 + _x_: the fourth, we can tell beforehand from the table, must be 1 + 4_x_ + 6_x_² + 4_x_³ + _x_⁴; and so on. Hence we have (1 + _x_)ⁿ = 0ₙ + 1ₙ_x_ + 2ₙ_x_² + 3ₙ_x_³ + ... + _n_ₙ_x_ⁿ which is usually written with the symbols 0ₙ, 1ₙ, &c. at length, thus, _n_ - 1 _n_ - 1 _n_ - 2 (1 + _x_)ⁿ = 1 + _nx_ + _n_-------_x_² + _n_------- -------_x_³ + &c. 2 2 3 This is the simplest case of what in algebra is called the _binomial theorem_. If instead of 1 + _x_ we use _x_ + _a_, we get (_x_+_a_)ⁿ = _x_ⁿ+1ₙ_ax_ⁿ⁻¹+2ₙ_a_²_x_ⁿ⁻²+3ₙ_a_³_x_ⁿ⁻³+... +_n_ₙ_a_ⁿ We can make the same table in another form. If we take a row of ciphers beginning with unity, and setting down the first, add the next, and then the next, and so on, and then repeat the process with one step less, and then again with one step less, we have the following: 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 6 10 15 1 4 10 20 1 5 15 1 6 1 In the oblique columns we see 1 1, 1 2 1, 1 3 3 1, &c. the same as in the original table, and formed by the same additions. If, before making the additions, we had always multiplied by _a_, we should have got the several components of the powers of 1 + _a_, thus, 1 0 0 0 0 1 _a_ _a_² _a_³ _a_⁴ 1 2_a_ 3_a_² 4_a_³ 1 3_a_ 6_a_² 1 4_a_ 1 where the oblique columns 1 + _a_, 1 + 2_a_ + _a_², 1 + 3_a_ + 3_a_² + _a_³, &c., give the several powers of 1 + _a_. If instead of beginning with 1, 0, 0, &c. we had begun with _p_, 0, 0, &c. we should have got _p_, _p_ × 4_a_, _p_ × 6_a_², &c. at the bottom of the several columns; and if we had written at the top _x_⁴, _x_³, _x_², _x_, 1, we should have had all the materials for forming _p_(_x_ + _a_)⁴ by multiplying the terms at the top and bottom of each column together, and adding the results. Suppose we follow this mode of forming _p_(_x_ + _a_)³ + _q_(_x_ + _a_)² + _r_(_x_ + _a_) + _s_. _x_³ _x_² _x_ 1 _x_² _x_ 1 _x_ 1 1 _p_ 0 0 0 _q_ 0 0 _r_ 0 3 _p_ _pa_ _pa_² _pa_³ _q_ _qa_ _qa_² _r_ _ra_ _p_ 2_pa_ 3_pa_² _q_ 2_qa_ _r_ _p_ 3_pa_ _q_ _p_ _px_³ + 3_pax_² + 3_pa_²_x_ + _pa_³ + _qx_² + 2_qax_ + _qa_² + _rx_ + _ra_ + _s_ = _px_³ + (3_pa_ + _q_)_x_² + (3_pa_² + 2_qa_ + _r_)_x_ + _pa_³ + _qa_² + _ra_ + _s_ Now, observe that all this might be done in one process, by entering _q_, _r_, and _s_ under their proper powers of _x_ in the first process, as follows _x_³ _x_² _x_ 1 _p_ _q_ _r_ _s_ _p_ _pa_ + _q_ _pa_² + _qa_ + _r_ _pa_³ + _qa_² + _ra_ + _s_ _p_ 2_pa_ + _q_ 3_pa_² + 2_qa_ + _r_ _p_ 3_pa_ + _q_ _p_ This process[65] is the one used in Appendix XI., with the slight alteration of varying the sign of the last letter, and making subtractions instead of additions in the last column. As it stands, it is the most convenient mode of writing _x_ + _a_ instead of _x_ in a large class of algebraical expressions. For instance, what does 2_x_⁵ + _x_⁴ + 3_x_² + 7_x_ + 9 become when _x_ + 5 is written instead of _x_? The expression, made complete, is, 2_x_⁵ + 1_x_⁴ + 0_x_³ + 3_x_² + 7_x_ + 9 1 0 3 7 9 2 11 55 278 1397 6994 2 21 160 1078 6787 2 31 315 2653 2 41 520 2 51 _Answer_, 2_x_⁵ + 51_x_⁴ + 520_x_³ + 2653_x_² + 6787_x_ + 6994. [65] The principle of this mode of demonstration of Horner’s method was stated in Young’s Algebra (1823), being the earliest elementary work in which that method was given. APPENDIX XI. ON HORNER’S METHOD OF SOLVING EQUATIONS. The rule given in this chapter is inserted on account of its excellence as an exercise in computation. The examples chosen will require but little use of algebraical signs, that they may be understood by those who know no more of algebra than is contained in the present work. To solve an equation such as 2_x_⁴ + _x_² - 3_x_ = 416793, or, as it is usually written, 2_x_⁴ + _x_² - 3_x_ - 416793 = 0, we must first ascertain by trial not only the first figure of the root, but also the denomination of it: if it be a 2, for instance, we must know whether it be 2, or 20, or 200, &c., or ·2, or ·02, or ·002, &c. This must be found by trial; and the shortest way of making the trial is as follows: Write the expression in its complete form. In the preceding case the form is not complete, and the complete form is 2_x_⁴ + 0_x_³ + 1_x_² - 3_x_ - 416793. To find what this is when x is any number, for instance, 3000, the best way is to take the first multiplier (2), multiply it by 3000, and take in the next multiplier (0), multiply the result by 3000, and take in the next multiplier (1), and so on to the end, as follows: 2 × 3000 + 0 = 6000; 6000 × 3000 + 1 = 18000001 18000001 × 3000 - 3 = 54000002997 54000002997 × 3000 - 416793 = 162000008574207 Now try the value of the above when _x_ = 30. We have then, for the steps, 60 (2 × 30 + 0), 1801, 54027, and lastly, 1620810-416793, or _x_ = 30 makes the first terms greater than 416793. Now try _x_ = 20 which gives 40, 801, 16017, and lastly, 320340-416793, or _x_ = 20 makes the first terms less than 416793. Between 20 and 30, then, must be a value of _x_ which makes 2_x_⁴ + _x_²-3x equal to 416793. And this is the preliminary step of the process. Having got thus far, write down the coefficients +2, 0, +1,-3, and -416793, each with its proper algebraical sign, except the last, in which let the sign be changed. This is the most convenient way when the last sign is-. But if the last sign be +, it may be more convenient to let it stand, and change all which come before. Thus, in solving _x_³-12_x_ + 1 = 0, we might write -1 0 +12 1 whereas in the instance before us, we write +2 0 +1 -3 416793 Having done this, take the highest figure of the root, properly named, which is 2 tens, or 20. Begin with the first column, multiply by 20, and join it to the number in the next column; multiply that by 20, and join it to the number in the next column; and so on. But when you come to the last column, subtract the product which comes out of the preceding column, or join it to the last column after changing its sign. When this has been done, repeat the process with the numbers which now stand in the columns, omitting the last, that is, the subtracting step; then repeat it again, going only as far as the last column but two, and so on, until the columns present a set of rows of the following appearance: _a_ _b_ _c_ _d_ _e_ _f_ _g_ _h_ _i_ _k_ _l_ _m_ _n_ _o_ _p_ to the formation of which the following is the key: _f_ = 20_a_ + _b_, _g_ = 20_f_ + _c_, _h_ = 20_g_ + _d_, _i_ = _e_ - 20_h_, _k_ = 20_a_ + _f_, _l_ = 20_k_ + _g_, _m_ = 20_l_ + _h_, _n_ = 20_a_ + _k_, _o_ = 20_n_ + _l_, _p_ = 20_a_ + _n_. We call this _Horner’s Process_, from the name of its inventor. The result is as follows: 2 0 1 -3 416793 (20 40 801 16017 96453 80 2401 64037 120 4801 160 We have now before us the row 2 160 4801 64037 96453 which furnishes our means of guessing at the next, or units’ figure of the root. Call the last column the _dividend_, the last but one the _divisor_, and all that come before _antecedents_. See how often the dividend contains the divisor; this gives the guess at the next figure. The guess is a true one,[66] if, on applying Horner’s process, the divisor result, augmented as it is by the antecedent processes, still go as many times in the dividend. For example, in the case before us, 96453 contains 64037 once; let 1 be put on its trial. Horner’s process is found to succeed, and we have for the second process, 2 160 4801 64037 96453 162 4963 69000 27453 164 5127 74127 166 5293 168 As soon as we come to the fractional portion of the root, the process assumes a more[67] methodical form. The equation being of the _fourth_ degree, annex _four_ ciphers to the dividend, _three_ to the divisor, _two_ to the antecedent, and _one_ to the previous antecedent, leaving the first column as it is; then find the new figure by the dividend and divisor, as before,[68] and apply Horner’s process. Annex ciphers to the results, as before, and proceed in the same way. The annexing of the ciphers prevents our having any thing to do with decimal points, and enables us to use the quotient-figures without paying any attention to their _local_ values. The following exhibits the whole process from the beginning, carried as far as it is here intended to go before beginning the contraction, which will give more figures, as in the rule for the square root. The following, then, is the process as far as one decimal place: [66] Various exceptions may arise when an equation has two nearly equal roots. But I do not here introduce algebraical difficulties; and a student might give himself a hundred examples, taken at hazard, without much chance of lighting upon one which gives any difficulty. [67] This form might be also applied to the integer portions; but it is hardly needed in such instances as usually occur. See the article _Involution and Evolution_ in the _Supplement_ to the _Penny Cyclopædia_. [68] After the second step, the trial will rarely fail to give the true figure. 2 0 1 -3 416793(213 40 801 16017 96453 80 2401 64037 ----- 120 4801 ----- 274530000 160 ---- 69000 47339778 --- 4963 74127000 --------- 162 5127 -------- 164 529300 75730074 166 ------ 77348376 1680 534358 ---- 539434 1686 544528 1692 1698 1704 ---- If we now begin the contraction, it is good to know beforehand on what number of additional root-figures we may reckon. We may be pretty certain of having nearly as many as there are figures in the divisor when we begin to contract--one less, or at least two less. Thus, there being now eight figures in the divisor, we may conclude that the contraction will give us at least six more figures. To begin the contraction, let the dividend stand, cut off one figure from the divisor, two from the column before that, three from the one before that, and so on. Thus, our contraction begins with | | | | |0002 1|704 5445|28 7734837|6 47339778 | | | | The first column is rendered quite useless here. Conduct the process as before, using only the figures which are not cut off. But it will be better to go as far as the first figure cut off, carrying from the second figure cut off. We shall then have as follows: | | | 1|704 5445|28 7734837|6 47339778(6 | 5455|5 7767570|6 734354 5465|7 7800364|8 5475|9 | | At the next contraction the column 1|704 becomes |001704, and is quite useless. The next step, separately written (which is not, however, necessary in working), is | | 54|759 780036|48 734354(0 | | Here the dividend 734354 does not contain the divisor 780036, and we, therefore, write 0 as a root figure and make another contraction, or begin with | | |54759 78003|648 734354(9 | 78008|5 32277 78013|4 | At the next contraction the first column becomes |0054759, and is quite useless, so that the remainder of the process is the contracted division. | 7801|34)32277(4137 | 1072 292 58 3 and the root required is 21·36094137. I now write down the complete process for another equation, one root of which lies between 3 and 4: it is _x_³ - 10_x_ + 1 = 0 1 0 -10 -1(3·1110390520730990796 3 -1 2000 6 1700 209000 9 0 1791 19769000 9 1 188300 743369000000 9 2 189231 172311710273000 9 30 19016300 991247447681 9 31 19025631 39462875420 9 32 1903496300 0 0 1391491559 9 33 0 1903524299 0 9 58993123 9 33 1 1903552298 2 7 0 0 1886047 9 33 2 1903560698 0 5|9|1 172835 9 33 30 0 1903569097 8 5|6|3 1515 9 33 30 3 1903569144 5 2|2| 183 9 33 30 6 1903569191 1|8|8 12 9 33 30 90 1903569193 0|6| 1 9 33|30|99 1903569194|9|3| 9 33|31|08 | | | |09|33|31|17 | | | | The student need not repeat the rows of figures so far as they come under one another: thus, it is not necessary to repeat 190356. But he must use his own discretion as to how much it would be safe for him to omit. I have set down the whole process here as a guide. The following examples will serve for exercise: 1. 2_x_³ - 100_x_ - 7 = 0 _x_ = 7·10581133. 2. _x_⁴ + _x_³ + _x_² + _x_ = 6000 _x_ = 8·531437726. 3. _x_³ + 3_x_² - 4_x_ - 10 = 0 _x_ = 1·895694916504. 4. _x_³ + 100_x_² - 5_x_ - 2173 = 0 _x_ = 4·582246071058464. _ 5. ∛2 = 1·259921049894873164767210607278.[69] 6. _x_³ - 6_x_ = 100 _x_ = 5·071351748731. 7. _x_³ + 2_x_² + 3_x_ = 300 _x_ = 5·95525967122398. 8. _x_³ + _x_ = 1000 _x_ = 9·96666679. 9. 27000_x_³ + 27000_x_ = 26999999 _x_ = 9·9666666..... 10. _x_³ - 6_x_ = 100 _x_ = 5·0713517487. 11. _x_⁵ - 4_x_⁴ + 7_x_³ - 863 = 0 _x_ = 4·5195507. 12. _x_³ - 20_x_ + 8 = 0 _x_ = 4·66003769300087278. 13. _x_³ + _x_² + _x_ - 10 = 0 _x_ = 1·737370233. 14. _x_³ - 46_x_² - 36_x_ + 18 = 0 _x_ = 46·7616301847, or _x_ = ·3471623192. 15. _x_³ + 46_x_² - 36_x_ - 18 = 0 _x_ = 1·1087925037. 16. 8991_x_³ - 162838_x_² + 746271_x_ - 81000 = 0 _x_ = ·111222333444555.... 17. 729_x_³ - 486_x_² + 99_x_ - 6 = 0 _x_ = ·1111..., or ·2222..., or ·3333.... 18. 2_x_³ + 3_x_² - 4_x_ = 500 _x_ = 5·93481796231515279. 19. _x_³ + 2_x_² + _x_ - 150 = 0 _x_ = 4·6684090145541983253742991201705899. 20. _x_³ + _x_ = _x_² + 500 _x_ = 8·240963558144858526963. 21. _x_³ + 2_x_² + 3_x_ - 10000 = 0 _x_ = 20·852905526009. 22. _x_⁵ - 4_x_ - 2000 = 0 _x_ = 4·581400362. 23. 10_x_³ - 33_x_² - 11_x_ - 100 = 0 _x_ = 4·146797808584278785. 24. _x_⁴ + _x_³ + _x_² + _x_ = 127694 _x_ = 18·64482373095. 25. 10_x_³ + 11_x_² + 12_x_ = 100000 _x_ = 21·1655995554508805. 26. _x_³ + _x_ = 13 _x_ = 2·209753301208849. 27. _x_³ + _x_² - 4_x_ - 1600 = 0 _x_ = 11·482837157. 28. _x_³ - 2_x_ = 5 _x_ = 2·094551481542326591482386540579302963857306105628239. 29. _x_⁴ - 80_x_³ + 24_x_² - 6_x_ - 80379639 = 0 _x_ = 123.[70] 30. _x_³ - 242_x_² - 6315_x_ + 2577096 = 0 _x_ = 123.[71] 31. 2_x_⁴ - 3_x_³ + 6_x_ - 8 = 0 _x_ = 1·414213562373095048803.[72] 32. _x_⁴ - 19_x_³ + 132_x_² - 302_x_ + 200 = 0 _x_ = 1·02804, or 4, or 6·57653, or 7·39543[73]. 33. 7_x_⁴ - 11_x_³ + 6_x_² + 5_x_ = 215 _x_ = 2·70648049385791.[74] 34. 7_x_⁵ + 6_x_⁴ + 5_x_³ + 4_x_² + 3_x_ = 11 _x_ = ·770768819622658522379296505.[75] 35. 4_x_⁶ + 7_x_⁵ + 9_x_⁴ + 6_x_³ + 5_x_² + 3_x_ = 792 _x_ = 2·0520421768796053652140434012812019734602755995 45541724214.[76] 36. 2187_x_⁴ - 2430_x_³ + 945_x_² - 150_x_ + 8 = 0 _x_ = ·1111...., or ·2222...., or ·3333...., or ·4444.... [69] The solution of _x_³ + 0_x_² + 0_x_-2 = 0. [70] Taken from a paper on the subject, by Mr. Peter Gray, in the _Mechanics’ Magazine_. [71] Taken from a paper on the subject, by Mr. Peter Gray, in the _Mechanics’ Magazine_. [72] Taken from a paper on the subject, by Mr. Peter Gray, in the _Mechanics’ Magazine_. [73] Taken from the late Mr. Peter Nicholson’s Essay on Involution and Evolution. [74] Taken from the late Mr. Peter Nicholson’s Essay on Involution and Evolution. [75] Taken from the late Mr. Peter Nicholson’s Essay on Involution and Evolution. [76] Taken from the late Mr. Peter Nicholson’s Essay on Involution and Evolution. APPENDIX XII. RULES FOR THE APPLICATION OF ARITHMETIC TO GEOMETRY. The student should make himself familiar with the most common terms of geometry, after which the following rules will present no difficulty. In them all, it must be understood, that when we talk of multiplying one line by another, we mean the repetition of one line as often as there are units of a given kind, as feet or inches, in another. In any other sense, it is absurd to talk of multiplying a quantity by another quantity. All quantities of the same kind should be represented in numbers of the same unit; thus, all the lines should be either feet and decimals of a foot, or inches and decimals of an inch, &c. And in whatever unit a length is represented, a surface is expressed in the corresponding square units, and a solid in the corresponding cubic units. This being understood, the rules apply to all sorts of units. _To find the area of a rectangle._ Multiply together the units in two sides which meet, or multiply together two sides which meet; the product is the number of square units in the area. Thus, if 6 feet and 5 feet be the sides, the area is 6 × 5, or 30 square feet. Similarly, the area of a square of 6 feet long is 6 × 6, or 36 square feet (234). _To find the area of a parallelogram._ Multiply one side by the perpendicular distance between it and the opposite side; the product is the area required in square units. _To find the area of a trapezium._[77] Multiply either of the two sides which are not parallel by the perpendicular let fall upon it from the middle point of the other. [77] A four-sided figure, which has two sides parallel, and two sides not parallel. _To find the area of a triangle._ Multiply any side by the perpendicular let fall upon it from the opposite vertex, and take half the product. Or, halve the sum of the three sides, subtract the three sides severally from this half sum, multiply the four results together, and find the square root of the product. The result is the number of square units in the area; and twice this, divided by either side, is the perpendicular distance of that side from its opposite vertex. _To find the radius of the internal circle which touches the three sides of a triangle._ Divide the area, found in the last paragraph, by half the sum of the sides. _Given the two sides of a right-angled triangle, to find the hypothenuse._ Add the squares of the sides, and extract the square root of the sum. _Given the hypothenuse and one of the sides, to find the other side._ Multiply the sum of the given lines by their difference, and extract the square root of the product. _To find the circumference of a circle from its radius, very nearly._ Multiply twice the radius, or the diameter, by 3·1415927, taking as many decimal places as may be thought necessary. For a rough computation, multiply by 22 and divide by 7. For a very exact computation, in which decimals shall be avoided, multiply by 355 and divide by 113. See (131), last example. _To find the arc of a circular sector, very nearly, knowing the radius and the angle._ Turn the angle into seconds,[78] multiply by the radius, and divide the product by 206265. The result will be the number of units in the arc. [78] The right angle is divided into 90 equal parts called _degrees_, each degree into 60 equal parts called _minutes_, and each minute into 60 equal parts called _seconds_. Thus, 2° 15′ 40″ means 2 degrees, 15 minutes, and 40 seconds. _To find the area of a circle from its radius, very nearly._ Multiply the square of the radius by 3·1415927. _To find the area of a sector, very nearly, knowing the radius and the angle._ Turn the angle into seconds, multiply by the square of the radius, and divide by 206265 × 2, or 412530. _To find the solid content of a rectangular parallelopiped._ Multiply together three sides which meet: the result is the number of cubic units required. If the figure be not rectangular, multiply the area of one of its planes by the perpendicular distance between it and its opposite plane. _To find the solid content of a pyramid._ Multiply the area of the base by the perpendicular let fall from the vertex upon the base, and divide by 3. _To find the solid content of a prism._ Multiply the area of the base by the perpendicular distance between the opposite bases. _To find the surface of a sphere._ Multiply 4 times the square of the radius by 3·1415927. _To find the solid content of a sphere._ Multiply the cube of the radius by 3·1415927 × ⁴/₃, or 4·18879. _To find the surface of a right cone._ Take half the product of the circumference of the base and slanting side. _To find the solid content_, take one-third of the product of the base and the altitude. _To find the surface of a right cylinder._ Multiply the circumference of the base by the altitude. _To find the solid content_, multiply the area of the base by the altitude. The weight of a body may be found, when its solid content is known, if the weight of one cubic inch or foot of the body be known. But it is usual to form tables, not of the weights of a cubic unit of different bodies, but of the proportion which these weights bear to some one amongst them. The one chosen is usually distilled water, and the proportion just mentioned is called the _specific gravity_. Thus, the specific gravity of gold is 19·362, or a cubic foot of gold is 19·362 times as heavy as a cubic foot of distilled water. Suppose now the weight of a sphere of gold is required, whose radius is 4 inches. The content of this sphere is 4 × 4 × 4 × 4·1888, or 268·0832 cubic inches; and since, by (217), each cubic inch of water weighs 252·458 grains, each cubic inch of gold weighs 252·458 × 19·362, or 4888·091 grains; so that 268·0832 cubic inches of gold weigh 268·0832 × 4888·091 grains, or 227½ pounds troy nearly. Tables of specific gravities may be found in most works of chemistry and practical mechanics. The cubic foot of water is 908·8488 troy ounces, 75·7374 troy pounds, 997·1369691 averdupois ounces, and 62·3210606 averdupois pounds. For all rough purposes it will do to consider the cubic foot of water as being 1000 common ounces, which reduces tables of specific gravities to common terms in an obvious way. Thus, when we read of a substance which has the specific gravity 4·1172, we may take it that a cubic foot of the substance weighs 4117 ounces. For greater correctness, diminish this result by 3 parts out of a thousand. THE END. =WALTON AND MABERLY’S= CATALOGUE OF EDUCATIONAL WORKS, AND WORKS IN SCIENCE AND GENERAL LITERATURE. =ENGLISH=. _Dr. R. G. Latham. The English Language._ Fourth Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. £1 8s. cloth. _Latham’s Elementary English Grammar, for the Use of Schools._ Eighteenth thousand. Small 8vo. 4s. 6d. cloth. _Latham’s Hand-book of the English Language, for the Use of Students of the Universities and higher Classes of Schools._ Third Edition. Small 8vo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Latham’s Logic in its Application to Language._ 12mo. 6s. cloth. _Latham’s First English Grammar, adapted for general use._ By DR. R. G. LATHAM and an Experienced Teacher. Fcap. 8vo. _Latham’s History and Etymology of the English Language, for the Use of Classical Schools._ Second Edition, revised. Fcap. 8vo. 1s. 6d. cl. _Mason’s English Grammar, including the Principles of Grammatical Analysis._ 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. _Mason’s Cowper’s Task Book I. (the Sofa), with Notes on the Analysis and Parsing._ Crown 8vo. 1s. 6d. cloth. _Abbott’s First English Reader._ Third Edition. 12mo., with Illustrations. 1s. cloth, limp. _Abbott’s Second English Reader._ Third Edition. 12mo. 1s. 6d. cloth, limp. =GREEK=. _Greenwood’s Greek Grammar, including Accidence, Irregular Verbs, and Principles of Derivation and Composition; adapted to the System of Crude Forms._ Small 8vo. 5s. 6d. cloth. _Kühner’s New Greek Delectus; being Sentences for Translation from Greek into English, and English into Greek; arranged in a systematic Progression._ Translated and Edited by the late DR. ALEXANDER ALLEN. Fourth Edition, revised. 12mo. 4s. cloth. _Gillespie’s Greek Testament Roots, in a Selection of Texts, giving the power of Reading the whole Greek Testament without difficulty._ With Grammatical Notes, and a Parsing Lexicon associating the Greek Primitives with English Derivatives. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Robson’s Constructive Exercises for Teaching the Elements_ of the Greek Language, on a system of Analysis and Synthesis, with Greek Reading Lessons and copious Vocabularies. 12mo., pp. 408. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Robson’s First Greek Book. Exercises and Reading Lessons with Copious Vocabularies._ Being the First Part of the “Constructive Greek Exercises.” 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. _The London Greek Grammar. Designed to exhibit, in small Compass, the Elements of the Greek Language._ Sixth Edition. 12mo. 1s. 6d. cloth. _Hardy and Adams’s Anabasis of Xenophon. Expressly for Schools._ With Notes, Index of Names, and a Map. 12mo. 4s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s Plato._ The Apology of Socrates, The Crito, and part of the Phaedo; with Notes in English from Stallbaum, Schleiermacher’s Introductions, and his Essay on the Worth of Socrates as a Philosopher. Edited by Dr. WM. SMITH, Editor of the Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, &c. Third Edition. 12mo. 5s. cloth. =LATIN=. _New Latin Reading Book; consisting of Short Sentences, Easy Narrations, and Descriptions, selected from Caesar’s Gallic War; in Systematic Progression. With a Dictionary._ Second Edition, revised. 12mo. 2s. 6d. _Allen’s New Latin Delectus; being Sentences for Translation from Latin into English, and English into Latin; arranged in a systematic Progression._ Fourth Edition, revised. 12mo. 4s. cloth. _The London Latin Grammar; including the Eton Syntax and Prosody in English, accompanied with Notes._ Sixteenth Edition. 12mo. 1s. 6d. _Robson’s Constructive Latin Exercises, for teaching the Elements of the Language on a System of Analysis and Synthesis; with Latin Reading Lessons and Copious Vocabularies._ Third and Cheaper Edition, thoroughly revised. 12mo. 4s. 6d. cloth. _Robson’s First Latin Reading Lessons. With Complete Vocabularies. Intended as an Introduction to Caesar._ 12mo. 2s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s Tacitus;_ GERMANIA, AGRICOLA, AND FIRST BOOK OF THE ANNALS. With English Notes, original and selected, and Bötticher’s remarks on the style of Tacitus. Edited by Dr. WM. SMITH, Editor of the Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, etc. Third Edition, greatly improved. 12mo. 5s. _Caesar. Civil War. Book I. With English Notes for the Use of Students preparing for the Cambridge School Examination._ 12mo. 1s. 6d. _Terence. Andria. With English Notes, Summaries, and Life of Terence._ By NEWENHAM TRAVERS, B.A., Assistant-Master in University College School. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. =HEBREW=. _Hurwitz’s Grammar of the Hebrew Language._ Fourth Edition. 8vo. 13s. cloth. Or in Two Parts, sold separately:-- ELEMENTS. 4s. 6d. cloth. ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. 9s. cloth. =FRENCH=. _Merlet’s French Grammar._ By P. F. MERLET, Professor of French in University College, London. New Edition. 12mo. 5s. 6d. bound. Or sold in Two Parts:--PRONUNCIATION and ACCIDENCE, 3s. 6d.; SYNTAX, 3s. 6d. (KEY, 3s. 6d.) _Merlet’s Le Traducteur; Selections, Historical, Dramatic, and Miscellaneous, from the best French Writers, on a plan calculated to render reading and translation peculiarly serviceable in acquiring the French Language; accompanied by Explanatory Notes, a Selection of Idioms, etc._ Fourteenth Edition. 12mo. 5s. 6d. bound. _Merlet’s Exercises on French Composition. Consisting of Extracts from English Authors to be turned into French; with Notes indicating the Differences in Style between the two Languages. A List of Idioms, with Explanations, Mercantile Terms and Correspondence, Essays, etc._ 12mo. 3s. 6d. _Merlet’s French Synonymes, explained in Alphabetical Order. Copious Examples (from the “Dictionary of Difficulties”)._ 12mo. 2s. 6d. _Merlet’s Aperçu de la Litterature Française._ 12mo. 2s. 6d. _Merlet’s Stories from French Writers; in French and English Interlinear (from Merlet’s “Traducteur”)._ Second Edition. 12mo. 2s. cl. _Lombard De Luc’s Classiques Français, à l’Usage de la Jeunesse Protestante_; or, Selections from the best French Classical Works, preceded by Sketches of the Lives and Times of the Writers. 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. =ITALIAN=. _Smith’s First Italian Course; being a Practical and Easy Method of Learning the Elements of the Italian Language._ Edited from the German of FILIPPI, after the method of Dr. AHN. 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. =INTERLINEAR TRANSLATIONS=. _Locke’s System of Classical Instruction._ INTERLINEAR TRANSLATIONS_ 1s. 6d. each. _Latin._ Phaedrus’s Fables of Æsop. Virgil’s Æneid. Book I. Parsing Lessons to Virgil. Caesar’s Invasion of Britain. _Greek._ Lucian’s Dialogues. Selections. Homer’s Iliad. Book I. Xenophon’s Memorabilia. Book I. Herodotus’s Histories. Selections. _French._ Sismondi; the Battles of Cressy and Poictiers. _German._ Stories from German Writers. _Also, to accompany the Latin and Greek Series._ The London Latin Grammar. 12mo. 1s. 6d. The London Greek Grammar. 12mo. 1s. 6d. =HISTORY, MYTHOLOGY, AND ANTIQUITIES=. _Creasy’s (Professor) History of England. With Illustrations._ One Volume. Small 8vo. Uniform with Schmitz’s “History of Rome,” and Smith’s “History of Greece.” (Preparing). _Schmitz’s History of Rome_, from the Earliest Times to the DEATH OF COMMODUS, A.D. 192._ Ninth Edition. One Hundred Engravings. 12mo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s History of Greece, from the Earliest Times to the Roman Conquest. With Supplementary Chapters on the History of Literature and Art._ New Edition. One Hundred Engravings on Wood. Large 12mo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s Smaller History of Greece. With Illustrations._ Fcp. 8vo. 3s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities._ By various Writers. Second Edition. Illustrated by Several Hundred Engravings on Wood. One thick volume, medium 8vo. £2 2s. cloth. _Smith’s Smaller Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities. Abridged from the larger Dictionary._ New Edition. Crown 8vo., 7s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography and Mythology._ By various Writers. Medium 8vo. Illustrated by numerous Engravings on Wood. Complete in Three Volumes. 8vo. £5 15s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s New Classical Dictionary of Biography, Mythology, and Geography. Partly based on the “Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography and Mythology.”_ Third Edition. 750 Illustrations. 8vo. 18s. cloth. _Smith’s Smaller Classical Dictionary of Biography, Mythology, and Geography. Abridged from the larger Dictionary._ Illustrated by 200 Engravings on Wood. New Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geography._ By various Writers. Illustrated with Woodcuts of Coins, Plans of Cities, etc. Two Volumes 8vo. £4. cloth. _Niebuhr’s History of Rome. From the Earliest Times to the First Punic War._ Fourth Edition. Translated by BISHOP THIRLWALL, ARCHDEACON HARE, DR. SMITH, and DR. SCHMITZ. Three Vols. 8vo. £1 16s. _Niebuhr’s Lectures on the History of Rome._ From the Earliest Times to the First Punic War. Edited by DR. SCHMITZ. Third Edition. 8vo. 8s. _Newman (F. W.) The Odes of Horace._ Translated into Unrhymed Metres, with Introduction and Notes. Crown 8vo. 5s. cloth. _Newman (F. W.) The Iliad of Homer_, Faithfully translated into Unrhymed Metre. 1 vol. crown 8vo. 6s. 6d. cloth. _Akerman’s Numismatic Manual_, or Guide to the Collection and Study of Greek, Roman, and English Coins. Many Engravings. 8vo. £1 1s. _Ramsay’s (George) Principles of Psychology._ 8vo. 1Os. 6d. =PURE MATHEMATICS=. _De Morgan’s Elements of Arithmetic._ Fifteenth Thousand. Royal 12mo. 5s. cloth. _De Morgan’s Trigonometry and Double Algebra._ Royal 12mo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Ellenberger’s Course of Arithmetic_, as taught in the Pestalozzian School, Worksop. Post 8vo. 5s. cloth. ⁂ _The Answers to the Questions in this Volume are now ready, price 1s. 6d_. _Mason’s First Book of Euclid. Explained to Beginners._ Fcap. 8vo. 1s. 9d. _Reiner’s Lessons on Form; or, An Introduction to Geometry, as given in a Pestalozzian School, Cheam, Surrey._ 12mo. 3s. 6d. _Reiner’s Lessons on Number, as given in a Pestalozzian School, Cheam, Surrey._ Master’s Manual, 5s. Scholar’s Praxis, 2s. _Tables of Logarithms Common and Trigonometrical_ to Five Places. Under the Superintendence of the Society for the Diffusion of Useful Knowledge. Fcap. 8vo. 1s. 6d. _Four Figure Logarithms and Anti-Logarithms. On a Card._ Price 1s. _Barlow’s Tables of Squares, Cubes, Square Roots, Cube Roots, and Reciprocals_ of all Integer Numbers, up to 10,000. Royal 12mo. 8s. =MIXED MATHEMATICS=. _Potter’s Treatise on Mechanics, for Junior University Students._ By RICHARD POTTER, M.A., Professor of Natural Philosophy in University College, London. Third Edition. 8vo. 8s. 6d. _Potter’s Treatise on Optics. Part I._ All the requisite Propositions carried to First Approximations, with the construction of Optical Instruments, for Junior University Students. Second Edition. 8vo. 9s. 6d. _Potter’s Treatise on Optics. Part II._ The Higher Propositions, with their application to the more perfect forms of Instruments. 8vo. 12s. 6d. _Potter’s Physical Optics; or, the Nature and Properties of Light._ A Descriptive and Experimental Treatise. 100 Illustrations. 8vo. 6s. 6d. _Newth’s Mathematical Examples. A graduated series of Elementary Examples, in Arithmetic, Algebra, Logarithms, Trigonometry, and Mechanics._ Crown 8vo. With Answers. 8s. 6d. cloth. _Sold also in separate Parts, without Answers_:-- Arithmetic, 2s. 6d. Algebra, 2s. 6d. Trigonometry and Logarithms, 2s. 6d. Mechanics, 2s. 6d. _Newth’s Elements of Mechanics, including Hydrostatics, with numerous Examples._ By SAMUEL NEWTH, M.A., Fellow of University College, London. Second Edition. Large 12mo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Newth’s First Book of Natural Philosophy; or an Introduction to the Study of Statics, Dynamics, Hydrostatics, and Optics, with numerous Examples._ 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. =NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, ASTRONOMY, Etc=. _Lardner’s Museum of Science and Art._ Complete in 12 Single Volumes, 18s., ornamental boards; or 6 Double Ones, £1 1s., cl. lettered. ⁂ _Also, handsomely half-bound morocco, 6 volumes_, £1 11s. 6d. CONTENTS:--The Planets; are they inhabited Worlds? Weather Prognostics. Popular Fallacies in Questions of Physical Science. Latitudes and Longitudes. Lunar Influences. Meteoric Stones and Shooting Stars. Railway Accidents. Light. Common Things.--Air. Locomotion in the United States. Cometary Influences. Common Things.--Water. The Potter’s Art. Common Things.--Fire. Locomotion and Transport, their Influence and Progress. The Moon. Common Things.--The Earth. The Electric Telegraph. Terrestrial Heat. The Sun. Earthquakes and Volcanoes. Barometer, Safety Lamp, and Whitworth’s Micrometric Apparatus. Steam. The Steam Engine. The Eye. The Atmosphere. Time. Common Things.--Pumps. Common Things.--Spectacles--The Kaleidoscope. Clocks and Watches. Microscopic Drawing and Engraving. The Locomotive. Thermometer. New Planets.--Leverrier and Adams’s Planet. Magnitude and Minuteness. Common Things.--The Almanack. Optical Images. How to Observe the Heavens. Common Things.--The Looking Glass. Stellar Universe. The Tides. Colour. Common Things.--Man. Magnifying Glasses. Instinct and Intelligence. The Solar Microscope. The Camera Lucida. The Magic Lantern. The Camera Obscura. The Microscope. The White Ants; their Manners and Habits. The Surface of the Earth, or First Notions of Geography. Science and Poetry. The Bee. Steam Navigation. Electro-Motive Power. Thunder, Lightning, and the Aurora Borealis. The Printing Press. The Crust of the Earth. Comets. The Stereoscope. The Pre-Adamite Earth. Eclipses. Sound. _Lardner’s Animal Physics, or the Body and its Functions familiarly Explained._ 520 Illustrations. 1 vol., small 8vo. 12s. 6d. cloth. _Lardner’s Animal Physiology for Schools (chiefly taken from the “Animal Physics”)._ 190 Illustrations. 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. _Lardner’s Hand-Book of Mechanics._ 357 Illustrations. 1 vol., small 8vo., 5s. _Lardner’s Hand-Book of Hydrostatics, Pneumatics, and Heat._ 292 Illustrations. 1 vol., small 8vo., 5s. _Lardner’s Hand-Book of Optics._ 290 Illustrations. 1 vol., small 8vo., 5s. _Lardner’s Hand-Book of Electricity, Magnetism, and Acoustics._ 395 Illustrations. 1 vol., small 8vo. 5s. _Lardner’s Hand-Book of Astronomy and Meteorology_, forming a companion work to the “Hand-Book of Natural Philosophy.” 37 Plates, and upwards of 200 Illustrations on Wood. 2 vols., each 5s., cloth lettered. _Lardner’s Natural Philosophy for Schools._ 328 Illustrations. 1 vol., large 12mo., 3s. 6d. cloth. _Lardner’s Chemistry for Schools._ 170 Illustrations. 1 vol., large 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. _Pictorial Illustrations of Science and Art. Large Printed Sheets, each containing from 50 to 100 Engraved Figures._ Part I. 1s. 6d. 1. Mechanic Powers. 2. Machinery. 3. Watch and Clock Work. Part II. 1s. 6d. 4. Elements of Machinery. 5. Motion and Force. 6. Steam Engine. Part III. 1s. 6d. 7. Hydrostatics. 8. Hydraulics. 9. Pneumatics. _Lardner’s Popular Geology. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”)_ 201 Illustrations. 2s. 6d. _Lardner’s Common Things Explained. Containing_: Air--Earth--Fire--Water--Time--The Almanack--Clocks and Watches--Spectacles--Colour--Kaleidoscope--Pumps--Man--The Eye--The Printing Press--The Potter’s Art--Locomotion and Transport--The Surface of the Earth, or First Notions of Geography. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) With 233 Illustrations. Complete, 5s., cloth lettered. ⁂ _Sold also in Two Series_, 2s. 6d. _each_. _Lardner’s Popular Physics. Containing_: Magnitude and Minuteness--Atmosphere--Thunder and Lightning--Terrestrial Heat--Meteoric Stones--Popular Fallacies--Weather Prognostics--Thermometer--Barometer--Safety Lamp--Whitworth’s Micrometric Apparatus--Electro-Motive Power--Sound--Magic Lantern--Camera Obscura--Camera Lucida--Looking Glass--Stereoscope--Science and Poetry. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) With 85 Illustrations. 2s. 6d. cloth lettered. _Lardner’s Popular Astronomy. Containing_: How to Observe the Heavens--Latitudes and Longitudes --TheEarth--The Sun--The Moon--The Planets: are they Inhabited?--The New Planets--Leverrier and Adams’s Planet--The Tides--Lunar Influences--and the Stellar Universe--Light--Comets--Cometary Influences--Eclipses--Terrestrial Rotation--Lunar Rotation--Astronomical Instruments. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) 182 Illustrations. Complete, 4s. 6d. cloth lettered. ⁂ _Sold also in Two Series_, 2s. 6d. _and_ 2s._each_. _Lardner on the Microscope_. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) 1 vol. 147 Engravings. 2s. _Lardner on the Bee and White Ants; their Manners and Habits_; with Illustrations of Animal Instinct and Intelligence. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) 1 vol. 135 Illustrations. 2s., cloth lettered. _Lardner on Steam and its Uses_; including the Steam Engine and Locomotive, and Steam Navigation. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) 1 vol., with 89 Illustrations. 2s. _Lardner on the Electric Telegraph, Popularised_. With 100 Illustrations. (From “The Museum of Science and Art.”) 12mo., 250 pages. 2s., cloth lettered. ⁂ _The following Works from “Lardner’s Museum of Science and Art_,” may also be had arranged as described, handsomely half bound morocco, cloth sides. Common Things. Two series in one vol. 7s. 6d. Popular Astronomy. Two series in one vol. 7s. 0d. Electric Telegraph, with Steam and its Uses. In one vol. 7s. 0d. Microscope and Popular Physics. In one vol. 7s. 0d. Popular Geology, and Bee and White Ants. In one vol. 7s. 6d. _Lardner on the Steam Engine, Steam Navigation, Roads, and Railways_. Explained and Illustrated. Eighth Edition. With numerous Illustrations. 1 vol. large 12mo. 8s. 6d. _A Guide to the Stars for every Night in the Year. In Eight Planispheres_. With an Introduction. 8vo. 5s., cloth. _Minasi’s Mechanical Diagrams. For the Use of Lecturers and Schools._ 15 Sheets of Diagrams, coloured, 15s., illustrating the following subjects: 1 and 2. Composition of Forces.--3. Equilibrium.--4 and 5. Levers.--6. Steelyard, Brady Balance, and Danish Balance.--7. Wheel and Axle.--8. Inclined Plane.--9, 10, 11. Pulleys.--12. Hunter’s Screw.--13 and 14. Toothed Wheels.--15. Combination of the Mechanical Powers. =LOGIC=. _De Morgan’s Formal Logic; or, The Calculus of Inference_, Necessary and Probable. 8vo. 6s. 6d. _Neil’s Art of Reasoning:_ a Popular Exposition of the Principles of Logic, Inductive and Deductive; with an Introductory Outline of the History of Logic, and an Appendix on recent Logical Developments, with Notes. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d., cloth. =ENGLISH COMPOSITION=. _Neil’s Elements of Rhetoric_; a Manual of the Laws of Taste, including the Theory and Practice of Composition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d., cl. =DRAWING=. _Lineal Drawing Copies for the earliest Instruction_. Comprising upwards of 200 subjects on 24 sheets, mounted on 12 pieces of thick pasteboard, in a Portfolio. By the Author of “Drawing for Young Children.” 5s. 6d. _Easy Drawing Copies for Elementary Instruction._ Simple Outlines without Perspective. 67 subjects, in a Portfolio. By the Author of “Drawing for Young Children.” 6s. 6d. _Sold also in Two Sets._ SET I. Twenty-six Subjects mounted on thick pasteboard, in a Portfolio. 3s. 6d. SET II. Forty-one Subjects mounted on thick pasteboard, in a Portfolio. 3s. 6d. The copies are sufficiently large and bold to be drawn from by forty or fifty children at the same time. =SINGING=. _A Musical Gift from an Old Friend_, containing Twenty-four New Songs for the Young. By W. E. HICKSON, author of the Moral Songs of “The Singing Master.” 8vo. 2s. 6d. _The Singing Master. Containing First Lessons in Singing, and the Notation of Music_; Rudiments of the Science of Harmony; The First Class Tune Book; The Second Class Tune Book; and the Hymn Tune Book. Sixth Edition. 8vo. 6s., cloth lettered. _Sold also in Five Parts, any of which may be had separately._ I.--_First Lessons in Singing and the Notation of Music._ Containing Nineteen Lessons in the Notation and Art of Reading Music, as adapted for the Instruction of Children, and especially for Class Teaching, with Sixteen Vocal Exercises, arranged as simple two-part harmonies. 8vo. 1s., sewed. II.--_Rudiments of the Science of Harmony or Thorough Bass._ Containing a general view of the principles of Musical Composition, the Nature of Chords and Discords, mode of applying them, and an Explanation of Musical Terms connected with this branch of Science. 8vo. 1s., sewed. III.--_The First Class Tune Book_. A Selection of Thirty Single and Pleasing Airs, arranged with suitable words for young children. 8vo. 1s., sewed. IV.--_The Second Class Tune Book_. A Selection of Vocal Music adapted for youth of different ages, and arranged (with suitable words) as two or three-part harmonies. 8vo, 1s. 6d. V.--_The Hymn Tune Book_. A Selection of Seventy popular Hymn and Psalm Tunes, arranged with a view of facilitating the progress of Children learning to sing in parts. 8vo. 1s. 6d. ⁂ The Vocal Exercises, Moral Songs, and Hymns, with the Music, may also be had, printed on Cards, price Twopence each Card, or Twenty-five for Three Shillings. =CHEMISTRY=. _Gregory’s Hand-Book of Chemistry_. For the use of Students. By WILLIAM GREGORY, M.D., late Professor of Chemistry in the University of Edinburgh. Fourth Edition, revised and enlarged. Illustrated by Engravings on Wood. Complete in One Volume. Large 12mo. 18s. cloth. ⁂ _The Work may also be had in two Volumes, as under._ INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Fourth Edition, revised and enlarged. 6s. 6d. cloth. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Fourth Edition, very carefully revised, and greatly enlarged. 12s., cloth. (Sold separately.) _Chemistry for Schools_. By DR. LARDNER. 190 Illustrations. Large 12mo. 3s. 6d. cloth. _Liebig’s Familiar Letters on Chemistry, in its Relations to Physiology, Dietetics, Agriculture, Commerce, and Political Economy._ Fourth Edition, revised and enlarged, with additional Letters. Edited by DR. BLYTH. Small 8vo. 7s. 6d. cloth. _Liebig’s Letters on Modern Agriculture._ Small 8vo. 6s. _Liebig’s Principles of Agricultural Chemistry; with Special Reference to the late Researches made in England._ Small 8vo. 3s. 6d., cloth. _Liebig’s Chemistry in its Applications to Agriculture and Physiology._ Fourth Edition, revised. 8vo. 6s. 6d., cloth. _Liebig’s Animal Chemistry; or, Chemistry in its Application to Physiology and Pathology._ Third Edition. Part I. (the first half of the work). 8vo. 6s. 6d., cloth. _Liebig’s Hand-Book of Organic Analysis;_ containing a detailed Account of the various Methods used in determining the Elementary Composition of Organic Substances. Illustrated by 85 Woodcuts. 12mo. 5s., cloth. _Bunsen’s Gasometry_; comprising the Leading Physical and Chemical Properties of Gases, together with the Methods of Gas Analysis. Fifty-nine Illustrations. 8vo. 8s. 6d., cloth. _Wöhler’s Hand-Book of Inorganic Analysis;_ One Hundred and Twenty-two Examples, illustrating the most important processes for determining the Elementary composition of Mineral substances. Edited by DR. A. W. HOFMANN, Professor in the Royal College of Chemistry. Large 12mo. _Parnell on Dyeing and Calico Printing_. (Reprinted from Parnell’s “Applied Chemistry in Manufactures, Arts, and Domestic Economy, 1844.”) With Illustrations. 8vo. 7s., cloth. =GENERAL LITERATURE=. _De Morgans Book of Almanacs_. With an Index of Reference by which the Almanac may be found for every Year, whether in Old Style or New, from any Epoch, Ancient or Modern, up to A.D. 2000. With means of finding the Day of New or Full Moon, from B.C. 2000 to A.D. 2000._ 5s., cloth lettered. _Guesses at Truth. By Two Brothers. New Edition. With an Index._ Complete 1 vol. Small 8vo. Handsomely bound in cloth with red edges. 10s. 6d. _Rudall’s Memoir of the Rev. James Crabb; late of Southampton. With Portrait._ Large 12mo., 6s., cloth. _Herschell (R. H.) The Jews;_ a brief Sketch of their Present State and Future Expectations. Fcap. 8vo. 1s. 6d., cloth. *** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ELEMENTS OF ARITHMETIC *** Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed. Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. START: FULL LICENSE THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license. Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works 1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. 1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. 1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it without charge with others. 1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States. 1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: 1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed: This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook. 1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. 1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. 1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. 1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License. 1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. 1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. 1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that: • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.” • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works. • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work. • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. 1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. 1.F. 1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. 1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem. 1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. 1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. 1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect you cause. Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life. Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS. The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate. While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate. International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate. Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org. This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.